FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module

 

FF210005 Owners Manual BL00005160-200 EN Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents be-

fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be read by all who use the product. For the Latest Information The latest versions of the manuals are available from:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The site can be accessed not only from your computer but also from smartphones and tablets. It also contains information on the software license. For information on fi rmware updates, visit:

https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/

ii P Chapter Index Menu List 1 Before You Begin 2 First Steps 3 Basic Photography and Playback 4 Movie Recording and Playback 5 Taking Photographs 6 The Shooting Menus 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 8 The Setup Menus 9 Shortcuts 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 Connections 12 Technical Notes iv 1 27 41 47 53 103 183 209 245 261 279 295 iii Menu List Camera menu options are listed below. Shooting Menus Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies. N See page 103 for details. Photo Menus N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. M e n u L i s t 1313 P G AF/MF SETTING FOCUS AREA 126 AF MODE 126 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 127 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 131 131 AF POINT DISPLAY yz NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 131 PRE-AF 132 132 xF AF ILLUMINATOR FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 133 AF+MF 135 MF ASSIST 136 FOCUS CHECK 136 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 137 137 xF INSTANT AF SETTING 137 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 138 138 xF AF RANGE LIMITER 139 xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE 2323 3333 H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P IMAGE SIZE 104 IMAGE QUALITY 105 RAW RECORDING 106 FILM SIMULATION 106 MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 108 GRAIN EFFECT 108 COLOR CHROME EFFECT 108 COLOR CHROME FX BLUE 109 WHITE BALANCE 109 DYNAMIC RANGE 113 D RANGE PRIORITY 114 TONE CURVE 114 COLOR 115 SHARPNESS 115 HIGH ISO NR 115 CLARITY 116 LONG EXPOSURE NR 116 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER 116 COLOR SPACE 117 PIXEL MAPPING 117 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING 118 EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 118 AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 122 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 123 1313 2323 3333 iv 1122 P 141 141 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 A SHOOTING SETTING SCENE POSITION DRIVE SETTING HDR SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT sJ SELF-TIMER SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING SELF-TIMER LAMP INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING PHOTOMETRY 147 SHUTTER TYPE 148 FLICKER REDUCTION 149 IS MODE 150 ISO 150 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 151 147 2222 F FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING B MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE FILE FORMAT FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC F IS MODE AUDIO SETTING MIC/REMOTE RELEASE Menu List P 152 152 153 153 154 154 P 155 155 155 155 156 157 M e n u L i s t v Movie Menus N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. 1212 P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING 167 F FILM SIMULATION 167 F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 167 F WHITE BALANCE 168 F DYNAMIC RANGE 168 F TONE CURVE 168 F COLOR 169 F SHARPNESS 169 F HIGH ISO NR V INTERFRAME NR 169 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 170 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 170 2222 M e n u L i s t 1313 P B MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE 158 FILE FORMAT 159 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC 160 FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION 161 F-Log RECORDING 161 4K MOVIE OUTPUT 162 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT 162 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY 163 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY 163 HDMI REC CONTROL 163 F PHOTOMETRY 163 F IS MODE 164 F ISO 164 ZEBRA SETTING 165 ZEBRA LEVEL 165 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 165 TALLY LIGHT 166 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 166 2323 3333 vi 1212 P G AF/MF SETTING 171 F FOCUS AREA F AF MODE 171 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING 172 172 xF AF ILLUMINATOR F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 173 173 F MF ASSIST 174 F FOCUS CHECK 174 xF INSTANT AF SETTING 174 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 174 xF AF RANGE LIMITER 175 xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE FOCUS CHECK LOCK 177 2222 Menu List P AUDIO SETTING INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MIC JACK SETTING MIC LEVEL LIMITER WIND FILTER LOW CUT FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME MIC/REMOTE RELEASE Q TIME CODE SETTING TIME CODE DISPLAY START TIME SETTING COUNT UP SETTING DROP FRAME HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT P 178 178 179 179 179 179 179 180 P 181 181 181 182 182 M e n u L i s t vii C PLAY BACK MENU P RATING 200 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER 201 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 202 SLIDE SHOW 202 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST 203 PC AUTO SAVE 204 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) 205 instax PRINTER PRINT 206 207 3333 DISP ASPECT 2323 The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. N See page 189 for details. C PLAY BACK MENU RAW CONVERSION ERASE CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING 1313 P 189 192 194 195 196 197 198 199 M e n u L i s t viii Setup Menus Menu List Adjust basic camera settings. N See page 209 for details. P D USER SETTING FORMAT 210 DATE/TIME 211 TIME DIFFERENCE 211 Q a 212 212 x MY MENU SETTING 212 F MY MENU SETTING SENSOR CLEANING 213 SOUND & FLASH 213 RESET 214 REGULATORY 214 1212 2222 D SOUND SETTING AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. SHUTTER VOLUME SHUTTER SOUND PLAYBACK VOLUME P 215 215 216 216 216 216 M e n u L i s t D SCREEN SETTING P VIEW MODE SETTING 217 EVF BRIGHTNESS 217 EVF COLOR 217 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 218 LCD BRIGHTNESS 218 LCD COLOR 218 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 218 IMAGE DISP. 219 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 219 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 220 NATURAL LIVE VIEW 220 F-Log VIEW ASSIST 221 FRAMING GUIDELINE 221 AUTOROTATE PB 222 FOCUS SCALE UNITS 222 APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS 222 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 222 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 223 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 223 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 224 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 224 x Q MENU BACKGROUND 225 225 F Q MENU BACKGROUND 1313 2323 3333 ix Menu List P D CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS 239 PC AUTO SAVE 240 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING 241 CONNECTION MODE 242 USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING 243 GENERAL SETTINGS 244 INFORMATION 244 RESET WIRELESS SETTING 244 P 226 227 227 227 228 229 229 230 230 230 230 231 231 231 232 232 P 234 235 235 P 236 237 237 238 238 M e n u L i s t 1212 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT CARD FOCUS RING FOCUS RING OPERATION AE/AF-LOCK MODE AWB-LOCK MODE APERTURE RING SETTING (A) APERTURE SETTING TOUCH SCREEN SETTING 2222 D POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE BOOST SETTING D SAVE DATA SETTING FRAME NO. SAVE ORG IMAGE EDIT FILE NAME SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO x P Table of Contents Introduction ....................................................................................................ii For the Latest Information ................................................................................... ii Menu List .........................................................................................................iv Shooting Menus ........................................................................................................iv The Playback Menu ...............................................................................................viii Setup Menus ...............................................................................................................ix Supplied Accessories ............................................................................. xxiii About This Manual .................................................................................. xxiv Symbols and Conventions .............................................................................xxiv Terminology ............................................................................................................xxiv 1 Before You Begin Before You Begin 1 1 Parts of the Camera ......................................................................................2 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) .............................................................................4 The Shutter Speed Dial ..........................................................................................4 The Drive Dial ...............................................................................................................5 The Exposure Compensation Dial ...................................................................5 The Auto Mode Selector Lever ..........................................................................6 The Command Dials ................................................................................................7 The Indicator Lamp ..................................................................................................8 The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................9 Focusing the Viewfi nder........................................................................................9 Camera Displays.......................................................................................... 10 The Electronic Viewfi nder .................................................................................. 10 The LCD Monitor ..................................................................................................... 12 Adjusting Display Brightness ........................................................................... 14 Display Rotation ...................................................................................................... 14 Choosing a Display Mode ................................................................................. 14 The DISP/BACK Button ........................................................................................ 16 Customizing the Standard Display .............................................................. 17 Using the Menus ......................................................................................... 19 The Menus .................................................................................................................. 19 Selecting a Menu Tab ........................................................................................... 20 xi Touch Screen Mode ................................................................................... 21 Shooting Touch Controls ................................................................................... 21 Playback Touch Controls .................................................................................... 25 2 First Steps First Steps 27 27 Attaching the Strap ................................................................................... 28 Attaching a Lens ......................................................................................... 29 Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card ......................................... 30 Compatible Memory Cards .............................................................................. 32 Charging the Battery ................................................................................. 33 Turning the Camera On and Off ............................................................ 35 Checking the Battery Level ..................................................................... 36 Basic Setup.................................................................................................... 37 Choosing a Diff erent Language .................................................................... 39 Changing the Time and Date .......................................................................... 39 3 Basic Photography and Playback Basic Photography and Playback 41 41 Taking Photographs .................................................................................. 42 Viewing Pictures ......................................................................................... 44 Deleting Pictures ........................................................................................ 45 4 Movie Recording and Playback Movie Recording and Playback 47 47 Recording Movies ....................................................................................... 48 Adjusting Movie Settings .................................................................................. 50 Viewing Movies ........................................................................................... 51 5 Taking Photographs Taking Photographs 53 53 Choosing a Shooting Mode .................................................................... 54 Mode P: Program AE ............................................................................................. 54 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE .............................................................................. 56 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE .......................................................................... 59 Mode M: Manual Exposure ............................................................................... 60 Auto Mode .................................................................................................................. 61 Autofocus ...................................................................................................... 64 Focus Mode ................................................................................................................ 65 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ........................................................................ 67 Focus-Point Selection .......................................................................................... 69 xii Table of Contents Manual Focus ............................................................................................... 73 Checking Focus........................................................................................................ 75 Exposure Compensation ......................................................................... 77 C (Custom) .................................................................................................................. 78 Sensitivity ...................................................................................................... 79 AUTO............................................................................................................................... 80 Metering ........................................................................................................ 81 Focus/Exposure Lock ................................................................................ 82 Other Controls .......................................................................................................... 83 Bracketing ..................................................................................................... 84 O AE BKT .................................................................................................................... 85 W ISO BKT .................................................................................................................. 85 X FILM SIMULATION BKT ................................................................................ 85 V WHITE BALANCE BKT.................................................................................... 86 Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ................................................................................. 86 Z FOCUS BKT ......................................................................................................... 87 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) ..................................................... 89 Panoramas .................................................................................................... 91 Multiple Exposures .................................................................................... 94 Advanced Filters ......................................................................................... 96 Advanced Filter Options ..................................................................................... 97 Flash Photography ..................................................................................... 98 Flash Settings ......................................................................................................... 100 6 The Shooting Menus 103 The Shooting Menus 103 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) ................................104 IMAGE SIZE ............................................................................................................... 104 IMAGE QUALITY .................................................................................................... 105 RAW RECORDING ................................................................................................. 106 FILM SIMULATION ................................................................................................ 106 MONOCHROMATIC COLOR ........................................................................... 108 GRAIN EFFECT ........................................................................................................ 108 COLOR CHROME EFFECT ................................................................................ 108 COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ............................................................................... 109 WHITE BALANCE ................................................................................................... 109 xiii DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................. 113 D RANGE PRIORITY.............................................................................................. 114 TONE CURVE ........................................................................................................... 114 COLOR......................................................................................................................... 115 SHARPNESS .............................................................................................................. 115 HIGH ISO NR ............................................................................................................ 115 CLARITY ...................................................................................................................... 116 LONG EXPOSURE NR .......................................................................................... 116 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ................................................................. 116 COLOR SPACE ......................................................................................................... 117 PIXEL MAPPING ..................................................................................................... 117 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................. 118 EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ....................................................................... 118 AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................. 122 xF MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING ............................................................. 123 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ...................................................126 FOCUS AREA ........................................................................................................... 126 AF MODE ................................................................................................................... 126 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ................................................................................ 127 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION ............................................................ 131 AF POINT DISPLAY yz ................................................................................ 131 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS ......................................................................... 131 PRE-AF......................................................................................................................... 132 xF AF ILLUMINATOR .................................................................................... 132 FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .................................................................. 133 AF+MF ........................................................................................................................ 135 MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................. 136 FOCUS CHECK ........................................................................................................ 136 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA ....................................................... 137 xF INSTANT AF SETTING ........................................................................... 137 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE .................................................................... 137 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ............................................................................. 138 xF AF RANGE LIMITER ................................................................................ 138 xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE ....................................................................... 139 xiv Table of Contents SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) ..........................................141 SCENE POSITION .................................................................................................. 141 DRIVE SETTING ...................................................................................................... 141 HDR .............................................................................................................................. 142 SPORTS FINDER MODE ..................................................................................... 144 PRE-SHOT sJ .................................................................................................... 144 SELF-TIMER ............................................................................................................... 145 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING ............................................................................. 145 SELF-TIMER LAMP ................................................................................................ 146 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING .......................................................................... 146 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING ................. 147 PHOTOMETRY ........................................................................................................ 147 SHUTTER TYPE ....................................................................................................... 148 FLICKER REDUCTION ......................................................................................... 149 IS MODE ..................................................................................................................... 150 ISO ................................................................................................................................. 150 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ......................................................... 151 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ...................................................152 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ........................................................................... 152 RED EYE REMOVAL .............................................................................................. 152 TTL-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 153 LED LIGHT SETTING ............................................................................................ 153 COMMANDER SETTING .................................................................................... 154 CH SETTING ............................................................................................................. 154 MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ..................................................155 MOVIE MODE.......................................................................................................... 155 FILE FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 155 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC ............................................................................. 155 F IS MODE .............................................................................................................. 155 AUDIO SETTING .................................................................................................... 156 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ...................................................................................... 157 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) ...................................................158 MOVIE MODE.......................................................................................................... 158 FILE FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 159 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC ............................................................................. 160 xv FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION ............................................................ 161 F-Log RECORDING ............................................................................................... 161 4K MOVIE OUTPUT .............................................................................................. 162 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT ................................................................................ 162 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY ...................................................................... 163 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY ......................................................................... 163 HDMI REC CONTROL.......................................................................................... 163 F PHOTOMETRY ................................................................................................. 163 F IS MODE .............................................................................................................. 164 F ISO .......................................................................................................................... 164 ZEBRA SETTING ..................................................................................................... 165 ZEBRA LEVEL ........................................................................................................... 165 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ......................................................... 165 TALLY LIGHT ............................................................................................................. 166 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ......................................................... 166 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ................................167 F FILM SIMULATION ........................................................................................ 167 F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .................................................................... 167 F WHITE BALANCE ............................................................................................ 167 F DYNAMIC RANGE.......................................................................................... 168 F TONE CURVE .................................................................................................... 168 F COLOR ................................................................................................................. 168 F SHARPNESS ...................................................................................................... 169 F HIGH ISO NR ..................................................................................................... 169 V INTERFRAME NR........................................................................................... 169 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ....................................................... 170 xF MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING ............................................................. 170 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) ...................................................171 F FOCUS AREA .................................................................................................... 171 F AF MODE ........................................................................................................... 171 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................ 172 xF AF ILLUMINATOR .................................................................................... 172 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ........................................................... 173 F MF ASSIST .......................................................................................................... 173 F FOCUS CHECK ................................................................................................ 174 xvi Table of Contents xF INSTANT AF SETTING ........................................................................... 174 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE .................................................................... 174 xF AF RANGE LIMITER ................................................................................ 174 xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE ....................................................................... 175 FOCUS CHECK LOCK .......................................................................................... 177 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) ...................................................178 INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 178 EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ....................................................... 178 MIC JACK SETTING .............................................................................................. 179 MIC LEVEL LIMITER .............................................................................................. 179 WIND FILTER ............................................................................................................ 179 LOW CUT FILTER ................................................................................................... 179 HEADPHONES VOLUME ................................................................................... 179 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ...................................................................................... 180 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) ..........................................181 TIME CODE DISPLAY ........................................................................................... 181 START TIME SETTING .......................................................................................... 181 COUNT UP SETTING ........................................................................................... 181 DROP FRAME .......................................................................................................... 182 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ............................................................................ 182 7 Playback and the Playback Menu Playback and the Playback Menu 183 183 The Playback Display ...............................................................................184 The DISP/BACK Button ..................................................................................... 185 Viewing Pictures .......................................................................................187 Playback Zoom ...................................................................................................... 188 Multi-Frame Playback ........................................................................................ 188 The Playback Menu ..................................................................................189 RAW CONVERSION .............................................................................................. 189 ERASE .......................................................................................................................... 192 CROP ............................................................................................................................ 194 RESIZE ......................................................................................................................... 195 PROTECT .................................................................................................................... 196 IMAGE ROTATE ....................................................................................................... 197 RED EYE REMOVAL .............................................................................................. 198 xvii VOICE MEMO SETTING ..................................................................................... 199 RATING ........................................................................................................................ 200 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER ................................................................................ 201 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ......................................................... 202 SLIDE SHOW ............................................................................................................ 202 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST .......................................................................................... 203 PC AUTO SAVE ....................................................................................................... 204 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ......................................................................................... 205 instax PRINTER PRINT ......................................................................................... 206 DISP ASPECT ........................................................................................................... 207 8 The Setup Menus 209 The Setup Menus 209 USER SETTING ............................................................................................210 FORMAT ..................................................................................................................... 210 DATE/TIME ................................................................................................................ 211 TIME DIFFERENCE ................................................................................................ 211 Qa ......................................................................................................... 212 x MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................... 212 F MY MENU SETTING ...................................................................................... 212 SENSOR CLEANING ............................................................................................. 213 SOUND & FLASH ................................................................................................... 213 RESET ........................................................................................................................... 214 REGULATORY .......................................................................................................... 214 SOUND SETTING .......................................................................................215 AF BEEP VOL. .......................................................................................................... 215 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ...................................................................................... 215 OPERATION VOL. .................................................................................................. 216 SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................................................... 216 SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................................................. 216 PLAYBACK VOLUME ............................................................................................ 216 SCREEN SETTING.......................................................................................217 VIEW MODE SETTING ........................................................................................ 217 EVF BRIGHTNESS................................................................................................... 217 EVF COLOR ............................................................................................................... 217 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................. 218 xviii Table of Contents LCD BRIGHTNESS.................................................................................................. 218 LCD COLOR .............................................................................................................. 218 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................. 218 IMAGE DISP. ............................................................................................................. 219 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS ................................................................................... 219 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ..................................................... 220 NATURAL LIVE VIEW ............................................................................................ 220 F-Log VIEW ASSIST............................................................................................... 221 FRAMING GUIDELINE ......................................................................................... 221 AUTOROTATE PB ................................................................................................... 222 FOCUS SCALE UNITS .......................................................................................... 222 APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS ......................................................... 222 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................................... 222 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ................................................................. 223 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ................................................................ 223 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING ............................................................ 224 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. ................................................................. 224 x Q MENU BACKGROUND ........................................................................... 225 F Q MENU BACKGROUND ........................................................................... 225 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING ..........................................................................226 FOCUS LEVER SETTING ..................................................................................... 226 x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU .......................................................................... 227 F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU .......................................................................... 227 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ................................................................................. 227 COMMAND DIAL SETTING ............................................................................. 228 SHUTTER AF ............................................................................................................ 229 SHUTTER AE ............................................................................................................ 229 SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .................................................................................... 230 SHOOT WITHOUT CARD .................................................................................. 230 FOCUS RING ............................................................................................................ 230 FOCUS RING OPERATION ................................................................................ 230 AE/AF-LOCK MODE ............................................................................................. 231 AWB-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................ 231 APERTURE RING SETTING (A) ........................................................................ 231 APERTURE SETTING ............................................................................................ 232 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ................................................................................ 232 xix POWER MANAGEMENT ..........................................................................234 AUTO POWER OFF ............................................................................................... 234 PERFORMANCE ..................................................................................................... 235 BOOST SETTING .................................................................................................... 235 SAVE DATA SETTING ................................................................................236 FRAME NO. .............................................................................................................. 236 SAVE ORG IMAGE ................................................................................................. 237 EDIT FILE NAME ..................................................................................................... 237 SELECT FOLDER .................................................................................................... 238 COPYRIGHT INFO ................................................................................................. 238 CONNECTION SETTING ..........................................................................239 Bluetooth SETTINGS........................................................................................... 239 PC AUTO SAVE ....................................................................................................... 240 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING ................................................. 241 CONNECTION MODE ......................................................................................... 242 USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING ...................................................................... 243 GENERAL SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 244 INFORMATION ........................................................................................................ 244 RESET WIRELESS SETTING ............................................................................... 244 9 Shortcuts Shortcuts 245 245 Shortcut Options ......................................................................................246 MY MENU ....................................................................................................247 MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................. 247 The Quick Menu ........................................................................................249 The Quick Menu Display ................................................................................. 249 Viewing and Changing Settings................................................................. 251 Editing the Quick Menu ................................................................................... 252 Function Controls .....................................................................................255 The Function Buttons ........................................................................................ 255 Touch-Function Gestures ............................................................................... 258 xx Table of Contents 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories Peripherals and Optional Accessories 261 261 Lenses ...........................................................................................................262 Lens Parts .................................................................................................................. 262 Removing Lens Caps ......................................................................................... 263 Attaching Lens Hoods ...................................................................................... 263 Lenses with Aperture Rings .......................................................................... 264 Lenses with No Aperture Rings .................................................................. 265 Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ............................................................................ 265 Manual Focus Lenses ........................................................................................ 266 Lens Care ................................................................................................................... 267 External Flash Units .................................................................................268 Using an External Flash .................................................................................... 269 SYNC TERMINAL .................................................................................................... 270 SHOE MOUNT FLASH ........................................................................................ 271 COMMANDER(OPTICAL) .................................................................................. 274 11 Connections Connections 279 279 HDMI Output..............................................................................................280 Connecting to HDMI Devices ...................................................................... 280 Shooting .................................................................................................................... 281 Playback ..................................................................................................................... 281 Wireless Connections (Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) ............282 Smartphones and Tablets: FUJIFILM Camera Remote .................. 282 Copying Pictures to a Computer: PC AutoSave ................................ 284 Connecting via USB .................................................................................285 Connecting to Computers ............................................................................. 285 Copying Pictures from a Memory Card to a Computer ............... 288 Using Your Camera as a Webcam (FUJIFILM X Webcam) ........... 288 xxxxxx .......................................................................................................................... 289 Converting RAW Images: FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................... 289 Backing up and Restoring Camera Settings

(FUJIFILM X Acquire) ....................................................................................... 289 Connecting to Smartphones ....................................................................... 290 instax SHARE Printers ..............................................................................293 Establishing a Connection ............................................................................. 293 Printing Pictures.................................................................................................... 294 xxi Table of Contents 12 Technical Notes Technical Notes 295 295 Accessories from Fujifi lm .......................................................................296 Software for Use with Your Camera ...................................................298 FUJIFILM Camera Remote .............................................................................. 298 FUJIFILM PC AutoSave ...................................................................................... 298 RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX .............................. 298 Capture One Express Fujifi lm ....................................................................... 298 Capture One Pro Fujifi lm ................................................................................. 299 FUJIFILM X Acquire ............................................................................................. 299 FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ................................................................................. 299 FUJIFILM X Webcam .......................................................................................... 299 For Your Safety ...........................................................................................300 Product Care ...............................................................................................311 Cleaning the Image Sensor ...................................................................312 Firmware Updates ....................................................................................313 Checking the Firmware Version .................................................................. 313 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................314 Warning Messages and Displays .........................................................323 Memory Card Capacity ...........................................................................327 Specifi cations .............................................................................................328 xxii Supplied Accessories The following are included with the camera:

NP-W126S rechargeable battery Body cap (comes attached to camera) USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.) Shoulder strap Basic Manual O The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use

(P 33). N If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included. For information on compatible computer software, see Software for Use with Your Camera (P 298). xxiii About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-T30II digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual:

O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. product. N Additional information that may be helpful when using the P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplifi ed, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as memory cards. The elec-

tronic viewfi nder may be referred to as the EVF and the LCD monitor as the LCD. Smartphones and tablets are referred to as smartphones. xxiv Before You Begin 1 Parts of the Camera The parts of the camera are listed below. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i A Exposure compensation dial .................. 5, 77 B Shutter button .................................................43 C Auto mode selector lever ................................6 D Shutter speed dial N AF-assist illuminator...................................132 Self-timer lamp ............................................145 Tally light ........................................................166 O Front command dial ................................7,228 P ON/OFF switch .................................................35 Q Fn1 button .....................................................255 R Flash ...................................................................98 S Body cap ............................................................29 T Microphone/remote release connector

(2.5mm) .....................................49, 58, 157 U USB connector (Type-C) ..................... 33, 285 V HDMI Micro connector (Type D) .............280

.................................................4, 54, 56, 59, 60 E Hot shoe .........................................................269 F Drive dial .............................................................5 G N( ash pop-up) lever ...................................98 H Strap clip............................................................28 I Connector cover J Focus mode selector ......................................65 K Lens signal contacts L Lens release button ........................................29 M Microphone ............................................ 49, 178 O V Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long. 2 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i W b(delete) button ...........................................45 X a(playback) button ...................................44 Y Diopter adjustment control ...........................9 Z Electronic view nder (EVF)

.....................................................10, 14, 16, 21 a VIEW MODE button .........................................14 b AE-L (exposure lock) button ............... 83, 255 c Rear command dial ................................7, 187 d AF-L (focus lock) button ...................... 83, 255 e Indicator lamp ...................................................8 Tally light ........................................................166 f Q (quick menu) button ...............................249 g Focus stick (focus lever)...................4, 70, 226 h MENU/OK button .............................................19 i DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 16, 185 j Cable channel cover for DC coupler .......296 k Battery-chamber cover .................................30 l Battery-chamber cover latch ......................30 m Serial number plate......................... see below n Tripod mount o Speaker .................................................... 51, 216 p LCD monitor ............................9, 12, 14, 16, 22 Touch screen ........................21, 139, 175, 232 q Eye sensor ..........................................................15 r Battery latch .....................................................31 s Battery chamber .............................................30 t Memory card slot ............................................30 O m Do not remove the serial number plate, which provides the CMIITID, serial number, and other important information. 3 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-

cus area. The focus stick can also be used to navigate the menus. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i N Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER SETTING to choose the role played by the focus stick (P 226). The Shutter Speed Dial The shutter speed dial is used to choose the shutter speed. 4 Parts of the Camera The Drive Dial Rotate the dial to choose from the follow-

ing the drive modes. ModeMode Bracketing FF Movie BKT1BKT1 BKT2BKT2 CHCH High-speed burst CLCL Low-speed burst PP 48 84 89 89 ModeMode Single frame Advanced lter SS Adv.1 Adv.1 Adv.2 Adv.2 jj Multiple exposure uu Panorama The Exposure Compensation Dial Rotate the dial to choose an exposure compensation amount. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i PP 42 96 94 91 5 The Auto Mode Selector Lever Switch between auto and manual modes. Position Position 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode Select from P (program AE), S (shutter-priority AE), A (aper-

ture-priority AE), and M (manual) modes (P 54, 56, 59, 60). Adjust shutter speed and aperture using program shift

(mode P) or set shutter speed and/or aperture manually (modes S, A, and M). Auto mode. The camera adjusts settings automatically accord-

ing to the option selected by rotating the front command dial. Choose from modes suited to speci c subject types, or select AUTO to let the camera automatically match the mode to the subject (P 61). Scene selection is not available in drive modes Adv.1, Adv.2, j, and u. N Restrictions may apply to camera settings depending on the mode and shooting conditions. 6 Parts of the Camera The Command Dials Rotate or press the command dials to:

Front command dial Rear command dial 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Select menu tabs or page through menus Adjust aperture 1, 2 Choose a scene (auto mode) Adjust exposure compensation 4 Adjust sensitivity 2 View other pictures during playback Switch back and forth between aperture and exposure compen-

sation 2, 5 Press and hold to choose the op-

tion selected for D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING in the D(setup) menu Highlight menu items Choose the desired combina-

tion of shutter speed and aper-

ture (program shift) Choose a shutter speed 2 Adjust settings in the quick menu Choose the size of the focus frame Zoom in or out in full frame play-

back Zoom in or out in multi-frame playback Zoom in on the active focus point 3 Press and hold to choose the manual focus mode focus display 3 Zoom in on the active focus point during playback Rotate Rotate Press Press 1 Aperture set to A (auto) and lens equipped with aperture ring or COMMAND selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> APERTURE RING SETTING (A). 2 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 3 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button. 4 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C. 5 Can be used to switch back and forth between aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-

pensation when exposure compensation dial is rotated to C. 7 The Indicator Lamp Camera status is shown by the indicator lamp. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Indicator lamp Indicator lamp Glows green Blinks green Blinks green and orange Glows orange Blinks orange Blinks red Camera status Camera status Focus locked. Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken. Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for con-

rmation after being taken with option other than OFF selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP. (addi-

tional pictures can be taken). Camera off : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. *

Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at this time. Flash charging; ash will not re when picture is taken. Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload. N Warnings may also appear in the display. The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfi nder. The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-

cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. 8 Parts of the Camera The LCD Monitor The LCD monitor can be tilted for eas-

ier viewing, but be careful not to touch the wires or trap fi ngers or other objects behind the monitor. Touching the wires could cause camera malfunction. N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:

Touch photography (P 22) Focus area selection (P 21) Function selection (P 24) Movie optimized control oL (P 23) Playback (P 25) Focusing the Viewfi nder If the indicators displayed in the view-

fi nder are blurred, put your eye to the viewfi nder and rotate the diopter adjust-

ment control until the display is in sharp focus. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 9 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during shooting. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. The Electronic Viewfi nder A B C D E F G H JI K L M NO 3 2 1 0 z y x w v u t s 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0

-1

-1

-2

-2

-3

-3

-4

-4

-5

-5 P Q R S T U V W X Y opqr n m kl ij h fg e d c a Zb 10 A Crop factor .....................................................144 B Focus check ............................................ 75, 136 C Depth-of- eld preview ...........................59, 75 D Location data download status .....244, 282 E Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................239 F Image transfer status ........................239, 282 G Movie mode ........................................... 48, 158 H Full HD high-speed recording ..................160 I Recording time available/

elapsed recording time ..............................48 J Date and time ..................................37, 39, 211 K Number of available frames 1...................327 L Image size ......................................................104 M File format ......................................................159 N Image quality................................................105 O Temperature warning ................................326 P Touch screen mode .....................21, 139, 175 Q White balance ..............................................109 R AWB lock ........................................................231 S Film simulation ............................................106 T F-Log recording ............................................161 U Dynamic range ............................................113 V D-range priority ...........................................114 W Movie optimized control ..............................23 X Sound and ash indicator ........................213 Y Virtual horizon .................................................18 Z Boost mode ...................................................235 a Histogram .........................................................18 b Distance indicator 2 ........................................75 Camera Displays c Power supply ....................................................34 d Battery level ......................................................36 e Sensitivity ..........................................................79 f Exposure compensation ...............................77 g Focus frame ...............................................69, 82 h Aperture ...............................................55, 59, 60 i Time code .......................................................181 j Shutter speed .....................................55, 56, 60 k TTL lock ..................................................153, 257 l AE lock ...................................................... 83, 231 m Metering ............................................................81 n Shooting mode ...............................................54 o Focus mode 2 ....................................................65 p Focus indicator 2 ..............................................66 q Manual focus indicator 2 .......................65, 73 r AF lock ...................................................... 83, 231 s Mic jack setting ............................................179 t Recording level 2 ...........................................178 u AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................135 v Shutter type ...................................................148 w Continuous mode ...........................................89 x Exposure indicator ...................................60, 77 y Self-timer indicator .....................................145 z Microphone ......................................................49 0 Remote release ................................................58 1 Flash (TTL) mode .........................................271 2 IS mode 2 .........................................................150 3 Flash compensation ...................................271 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF). 11 The LCD Monitor I J N O A BC E F G H D K L M P Q R S T U V W X Y Z no fghijk abde c 12800 lmpqrs 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 3 2 1 0 z y x w v u t 12 A Crop factor .....................................................144 B Flash compensation ...................................271 C Focus check ............................................ 75, 136 D Depth-of- eld preview ...........................59, 75 E Location data download status .....244, 282 F Virtual horizon .................................................18 G Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................239 H Image transfer status ........................239, 282 I Movie mode ........................................... 48, 158 J Full HD high-speed recording ..................160 K Focus frame ...............................................69, 82 L Recording time available/

elapsed recording time ..............................48 M Number of available frames 1...................327 N Image size ......................................................104 O File format ......................................................159 P Image quality................................................105 Q Date and time ..................................37, 39, 211 R Touch screen mode 3 ...................21, 139, 175 S AWB lock ........................................................231 T White balance ..............................................109 U Film simulation ............................................106 V F-Log recording ............................................161 W Dynamic range ............................................113 X D-range priority ...........................................114 Y Movie optimized control ..............................23 Z Boost mode ...................................................235 a Temperature warning ................................326 b Sound and ash indicator ........................213 Camera Displays c Power supply ....................................................34 d Battery level ......................................................36 e Distance indicator 2 ........................................75 f Sensitivity ..........................................................79 g Histogram .........................................................18 h Exposure compensation ...............................77 i Aperture ...............................................55, 59, 60 j Time code .......................................................181 k Shutter speed .....................................55, 56, 60 l TTL lock ..................................................153, 257 m AE lock ...................................................... 83, 231 n Metering ............................................................81 o Shooting mode ...............................................54 p Focus mode 2 ....................................................65 q Focus indicator 2 ..............................................66 r Manual focus indicator 2 .......................65, 73 s AF lock ...................................................... 83, 231 t Mic jack setting ............................................179 u AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................135 v Shutter type ...................................................148 w Recording level 2 ...........................................178 x Continuous mode ...........................................89 y Exposure indicator ...................................60, 77 z Self-timer indicator .....................................145 0 Microphone ......................................................49 1 Remote release ................................................58 2 Flash (TTL) mode .........................................271 3 IS mode 2 .........................................................150 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). 3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls. 13 Adjusting Display Brightness The brightness and hue of the viewfi nder and LCD monitor can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu. Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfi nder brightness or hue, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do the same for the LCD monitor. Display Rotation When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor au-

tomatically rotate to match camera orientation. Choosing a Display Mode Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle through the following display modes. You can choose separate display modes for shooting and playback. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. LCD monitor on, view nder o . View nder on, LCD monitor o . Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on; taking it away turns the view nder o . The LCD mon-

itor remains o . SHOOTING Option Option EYE SENSOR EYE SENSOR LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY + EE EVF ONLY +

14 Camera Displays Option Option EE EYE SENSOR +

EYE SENSOR +

LCDIMAGE DISP. LCDIMAGE DISP. Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder during shooting turns the view nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for the display of images once you remove your eye from the view nder after shooting. The options selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display in the LCD monitor. PLAYBACK Option Option EYE SENSOR EE EYE SENSOR LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY EVF ONLY Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. LCD monitor on, view nder o . View nder on, LCD monitor o . N Displays modes for the EVF and LCD monitor can also be selected us-

ing D SCREEN SET-UP> VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu

(P 217). 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Eye Sensor The eye sensor may respond to objects other than your eye or to light shining directly on the sensor. Eye sensor 15 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor. N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose the EVF dis-

play, place your eye to the viewfi nder while using the DISP/BACK button. View nder (EVF) Standard indicators 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0

-1

-1

-2

-2

-3

-3

-4

-4

-5

-5 1000 12800 LCD Monitor Full screen

(no indicators) Standard indicators No indicators Info display (still photography only) 16 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays Customizing the Standard Display To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. 2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING. Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the setup menu. 3 Choose items. Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. ItemItem FRAMING GUIDELINE ELECTRONIC LEVEL FOCUS FRAME AF DISTANCE INDICATOR MF DISTANCE INDICATOR HISTOGRAM LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT SHOOTING MODE APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO INFORMATION BACKGROUND Expo. Comp. (Digit) Expo. Comp. (Scale) FOCUS MODE PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLASH ItemItem CONTINUOUS MODE DUAL IS MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE BOOST MODE FRAMES REMAINING IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER MIC LEVEL GUIDANCE MESSAGE BATTERY LEVEL FRAMING OUTLINE Default Default R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Default Default R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes. 5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 17 Virtual Horizon Selecting ELECTRONIC LEVEL displays a virtu-

al horizon. The camera is level when the two lines overlap. Note that the virtual horizon may not be displayed if the camera lens is pointed up or down. For a 3D display (shown), press the function button to which ELECTRONIC LEVEL is assigned (P 255). Camera Displays Pitch Roll Framing Outline Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see against dark backgrounds. Histograms Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Number of pixels Shadows Highlights Pixel brightness Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve throughout the tone range. Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of the graph. Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of the graph. To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-

play showing areas of the frame that will be overexposed at current settings superimposed on the view through the lens, press the func-

tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned

(P 255). A Overexposed areas blink B RGB histograms 18 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Using the Menus To display the menus, press MENU/OK. The Menus Diff erent menus are displayed during still photography, movie recording, and playback. Still photography: Drive dial rotated to position other than F (movie) Shooting Shooting Movie recording: Drive dial rotated to F (movie) Playback Playback During playback IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE EXIT MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE FILE FORMAT FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION F-Log RECORDING 4K MOVIE OUTPUT FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY EXIT PLAY BACK MENU RAW CONVERSION ERASE CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING EXIT 19 Using the Menus Selecting a Menu Tab To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left to highlight the tab for the cur-

rent menu. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE EXIT EXIT Tab 3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab contain-

ing the desired item. 4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu. N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items. 20 Touch Screen Mode The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen. Shooting Touch Controls To enable touch controls, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS TOUCH SCREEN SETTING DOUBLE TAP SETTING ON TOUCH FUNCTION OFF TOUCH SCREEN SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS EVF The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-

tures are being framed in the electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-

itor employed for touch controls. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i N When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used for focus. 21 LCD Monitor The operation performed can be selected by tapping the touch screen mode indica-

tor in the display. Touch controls can be used for the following operations:

1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode TOUCH TOUCH SHOOTING SHOOTING AF AFOFF Description Description Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter. In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your nger on the display. In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. AREAAREA Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. OFFOFF Touch controls disabled. O Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 140). N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING>

xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during movie recording, see Movie Recording

(xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 175). 22 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL Touch Screen Mode Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROLoL or tapping the movie-optimized mode but-

ton in the shooting display optimizes the command dials and touch controls for movie recording. This can be used to pre-

vent camera sounds being recorded with movie footage. SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPOSURE COMPENSATION ISO INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT N Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring. WIND FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME F FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE Movie-optimized mode button When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 23 Touch Function Functions can be assigned to the follow-

ing fl ick gestures in much the same way as function buttons (P 258):

Flick up: T-Fn1 Flick left: T-Fn2 Flick right: T-Fn3 Flick down: T-Fn4 N In some cases, touch-function fl ick ges-

tures display a menu; tap to select the desired option. Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function ges-

tures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING>

c TOUCH FUNCTION. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT SET CANCEL 24 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Touch Screen Mode Playback Touch Controls When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls can be used for the following playback operations:

Swipe: Swipe a fi nger across the display to view other images. Pinch-out: Place two fi ngers on the dis-

play and spread them apart to zoom in. Pinch-in: Place two fi ngers on the display and slide them together to zoom out. N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no further. Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in on the focus point. Drag: View other areas of the image during playback zoom. 25 MEMO 26 First Steps 27 Attaching the Strap Attach the strap. Attach the strap to the two strap clips as shown below. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured. 28 Attaching a Lens The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Remove the body cap from the camera and the rear cap from the lens. Place the lens on mount, keeping the marks on the lens and camera aligned (A), and then rotate the lens until it clicks into place (B). O When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the camera. Be careful not to touch the cameras internal parts. Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place. Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens. 2 F i r s t S t e p s Removing Lenses To remove the lens, turn the camera off , then press the lens release button (A) and rotate the lens as shown (B). O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens or inside the camera, replace the lens caps and camera body cap when the lens is not attached. Lenses and Other Optional Accessories The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM X-mount. O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-

changing) lenses. Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter. Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to malfunction. Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses. 29 Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card Insert the battery and memory card as described below. 1 Slide the battery-chamber latch as shown and open the battery-chamber cover. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Insert the battery. Using the battery to keep the bat-

tery latch pressed to one side, in-

sert the battery contacts fi rst in the direction shown by the arrow. 3 Insert the memory card. N The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as mem-

ory cards. 4 Close the battery-chamber cover and slide the battery-cham-

ber cover latch closed. 30 Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card Removing the Battery Before removing the battery or memory card, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. To remove the battery, press the battery latch to the side, and slide the battery out of the camera as shown. O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery. Removing Memory Cards To remove the memory card, press it in and re-

lease it slowly. The card can then be removed by hand. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Press the center of the card when ejecting it. When a memory card is removed, the card could be ejected too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. 31 2 F i r s t S t e p s Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card Compatible Memory Cards The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. The camera supports UHS-I memory cards. To record movies, use cards with a UHS speed class of 3 or better or a video speed class of V30 or better. A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifi lm website. For details, visit:

https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/. O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-

ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. Memory cards can be locked, making it impossible to format the card or to record or delete images. Before inserting a mem-

ory card, slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance immediately. miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-

era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove the card. Do not affi x labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels can cause camera malfunction. Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card. Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a com-

puter or other device to edit, delete, or rename image fi les. Always use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming fi les, copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the originals. Renaming the fi les on the camera can cause problems during playback. 32 Charging the Battery The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use. O An NP-W126S rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera. Turn the camera off for charging. The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating sys-

tem and USB interface. 2 F i r s t S t e p s Leave the computer on during charging. O The battery will not charge while the camera is on. Connect the supplied USB cable. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable. Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-

puter, computer settings, and the computers current state. The battery takes about 5 hours to charge with a charging input of 5 V/500 mA. To charge the battery from a household AC power outlet, use a BC-W126S battery charger (available separately). 33 Charging the Battery Charge Status The indicator lamp shows battery charge status as follows:

Indicator lamp Indicator lamp On O Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery charging. Charging complete. Charging error. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Do not affi x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from the camera. Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat. Read the cautions in The Battery and Power Supply. Use only genuine Fujifi lm rechargeable batteries designated for use in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-

uct malfunction. Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel the outer casing. The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its charging life and must be replaced. Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging. Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures. N If the camera is turned on during charging, charging will end and the USB connection will instead be used to power the camera. The battery level will begin to gradually decline (P 243). The camera will display a power supply icon when powered via USB. 34 Turning the Camera On and Off Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off . Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera on, or to OFF to turn the camera off . O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfi nder can aff ect pic-

tures or the view through the viewfi nder. Keep the lens and viewfi nder clean. N Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback. Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >

AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF switch to OFF and then back to ON. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 35 Checking the Battery Level After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the display. Battery level is shown as follows:

Indicator Indicator Description Description e Battery partially discharged. f Battery about 80% full. g Battery about 60% full. h Battery about 40% full. i Battery about 20% full. i

(red) j

(blinks red) Low battery. Charge as soon as possible. Battery exhausted. Turn camera o and recharge battery. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 36 Basic Setup When you turn the camera on for the fi rst time, you can choose a language and set the camera clock. At default settings, you can also pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet so that you can later synchronize the clocks or download pictures. Follow the steps below when turning the camera on for the fi rst time. N If you intend to pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet, install and launch the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote App on the smart device before proceeding. For more information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

1 Turn the camera on. A language-selection dialog will be displayed. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Choose a language. Highlight a language and press MENU/OK. 3 Pair the camera with the smartphone or tablet. Press MENU/OK to pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet running the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. N To skip pairing, press DISP/BACK. PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIR WITH SMARTPHONE?

IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED TO SMARTPHONE BY PAIRING SCAN QR CODE OR SEARCH FOR "FUJIFILM Camera Remote" APP ON THE WEB SET SKIP HELP 37 4 Check the time. When pairing is complete, you will be prompted to set the camera clock to the time reported by the smartphone or tablet. Check that the time is cor-

rect. PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIRING COMPLETE 12/31/2020 12:10 AM SET DATE/TIME FROM SMARTPHONE?

SET CANCEL N To set the clock manually, press DISP/BACK (P 39). 5 Synchronize the camera settings with the settings con gured on your smart-

phone or tablet. 2 F i r s t S t e p s SMARTPHONE SYNC. SETTING LOCATION&TIME LOCATION TIME OFF SET N The option selected can be changed at any time using D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS. 6 Set the clock. Press MENU/OK to set the camera clock to the time reported by the smartphone or tablet and exit to shooting mode. 7 Format the memory card (P 210). O Format memory cards before fi rst use, and be sure to reformat all memory cards after using them in a computer or other device. N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the camera is turned on. Skipping the Current Step If you skip a step, a confi rmation dialog will be displayed; select NO to avoid repeating any steps you skipped the next time the camera is turned on. 38 Choosing a Diff erent Language To change the language:

1 Display language options. Select D USER SETTING> Qa. 2 Choose a language. Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Changing the Time and Date To set the camera clock:

1 Display DATE/TIME options. Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME. Basic Setup 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock. 39 MEMO 40 Basic Photography and Playback 41 Taking Photographs This section explains basic photography. 1 Rotate the drive dial to S (single frame). 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l 2 Rotate the auto mode selector lever to w. 3 Ready the camera. Hold the camera steady with both handsshaking or unsteady hands can blur your shots. To prevent pictures that are out of focus or too dark (underexposed), keep your fi ngers and other objects away from the lens and AF-assist il-

luminator. 42 Taking Photographs 4 Frame the picture. Lenses with Zoom Rings Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom out, right to zoom in. 5 Press the shutter button halfway to set focus and exposure. 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l Focus indicator Focus frame If the camera is able to focus, it will beep twice and focus frame and focus indicator will glow green. If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white. N If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus operation. Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock). The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro and standard focus ranges for the lens. 6 Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture. 43 Viewing Pictures Pictures can be viewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor. To view pictures full frame, press a. 100-0001 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left to page through pictures in reverse order. Press it right to page through pictures in the order recorded. Keep the stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame. N You can also page through pictures using the front command dial or swipe gestures. Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (gift im-

age) icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that play-

back zoom may not be available. 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l 44 Deleting Pictures Use the b (delete) button to delete pictures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. 1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and select FRAME. ERASE FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES 2 Choose a picture and press MENU/OK to delete it. The picture will be deleted when the MENU/OK button is pressed; a confi rmation dialog is not displayed. Be careful not to accidentally delete pictures you wish to keep. Additional pictures can be deleted using the MENU/OK but-

ton. Display the desired pictures and press MENU/OK to de-

lete them one by one. N Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any pictures you wish to delete (P 196). Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK MENU> ERASE option (P 192). 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l 45 MEMO 46 Movie Recording and Playback 47 Recording Movies Record movies with sound. 1 Rotate the drive dial to F (movie). 2 Rotate the auto mode selector lever to w. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 3 Press the shutter button to start re-

cording. A recording indicator (V) is dis-

played while recording is in prog-

ress. The display shows the elapsed re-

cording time. 4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the movie reaches 29minutes 59seconds or the memory card is full. Temperature Warnings The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed, image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before turning it on again (P 326). 48 Recording Movies Using an External Microphone Sound can be recorded with external micro-

phones that connect using jacks 2.5mm in di-

ameter; microphones that require plug-in pow-

er cannot be used. See the microphone manual for details. O Use a memory card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better when re-

cording movies. Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording. Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds made by the camera during recording. Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. N The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp indicator or AF-assistthat lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). In the case of zoom lenses, zoom can be adjusted during recording using the zoom ring (if available). If the lens is equipped with an aperture mode switch, select the ap-

erture mode before beginning recording. If an option other than A is selected, shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted while recording is in progress. While recording is in progress, you can:

- Adjust sensitivity

- Use the VIEW MODE button and the eye sensor to switch between the EVF and LCD monitor displays

- Refocus using any of the following methods:

Press the shutter button halfway Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned Use touch screen controls

- Display a histogram or artifi cial horizon by pressing the button to which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL has been assigned 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 49 Recording Movies N Exposure compensation can be adjusted during recording, but only by a maximum of 2 EV. Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases settings may not apply during recording. To choose the focus area for movie recording, select B MOVIE SETTING> F FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial (P 171). Adjusting Movie Settings Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 19). Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quickly adjust settings when recording movies via a button to which MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE has been assigned (P 155). The movie menus contain options for use when recording movies via the shutter button while the drive dial is rotated to F(movie; P 158). O Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of menus automatically apply in the other. Depth of Field To soften backgrounds, set aperture as wide as possible. Aperture can be adjusted manually at settings other than A. 50 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l Viewing Movies View movies on the camera. In full-frame playback, movies are iden-

tifi ed by a W icon. Press the focus stick

(focus lever) down to start movie play-

back. The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed. PLAYPLAY 4 Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever)

(focus lever) Up Down Full-frame playback Full-frame playback Playback in progress Playback in progress

((xx)) Playback paused (yy)) Playback paused (

Start playback End playback Pause playback Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed Progress is shown in the display during playback. Start/resume playback Single frame rewind/

advance 29m59s i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l STOP PAUSE O Do not cover the speaker during playback. Sound is not played back if OFF is selected for D USER SETTING>

SOUND & FLASH. N Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. 51 Playback Speed Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to adjust playback speed during playback. Speed is shown by the number of arrows (M or N). Viewing Movies 29m59s Arrows 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 52 Taking Photographs 53 Choosing a Shooting Mode Modes P, S, A, and M can be selected via adjustments to shutter speed and/or aperture. In auto mode, you can let the camera adjust settings to suit the scene (AUTO) or choose the scene yourself. Mode P: Program AE Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be selected with program shift. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever v B Shutter speed C Aperture A (auto) A (auto) Confi rm that P appears in the display. O If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed and aperture displays will show . 54 Choosing a Shooting Mode Program Shift If desired, you can rotate the rear command dial to select other combinations of shutter speed and aperture without altering exposure (pro-

gram shift). Aperture Shutter speed O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:

With fl ash units that support TTL auto When a fl ash mode other than D is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION SETTING When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>

DYNAMIC RANGE In movie mode N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off . 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 55 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for optimal exposure. Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever v B Shutter speed C Aperture User-selected A (auto) Confi rm that S appears in the display. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter speed, aperture will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-

ture display will show . N At settings other than 180X, shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 13EV by rotating the rear command dial. Shutter speed can be adjusted while the shutter button is pressed halfway. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 56 Choosing a Shooting Mode Time (T) Rotate the shutter speed dial to T (time) to choose slow shutter speeds for long time-exposures. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure. 1 Rotate the shutter speed dial to T. 2 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a shutter speed. 3 Press the shutter button all the way down to take a picture at the selected shutter speed. At speeds of 1 s or slower, a count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in progress. N To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 57 Bulb (B) Select a shutter speed of B (bulb) for long time-exposures in which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is recom-

mended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure. 1 Rotate the shutter speed dial to B. 2 Press the shutter button all the way down. The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the shutter button is pressed; the display shows the time elapsed since the ex-

posure started. N Selecting an aperture of A fi xes shutter speed at 30 s. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. Using a Remote Release A remote release can be used for long time-ex-

posures. When using an optional RR-100 remote release or an electronic release from third-party suppliers, connect it to the cameras remote re-

lease connector. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s N A confi rmation dialog will be displayed when a remote release is connected; press MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/

REMOTE RELEASE. C H E C K M I C / R E M O T E R E L E A S E S E T T I N G SET SKIP 58 Choosing a Shooting Mode Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for optimal exposure. Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever v B Shutter speed C Aperture A (auto) Z (user-selected) Confi rm that A appears in the display. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture, shutter speed will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed display will show . N Rotate the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Previewing Depth of Field When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned to a function button, pressing the button dis-

plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the selected setting, allowing depth of fi eld to be previewed in the display (P 255). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 59 Mode M: Manual Exposure In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture. Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed

(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-

pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-

ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever v B Shutter speed C Aperture User-selected Z (user-selected) Confi rm that M appears in the display. N Rotate the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. At settings other than 180X, shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 13EV by rotating the rear command dial. Exposure Preview To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for D SCREEN SET-UP> PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE. N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the fl ash or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken. 60 Choosing a Shooting Mode Auto Mode To take pictures in auto mode, rotate the auto mode selector lever to w and rotate the front command dial to choose a scene. Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever w B Drive dial C Front command dial S (single frame) Scene selection Confi rm that AUTO appears in the display. N You can also choose a scene using the A SHOOTING SETTING >

SCENE POSITION item in the shooting menu. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 61 Choose from the following options:

ModeMode AUTOAUTO PORTRAIT hh PORTRAIT PORTRAIT ENHANCER ZZ PORTRAIT ENHANCER MM LANDSCAPE LANDSCAPE NN SPORT SPORT NIGHT OO NIGHT NIGHT (TRIPOD) HH NIGHT (TRIPOD) FIREWORKS pp FIREWORKS SUNSET QQ SUNSET RR SNOWSNOW BEACH ss BEACH UNDERWATER ff UNDERWATER PARTY UU PARTY FLOWER VV FLOWER TEXT WW TEXT 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Description Description The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the scene (P 63). Choose for portraits. Processes portraits to give the subject a smooth, natu-

ral-looking complexion. Choose for daylight shots of buildings and landscapes. Choose when photographing moving subjects. Choose for poorly lit twilight or night scenes. Choose this mode for slow shutter speeds when shoot-

ing at night. Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the expanding burst of light from a rework. Choose this mode to record the vivid colors in sunrises and sunsets. Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness of scenes dominated by shining white snow. Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness of sunlit beaches. Reduces the blue cast typically associated with under-

water lighting. Capture indoor background lighting under low-light conditions. E ective for taking more vivid shots of owers. Take clear pictures of text or drawings in print. N Scene selection is available only when the drive dial is set to S, CH(high-

speed burst), or CL (low-speed burst). 62 Choosing a Shooting Mode AUTO If AUTO is chosen via scene selection, the scene chosen by the camera will be shown by an icon in the display. y : GREENERY h : PORTRAIT g : BACKLIT PORTRAIT c : MOVING OBJECT a : PORTRAIT&MOTION b : BACKLIT PORTRAIT&MOTION C : LANDSCAPE d : NIGHT h : NIGHT (TRIPOD) e : MACRO Q : SUNSET x : SKY O The mode selected may vary with the subject, and the camera may select diff erent scenes for the same subject depending on shooting conditions. If the mode and subject do not match, select a scene manually. The additional processing time required in some scene modes may increase save times. N No icon will be displayed if the camera is unable to determine the type of scene. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 63 Autofocus Take pictures using autofocus. 1 Rotate the auto mode selector lever to v (P 6). 2 Rotate the focus mode selector to S or C (P 65). 3 Use G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE to choose an AF mode

(P 67). 4 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA and choose the position and size of the focus frame (P 69). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 5 Take pictures. 64 Focus Mode Use the focus mode selector to choose how the camera focuses. Autofocus Choose from the following options:

ModeMode S

(AF-S) C

(AF-C) M

(manual) Description Description Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for stationary subjects. Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to re ect changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion. Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (P 73). N Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-

justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button is not pressed. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 65 The Focus Indicator Focus status is shown by the focus indicator. Focus indicator Focus indicator

Focus status Focus status

) z (lights green)

(z) (lights green) Camera focusing. Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S). Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject. Focus indicator A (blinks white) Camera unable to focus. j Manual focus (focus mode M). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 66 Autofocus Autofocus Options (AF Mode) Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes. 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE. 3 Choose an AF mode. How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode. Focus Mode S (AF-S) Focus Mode S (AF-S) Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image r SINGLE POINT Camera focuses on subject in selected focus point. Use for pin-

point focus on selected subject. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s y ZONE z WIDE j ALL Camera focuses on subject in se-

lected focus zone. Focus zones in-

clude multiple focus points, mak-

ing it easier to focus on subjects in motion. Camera focuses automatically on high-contrast subjects; display shows areas in focus. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 70, 71) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE. 67 Focus Mode C (AF-C) Focus Mode C (AF-C) Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image r SINGLE POINT Focus tracks subject at selected fo-

cus point. Use for subjects moving toward or away from camera. y ZONE Focus tracks subject in selected fo-

cus zone. Use for subjects that are moving fairly predictably. z TRACKING tracks subjects moving Focus through wide area of frame. j ALL Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 70, 71) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 68 Autofocus Focus-Point Selection Choose a focus point for autofocus. Viewing the Focus-Point Display 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the fo-

cus-point display. 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to choose a focus area. N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 21). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 69 Selecting a Focus Point Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the focus point and the rear command dial to choose the size of the focus frame. The procedure varies with the option se-

lected for AF mode. Focus stick Focus stick Rear command dial Rear command dial AF mode AF mode rr yy zz TiltTilt Press Press Select focus point Select center focus point Rotate Rotate Choose from 6 frame sizes Choose from 3 frame sizes Press Press Restore original size N Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING is selected in focus mode S. If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE

(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode S) or z TRACKING

(focus mode C). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 70 Autofocus The Focus-Point Display The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF mode. N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large squares. SINGLE POINT rr SINGLE POINT AF mode AF mode ZONE yy ZONE WIDE/TRACKING zz WIDE/TRACKING Number of points avail-

able can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING>

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Choose from zones with 7 7, 5 5, or 3 3 focus points. Position focus frame over subject you want to track using continuous AF. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 71 Autofocus Autofocus Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be unable to focus on the subjects listed below. Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies. Subjects photographed through a window or other refl ective object. Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than refl ect light, such as hair or fur. Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or fl ame. Subjects that show little contrast with the background. Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a backdrop of highly contrasting elements). Checking Focus To zoom in on the current focus area for precise focus, press the center of the rear command dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. Press the center of the rear command dial again to cancel zoom.

Normal display Focus zoom N In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear com-

mand dial. The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in eff ect. In focus mode S, select SINGLE POINT for G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE. Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF is on. Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to change the function performed by the center of the rear command dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 255). 72 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Manual Focus Adjust focus manually. 1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M. j will appear in the display. 2 Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce the focus distance, right to increase. A 3 Take pictures. N Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS RING to reverse the direc-

tion of rotation of the focus ring. Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 73 Quick Focus To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial). In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-

sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option chosen for G AF/MF SETTING> INSTANT AF SETTING. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 74 Manual Focus Checking Focus A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual focus mode. The Manual Focus Indicator The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-

cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu), the blue bar the depth of fi eld, or in other words the distance in front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus. Focus distance

(white line) Depth of fi eld N If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-

of-fi eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. Use the G AF/MF SETTING > DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option to choose how depth of fi eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. Focus Zoom If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK, the camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated (P 69). Press the center of the rear command dial to exit zoom. 75 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Manual Focus N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. If STANDARD or FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom cannot be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL MICROPRISM is selected. MF Assist Use G AF/MF SETTING> MF ASSIST to choose a focus check option. N The MF ASSIST menu can be displayed by pressing and holding the center of the rear command dial. The following options are available:

DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and ro-

tate the focus ring until the four parts of the split image are correctly aligned. DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when the subject is in focus. FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-

trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until the subject is highlighted. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 76 Exposure Compensation Adjust exposure. Rotate the exposure compensation dial. O The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode. Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display, although the display may not accurately refl ect its eff ects if:

- the exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 EV,

- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or

- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY. Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the display may not accurately refl ect the eff ects of exposure compensa-

tion during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by select-

ing mode M and adjusting exposure directly. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 77 Exposure Compensation C (Custom) When the exposure compensation dial is rotated to C, exposure compensation can be adjusted by fi rst pressing the center of the front command dial and then rotat-

ing the dial. N The front command dial can be used to set exposure compensation to values between 5 and +5EV. The front command dial can be used to set aperture or exposure compensation. Press the center of the dial to toggle between the two. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 78 Sensitivity Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Set sensitivity using A SHOOTING SETTING> ISO. Option Option AUTO1 AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO2 AUTO3 AUTO3 Description Description Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting con-

ditions according to combination of standard and maximum sen-

sitivity and minimum shutter speed chosen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3

(P 80). 16012800 Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display. 16012800 L (80) L (80) L (100) L (100) L (125) L (125) H (25600) H (25600) H (51200) H (51200) Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may appear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range. N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off . When the drive dial is rotated to F (movie), the movie menu B MOVIE SETTING> F ISO item will be displayed. If desired, you can use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING to confi gure the camera so that ISO sensitivity can be adjusted using the front or rear command dial. Adjusting Sensitivity High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 79 Sensitivity AUTO Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3. ItemItem DEFAULT SENSITIVITY MAX. SENSITIVITY MIN. SHUTTER SPEED Options Options 16012800 40012800 SEC, AUTO AUTO1 AUTO1 800 Default Default AUTO2 AUTO2 160 3200 AUTO AUTO3 AUTO3 12800 The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-

fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED. N If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will auto-

matically choose a minimum shutter speed fast enough to prevent blur caused by subject motion or camera shake (the minimum shut-

ter speed is not aff ected by the option selected for image stabiliza-

tion). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 80 Metering Choose how the camera meters exposure. A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY off ers a choice of the following metering options:

O The selected option will only take eff ect when G AF/MF SETTING>

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is OFF. ModeMode o MULTIMULTI p CENTER CENTER WEIGHTED WEIGHTED v SPOT SPOT w AVERAGE AVERAGE Description Description The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analy-

sis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recom-

mended in most situations. The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the area at the center. The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and in other cases in which the background is much brighter or darker than the main subject. Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same light-

ing, and is particularly e ective for landscapes and portraits of subjects dressed in black or white. N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/

MF SETTING> INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 137). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 81 Focus/Exposure Lock Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. 1 Position the subject in the focus frame and press the shutter button halfway to lock focus and exposure. Focus and exposure will remain locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway (AF/AE lock). 2 Press the button all the way down. N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF, SHUTTER AE. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 82 Other Controls Focus/Exposure Lock Focus and exposure can also be locked with the AF-L and AE-L buttons. At default settings, the AF-L button locks focus, the AE-L button exposure. While the assigned control is pressed, pressing the shutter button halfway will not end the lock. If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> AE/AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be ended by pressing the control a second time. N The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point during exposure lock. The AE-L and AF-L buttons can be assigned other roles using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 255). AE-L AF-L 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 83 Bracketing Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures. 1 Rotate the drive dial to BKT1 or BKT2. 2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING in the A SHOOTING SETTING menu and select the desired bracketing option using BKT1 SETTING/BKT2 SETTING> BKT SELECT (P 141). Bracketing type Bracketing type AE BKT OO AE BKT ISO BKT WW ISO BKT XX FILM SIMULATION BKT FILM SIMULATION BKT V V WHITE BALANCE BKT WHITE BALANCE BKT DYNAMIC RANGE BKT Y Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT FOCUS BKT ZZ FOCUS BKT 3 Adjust bracketing settings as desired. 4 Take pictures. PP 85 85 85 86 86 87 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 84 Bracketing O AE BKT Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which the shots are taken. Settings can be adjusted us-

ing A SHOOTING SETTING> DRIVE SETTING> BKT1 SETTING/

BKT2 SETTING> AE BKT. Option Option FRAMES/STEP SETTING 1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS Description Description Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the amount exposure is varied with each shot. FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each shot. 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken one at a time. CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are tak-

en in a single burst. SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken. N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the limits of the exposure metering system. W ISO BKT Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with sensitivity lowered by a selected amount. The amount can be chosen us-

ing A SHOOTING SETTING> DRIVE SETTING> BKT1 SETTING/

BKT2 SETTING> ISO BKT. 13 Options Options 23 1 X FILM SIMULATION BKT Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create copies with diff erent fi lm simulation set-

tings (P 106). Film simulation settings can be chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING > DRIVE SETTING > BKT1 SETTING/

BKT2 SETTING> FILM SIMULATION BKT. 85 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s V WHITE BALANCE BKT Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take a picture at the current white balance setting and process it to create two additional copies, one with fi ne-tuning increased and the other with fi ne-tuning decreased by a selected amount. The amount can be chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING> DRIVE SETTING>

BKT1 SETTING/BKT2 SETTING> WHITE BALANCE BKT. 1 Options Options 2 3 Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three shots with diff erent dynamic ranges: 100% for the fi rst, 200% for the second, and 400% for the third. N While dynamic range bracketing is in eff ect, sensitivity will be restricted to a minimum of ISO 640; the sensitivity previously in eff ect is restored when bracketing ends. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 86 Bracketing Z FOCUS BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a se-

ries of photos, varying focus with each shot. Settings can be ad-

justed using A SHOOTING SETTING> DRIVE SETTING> BKT1 SETTING/BKT2 SETTING> FOCUS BKT. MANUAL AUTO Options Options N Do not adjust zoom during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended. MANUAL In MANUAL mode, you choose the following. Option Option FRAMES STEP INTERVAL Description Description Choose the number of shots. Choose the amount focus changes with each shot. Choose the interval between shots. Focus and FRAMES/STEP The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP is shown in the illustration. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s

Step Frames 1 2 3 4 5 Starting focus position Focus proceeds from the starting position toward in nity. Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger changes. Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reaches in nity. 87 Bracketing AUTO In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP auto-

matically. 1 Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL. The view through the lens will be displayed. 2 Focus on the nearest end of the sub-

ject and press MENU/OK. The selected focus distance appears as A on the focus distance indicator. FOCUS BKT SETTING SET POINT A CONTROL THE FOCUS RING SET POINT B SET N The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest end of the subject fi rst. 3 Focus on the farthest end of the sub-

FOCUS BKT SETTING SET POINT B CONTROL THE FOCUS RING ject and press DISP/BACK. The selected focus distance (B) and focus range (A to B) appear on the focus distance indicator. N Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK SET POINT A SET and select A again. 4 Take photographs. The camera will calculate values for FRAMES and STEP automatically. The number of frames will appear in the display. NO N BKT1 SETTING and BKT2 SETTING use the same values for A and B. 88 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) Capture motion in a series of pictures. 1 Rotate the drive dial to select CH(high-

speed burst) or CL(low-speed burst). 2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING> CH HIGH SPEED BURST or CL LOW SPEED BURST in the A SHOOTING SETTING menu and choose a frame advance rate. Option Option Description Description Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is ro-

tated to CH (high-speed burst). The display frame rate when the electronic shutter is used is 40fps, or 60fps in 1.25 crop mode. CH HIGH SPEED BURST Options Options 30fps(1.25X CROP) R *

10fps(1.25X CROP) R *

10fps R *

20fps(1.25X CROP) R *

20fps R *

8.0fps

* Available with electronic shutter only. Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to CL (low-speed burst). 5.0fps Options Options 4.0fps 3.0fps CL LOW SPEED BURST 3 The camera will take pictures continuously while the shut-

ter-release button is pressed. Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the memory card is full. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 89 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) O Frame advance rates of 10 fps or faster are available only when s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER is selected for A SHOOTING SETTING>

SHUTTER TYPE. If fi le numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the re-

maining pictures will be recorded to a new folder. Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the space available on the memory card is insuffi cient. Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken. Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus mode. Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the fl ash may not fi re. Recording times may increase during burst shooting. Focus and Exposure Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot. To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

SHUTTER AE. N Exposure and focus tracking performance may vary with such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 90 Panoramas Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama. 1 Rotate the drive dial to u (Panorama). 2 To select the size of the angle through which you will pan the camera while shooting, press the focus stick (focus lever) left. Highlight a size and press MENU/OK. 3 Press the focus stick right to view a choice of pan directions. Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK. 4 Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording. There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during recording. 5 Pan the camera in the direction shown by the arrow. Shooting ends automatically when the camera is panned to the end of the guides and the panorama is complete. Sweep camera along yellow line in direction of ANGLE DIRECTION 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 91 For Best Results Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to pan only in the direction shown by the guides Try panning at a diff erent speed if the desired results are not achieved Prop your elbows against your sides Use a tripod For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50mm or less in 35mm format). O If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded. The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends before the panorama is complete. Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may in some cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly. Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit. Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown cancels shooting. The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle than selected. The desired results may not be achieved with:

- Moving subjects

- Subjects close to the camera

- Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a fi eld of grass

- Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls

- Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AE, ex-

posure for the entire panorama is determined by the fi rst frame. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 92 Viewing Panoramas With the panorama displayed full frame, press the focus stick (focus lever) down to start panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically, horizontal panoramas horizontally. Panoramas PLAY STOP PAUSE In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom pan-

oramas in or out. Panorama playback is controlled using the focus stick. Full-frame Full-frame playback playback Start playback Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever)

(focus lever) Up Down Panorama Panorama playback paused playback paused Panorama Panorama playback playback End playback Pause playback Choose pan direction Resume playback Scroll panorama manually Left/right View other pictures 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 93 Multiple Exposures Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures. 1 Rotate the drive dial to j (Multiple exposure). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 2 Choose a blend mode using A SHOOTING SETTING> DRIVE SETTING> MULTIPLE EXPOSURE CTRL. Option Option ADDITIVE AVERAGE BRIGHT DARK Description Description The camera adds the exposures together. You may need to lower exposure compensation depending on the number of shots. The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the nal picture. The background in series shot without changing the composition will be optimally exposed. The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed de-

pending on their brightness and hue. The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed de-

pending on their brightness and hue. 3 Take the fi rst shot. 94 Multiple Exposures 4 Press MENU/OK. The fi rst shot will be shown superimposed on the view through the lens and you will be prompted to take the second shot. N To return to the previous step and retake the fi rst shot, press the focus stick (focus lever) left. To save the fi rst shot and exit without creating a multiple expo-

sure, press DISP/BACK. NEXT RETRY EXIT 5 Take the second shot, using the fi rst frame as a guide. EXIT 6 Press MENU/OK. The combined exposures will be dis-

played as a guide to composing the next shot. N To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press the focus stick left. To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots taken to this point, press DISP/BACK. RETRY EXIT 7 Make additional exposures. Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures. 8 Press DISP/BACK to end shooting. The camera will create the combined image and multiple ex-

posure shooting will end. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 95 Advanced Filters Take photos with fi lter eff ects. 1 Rotate the drive dial to Adv.1 or Adv.2

(Advanced fi lter). 2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING> Adv. FILTER 1 SELECT or Adv. FILTER 2 SELECT in the A SHOOTING SETTING menu and choose the desired fi lter eff ect. 3 Take photographs. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 96 Advanced Filters Advanced Filter Options Choose from the following fi lters:

Filter Filter G TOY CAMERA H MINIATURE I POP COLOR J HIGH-KEY Z LOW-KEY K DYNAMIC TONE X SOFT FOCUS u PARTIAL COLOR (RED) v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE) w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW) x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN) y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE) z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE) Description Description Choose for a retro toy camera e ect. The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for a diorama e ect. Create high-contrast images with saturated colors. Create bright, low-contrast images. Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of em-

phasized highlights. Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy e ect. Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the whole image. Areas of the image that are the selected color are recorded in that color. All other areas of the image are recorded in black-and-white. N Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in some cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 97 Flash Photography Use the built-in fl ash for additional lighting when shooting at night or indoors under low light. 1 Slide the N lever as shown to raise the fl ash. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 2 Select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING in the F FLASH SETTING menu. The camera will display options for the built-in fl ash. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING O Sync terminal options will be displayed if the built-in fl ash is low-

ered and either no fl ash unit, or an incompatible fl ash unit, is mounted on the hot shoe (P 270). Raise the fl ash before ad-

justing settings. EXIT 98 3 Highlight items using the focus stick

(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-

mand dial to change the highlighted setting (P 100). Flash Photography MODE Built-In Flash ADJUST END 4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into eff ect. O Depending on the distance to the subject, some lenses may cast shadows in photos taken with the fl ash. Be careful not to injure yourself on the edges of the raised fl ash. The fl ash will not fi re at some settings, for example in panorama mode or when the electronic shutter is used. Choose shutter speeds slower than 180X when using the fl ash in ex-

posure mode S (shutter-priority AE) or manual (M). N In TTL mode, the fl ash may fi re several times with each shot. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete. The fl ash will not fi re if OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH in the D USER SETTING menu. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 99 Flash Settings The following settings are available with the built-in fl ash. MODE Built-In Flash Setting Setting 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s A Flash control mode B Flash compensation/

output ADJUST END Description Description Choose from the following options:

TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ash compensation (B) and choose a ash mode (C). M: The ash res at the selected output (B) regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressed in fractions of full power, from to . The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the ash control system; take a test shot and check the results. C (primary fl ash): Choose if the ash is being used as a pri-

mary ash controlling secondly ash units, for example as part of a studio ash system. D (OFF): The ash does not re. Adjust ash level. The options available vary with the ash control mode (A). 100 Setting Setting C Flash mode (TTL) D Sync Flash Photography Description Description Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options avail-

able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash lev-

el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-

cates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possible;

ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Choose whether the ash is timed to re immediately after the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances. Red-Eye Removal Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected for F FLASH SETTING> RED EYE REMOVAL and G AF/MF SETTING>

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is FACE DETECTION ON. Red-eye re-

moval minimizes red-eye caused when light from the fl ash is refl ected from the subjects retinas. Flash Sync Speed The fl ash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1180s or slower. Optional Flash Units from Fujifi lm The camera can be used with optional Fujifi lm shoe-mounted fl ash units. Third-Party Flash Units Do not use third-party fl ash units that apply over 300V to the camera hot shoe. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 101 MEMO 102 The Shooting Menus 103 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust image quality settings for still photography. To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. IMAGE SIZE Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded. Option Option O 3 : 2 O 16 : 9 Option Option P 3 : 2 P 16 : 9 Option Option Q 3 : 2 Q 16 : 9 Image size Image size 6240 4160 6240 3512 Image size Image size 4416 2944 4416 2488 Image size Image size 3120 2080 3120 1760 Option Option O 1 : 1 Option Option P 1 : 1 Option Option Q 1 : 1 Image size Image size 4160 4160 Image size Image size 2944 2944 Image size Image size 2080 2080 The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE and when 1.25X CROP is selected in CH HIGH SPEED BURST mode:

Option Option P 3 : 2 P 16 : 9 Image size Image size 4992 3328 4992 2808 Option Option P 1 : 1 Image size Image size 3328 3328 N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another shooting mode is selected. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 104 IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Choose a fi le format and compression ratio. Description Description Option Option FINE NORMAL FINE + RAW Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images. Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of images that can be stored. Record both RAW and ne-quality JPEG images. NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG images. RAW Record RAW images only. The Function Buttons To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a function button (P 255). Press the button once to select the option in the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column). Option currently selected for Option currently selected for IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY FINE NORMAL FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW RAW Option selected by pressing function Option selected by pressing function is assigned button to which RAWRAW is assigned button to which FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW FINE NORMAL FINE 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 105 RAW RECORDING Choose whether to compress RAW images. Option Option UNCOMPRESSED LOSSLESS COMPRESSED COMPRESSED Description Description RAW images are not compressed. RAW images are compressed using a reversible algo-

rithm that reduces le size with no loss of image data. The images can be viewed in Capture One Express Fuji lm (P 298), RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX (P 298), FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO (P 299), or other software that supports lossless RAW compres-

sion. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED, but the resulting les are anywhere from about 30 to 90 percent of their uncompressed size. RAW images are compressed using a lossy, non-reversible algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED, but the resulting les are anywhere from about 25 to 35 percent of their uncompressed size. FILM SIMULATION 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Simulate the eff ects of diff erent kinds of fi lm, including black-

and-white (with or without color fi lters). Choose a palette ac-

cording to your subject and creative intent. Option Option a AUTO Description Description This option is available when the auto mode selector lever is rotated to w. c PROVIA/STANDARD Ideal for a wide range of subjects. d Velvia/VIVID e ASTIA/SOFT Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature. Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look. i CLASSIC CHROME Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look. 106 Option Option g PRO Neg. Hi h PRO Neg. Std g CLASSIC Neg. X ETERNA/CINEMA N ETERNA BLEACH BYPASS a ACROS b MONOCHROME IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Description Description Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast. Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones. Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image depth. Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for lm look movie. Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suit-

able for still and movie. Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness. Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) lters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color. d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and darkens skies. c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably. b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait. Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red

(R), and green (G) lters, which deepen shades of gray cor-

responding to hues complementary to the selected color. e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and darkens skies. d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and dark-

ens skies considerably. f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s f SEPIA Shoots in sepia tone. N Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness settings. Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 246). For more information, visit:

https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories 107 MONOCHROMATIC COLOR Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or cool color cast) to the a ACROS and b MONOCHROME monochrome fi lm simulations. Color can be adjusted on the WARMCOOL and G (Green)M (Magenta) axes. MONOCHROMATIC COLOR SET GRAIN EFFECT Add a fi lm grain eff ect. ROUGHNESS Option Option STRONG WEAK OFF SIZE Option Option LARGE SMALL Description Description Choose for rougher grains. Choose for smoother grains. Turn the e ect o . Description Description Choose for coarser grains. Choose for ner grains. COLOR CHROME EFFECT Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens. Option Option STRONG WEAK OFF Choose for a strong e ect. Choose for a weak e ect. Turn the e ect o . Description Description 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 108 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) COLOR CHROME FX BLUE Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues. Option Option STRONG WEAK OFF Description Description Choose for a strong e ect. Choose for a weak e ect. Turn the e ect o . WHITE BALANCE For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches the light source. Option Option WA WHITE PRIORITY AUTO AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY k CUSTOM 1 l CUSTOM 2 m CUSTOM 3 k COLOR TEMPERATURE i DAYLIGHT j SHADE k FLUORESCENT LIGHT-1 l FLUORESCENT LIGHT-2 m FLUORESCENT LIGHT-3 Description Description White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs. White balance is adjusted automatically. White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs. Measure a value for white balance. Choose a color temperature. For subjects in direct sunlight. For subjects in the shade. Use under daylight uorescent lights. Use under warm white uorescent lights. Use under cool white uorescent lights. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s n INCANDESCENT Use under incandescent lighting. g UNDERWATER Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater lighting. 109 N In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired resultsfor example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait subjectsuse custom white balance or choose a white balance op-

tion suited to the light source. White balance is adjusted for fl ash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the fl ash off using other white balance options. White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 246). Fine-Tuning White Balance Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white balance option displays a fi ne-tuning dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to fi ne-tune white balance. WB SHIFT SET N To exit without fi ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-

lecting a white balance option. You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fi ne-tuning white bal-

ance. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 110 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Custom White Balance SHIFT CUSTOM 1 NOT CHANGE SHUTTER : NEW WB Choose k, l, or m to adjust white balance for unusual lighting conditions using a white object as a reference (col-

ored objects can also be used to lend photos a color cast). A white balance tar-

get will be displayed; position and size the target so that it is fi lled by the reference object and press the shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most recent value and display the fi ne-tuning dialog). If COMPLETED ! is displayed, press MENU/OK to set white balance to the measured value. If UNDER is displayed, raise exposure compensation and try again. If OVER is displayed, lower exposure com-

pensation and try again. COMPLETED !

CANCEL SET 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 111 k: Color Temperature Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light source. N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures warmer or cold-

er or deliberately produce colors that diff er radically from those in real life. 1 Select k in the white balance menu. The option currently selected for col-

or temperature will be displayed. 2 Edit the color temperature using the focus stick (focus lever) and press MENU/OK. A fi ne-tuning dialog will be dis-

played. WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMPERATURE R:0 B:0 SET SHIFT COLOR TEMPERATURE SET SHIFT N You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10K by rotating the rear command dial. Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000K. To exit without fi ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after choosing a color temperature. 3 Highlight a fi ne-tuning amount using the focus stick. 4 Press MENU/OK. The changes will be applied. The se-

lected color temperature will appear in the display. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 112 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Color Temperature Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, ex-

pressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are tinged with blue. DYNAMIC RANGE Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of de-

tail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or backlit scenes. Option Option Description Description AUTO V 100% Choose for increased contrast. W 200%

X 400%

Reduce loss of detail in highlights. O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value according to the scene. N If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-

ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-

ter button is pressed halfway. W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO320 to ISO12800, X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO640 to 12800. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 113 D RANGE PRIORITY Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-

ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes. Option Option AUTO STRONG WEAK OFF Description Description Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-

ditions. Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast scenes. Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately high-contrast scenes. Contrast reduction off. N WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800, STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO640 to 12800. When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s TONE CURVE With reference to a tone curve, adjust the appearance of highlights or shadows, making them harsher or softer. Choose higher values to make shadows and highlights harsher, lower values to make them softer. Option Option HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS

-2 to +4

-2 to +4 Description Description TONE CURVE HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS SET CANCEL 114 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) COLOR Adjust color density. Choose higher values to increase saturation, lower values to reduce it. 4 3 2 1 Options Options 0

+1

+2

+3

+4 SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines. Choose higher values for sharper out-

lines, lower values for softer outlines. 4 3 2 1 Options Options 0

+1

+2

+3

+4 HIGH ISO NR Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose high-

er values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to leave outlines visible. 4 3 2 1 Options Options 0

+1

+2

+3

+4 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 115 CLARITY Increase defi nition while altering tones in highlights and shad-

ows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased defi -

nition, lower values for a softer eff ect. 5 4 3 2 1 Options Options 0

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5 O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases the time need to save each shot. N Clarity is adjusted automatically when the auto mode selector lever is rotated to w. LONG EXPOSURE NR Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures. Options Options ON OFF O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save times. LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER Select ON to improve defi nition by adjusting for diff raction and the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 116 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) COLOR SPACE Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. Option Option sRGB Adobe RGB Description Description Recommended in most situations. For commercial printing. PIXEL MAPPING Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures. 1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab. 2 Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pix-

el mapping. O Results are not guaranteed. Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping. Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-

vated. Processing may take a few seconds. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 117 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING Recall settings saved to custom settings banks 1 through 7

(CUSTOM 1 through CUSTOM 7) using EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SET-

TING. NOTHING SELECTED CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 7 Banks Banks N If you would prefer not to recall saved settings, select NOTHING SELECTED. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING Adjust settings as desired and save them to a custom settings bank. Saved settings can be recalled using H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> SELECT CUSTOM SETTING. Saving Custom Settings Create a new custom settings bank. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. 2 Highlight a destination bank for the new settings (CREATE NEW C1 through C7) and press MENU/OK. A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW 3 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. Current camera settings will be saved to the selected bank. CREATE NEW CUSTOM 1 CREATE NEW OK?

OK CANCEL 118 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Editing Custom Settings Edit existing custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press MENU/OK. 4 The camera will display a list of shoot-

ing menu items; highlight an item you wish to edit and press MENU/OK. Adjust the selected item as desired. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY ERASE EDIT CUSTOM NAME CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE SAVE EXIT 5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting menu list. Adjust additional items as desired. N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the changes will not be saved automatically. To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the list and press Q. To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings, select RESET THE CHANGES. If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied with the changes intact. 119 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Copying Custom Settings Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-

named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. 2 Highlight the source bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK. 4 Highlight the destination bank (C1 through C7) and press MENU/OK. A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. N Any changes to custom settings in the destination bank will be overwritten. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY ERASE EDIT CUSTOM NAME COPY TO CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW 5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The selected settings will be copied to the destination bank, overwriting any existing settings. COPY CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 COPY OK?

OK CANCEL 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 120 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Deleting Custom Settings Delete settings from selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight ERASE and press MENU/OK. A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY ERASE EDIT CUSTOM NAME 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. Any custom settings saved to the se-

lected bank will be deleted. ERASE CUSTOM 1 ERASE OK?

OK CANCEL 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 121 Renaming Custom Settings Banks Rename selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. 2 Highlight the desired custom set-

tings bank and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CREATE NEW CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY ERASE EDIT CUSTOM NAME 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select SET. The selected bank will be renamed. AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply auto-

matically. Option Option ENABLE DISABLE Description Description Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through CUSTOM 7 apply automatically. Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom set-

tings must be applied manually (P 119). 122 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) xF MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. The camera can store settings for multiple lenses (LENS 1 through LENS6). N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 170). Choosing a Focal Length Enter the lenss true focal length. LENS 5 INPUT FOCAL LENGTH Distortion Correction Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or WEAK options to correct BARREL or PINCUSHION distortion. SET CANCEL LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION BARREL STRONG BARREL MEDIUM BARREL WEAK OFF PINCUSHION WEAK PINCUSHION MEDIUM PINCUSHION STRONG 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 123 Color Shading Correction Color (shading) variations between the center and edges of the frame can be ad-

justed separately for each corner. To use color shading correction, follow the steps below. NEXT SET 1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The select-

ed corner is indicated by a triangle. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is no visible diff erence in color between the selected corner and the center of the image. Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the cyanred axis. Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the blueyellow axis. NTo determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 124 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Peripheral Illumination Correction Choose from values between 5 and

+5. Choosing positive values increases peripheral illumination, while choosing negative values reduces peripheral il-

lumination. Positive values are recom-

mended for vintage lenses, negative val-

ues to create the eff ect of images taken with an antique lens or a pinhole camera. NTo determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination cor-

rection while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. CANCEL SET EDIT LENS NAME Change the lens name. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 125 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust focus settings for still photography. To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. AF/MF SETTING FOCUS AREA AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION AF POINT DISPLAY NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS PRE-AF xFAF ILLUMINATOR EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. FOCUS AREA Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus zoom (P 69). AF MODE Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 67). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 126 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS Select focus-tracking options for fo-

cus mode C. Choose from Sets1 (SET1) through 5 (SET5) according to your sub-

ject or select SET6 CUSTOM for custom focus-tracking options. AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO OK Option Option SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES &

CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/

DECELERATING SUBJECT SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING SUBJECT SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING

& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT SET 6 CUSTOM Description Description A standard tracking option that works well with the typical range of moving subjects. The focus system attempts to track the chosen subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely to enter the focus area with the subject. The focus system attempts to compensate for subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity. The focus system attempts to focus quickly on subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subjects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects. Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only to sudden changes in velocity but also to large movements front to back and left to right. Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on the values for Sets 15 (P 128, 130). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 127 Focus Tracking Options The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are described below. TRACKING SENSITIVITY TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. The higher the value, the longer the camera will wait. TRACKING SENSITIVITY QUICK LOCKED ON SETS THE TRACKING SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT ADJUST SWITCH 0 1 Options Options 2 3 4 O The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when you attempt to switch subjects. The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus from your subject to other objects in the focus area. SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how sensi-

tive the tracking system is to changes in subject velocity. The higher the value, the greater the precision with which the system attempts to respond to sudden movement. SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY STEADY ACCEL./DECEL. SETS THE SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT ADJUST SWITCH 0 Options Options 1 2 O The higher the value, the more diffi culty the camera will have focusing in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when the subject is highly refl ective or low in contrast. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 128 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ZONE AREA SWITCHING ZONE AREA SWITCHING This parameter determines the focus area given priority in zone AF. ZONE AREA SWITCHING CENTER AUTO FRONT SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA ADJUST SWITCH Option Option FRONT AUTO CENTER Description Description Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera. The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it. Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone. O This option takes eff ect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode. Set Values Parameter values for the diff erent sets are listed below. SPEED TRACKING SPEED TRACKING TRACKING TRACKING SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY 0 2 0 3 2 2 1 0 2 3 ZONE AREA ZONE AREA SWITCHING SWITCHING AUTO CENTER AUTO FRONT AUTO SET 1 SET 1 SET 2 SET 2 SET 3 SET 3 SET 4 SET 4 SET 5 SET 5 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 129 Custom Focus Tracking Options Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6. 1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >

SET 6 CUSTOM. AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 6 CUSTOM TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO ADJUST SET DETAIL RESET 2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their original values, press b. 3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 130 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in por-

trait orientation is stored separately from that used when the camera is in landscape orientation. Option Option OFF FOCUS AREA ONLY ON Description Description The same settings are used in both orientations. The focus area for each orientation can be selected sep-

arately. The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately. AF POINT DISPLAY yz Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >

AF MODE. Options Options ON OFF NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se-

lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE. Option Option 117 POINTS (9 13) 425 POINTS (17 25) Description Description Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point grid. Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point grid. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 131 PRE-AF If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps prevent missed shots. Options Options ON OFF O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery. xF AF ILLUMINATOR If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist autofocus. Options Options ON OFF O The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator in some cases. If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the subject. Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subjects eyes. N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 172). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 132 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING If the camera detects human faces, it will assign them priority over the background and adjust settings appropriately for por-

traits when setting focus and exposure. You can also choose whether the camera focuses on the left or right eye when face detection is on. Option Option FACE DETECTION ON Description Description Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust eye detection settings. g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only. u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye to focus on when a face is detected. w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority o . O If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture is taken. In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a whole rather than the portrait subject. FACE DETECTION ON is selected automatically if the AUTO scene is chosen when the auto mode selector lever is rotated to w. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 133 N The face selected by the camera is indicated by a green border. Any other faces detected by the camera are indicated by gray borders. To have the camera focus on a diff erent subject, tap inside the gray border. The g icon will change from white to green. When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION/FACE SELECT is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER SETTING > TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever) or (during viewfi nder photography) touch controls (P 21). To switch from face detection to manual focus-area selection, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever). Press again to re-enable face detection. If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set time for its return and consequently the green frame may sometimes appear in locations where no face is seen. You cannot switch subjects during burst photography. Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspend-

ed at the close of burst shooting. Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-

entation. If the camera is unable to detect the subjects eyes because they are hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus on faces. Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts

(P 246). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 134 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) AF+MF If ON is selected in focus mode S and focus has been locked

(whether by pressing the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring. Options Options ON OFF O Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the focus distance indicator. If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to infi nity or the minimum focus distance. N STANDARD and FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT MF assist options can be selected using MF ASSIST. AF + MF Focus Zoom When ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK and SINGLE POINT selected for AF MODE, focus zoom can be used to zoom in on the selected focus area. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear com-

mand dial. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 135 MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Option Option STANDARD DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE DIGITAL MICROPRISM FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT Description Description Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, and digital microprism are not available). Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR) split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of the split image are correctly aligned. A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when the subject is in focus. The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level. N You can also choose MF assist options by holding the center of the rear command dial. FOCUS CHECK If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-

cus mode. Options Options ON OFF N Pressing the center of the rear command dial cancels focus zoom. The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes when the focus area is changed. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 136 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or MULTI metering is selected. Options Options ON OFF xF INSTANT AF SETTING Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode. Options Options AF-S AF-C N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 174). xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assess-

ments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. PIXEL BASIS FILM FORMAT BASIS Options Options N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 174). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 137 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY Choose how the camera focuses in focus mode AF-S or AF-C. Option Option RELEASE FOCUS Description Description Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken when the camera is not in focus. Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only taken when the camera is in focus. O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF. xF AF RANGE LIMITER Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus speed. Option Option OFF CUSTOM PRESET1 PRESET2 Description Description Focus limiter disabled. Limit focus to a range of distances de ned by a minimum and maximum. OK: Limit focus to the selected range. SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance be-

tween them. Limit focus to a preset range. O Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the min-

imum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter. The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may diff er from the actual focus distance. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s N The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM is selected:

- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus range.

- Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum focus distance to infi nity by rotating the focus ring. Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 174). 138 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. ModeMode TOUCH SHOOTING AF AFOFF Description Description Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter. In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your nger on the display. In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. AREA Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. OFF Touch controls disabled. N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode

(P 175). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 139 Touch Controls for Focus Zoom Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled). AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) Central Area Central Area Tapping the center of the display performs the operations below. ModeMode TOUCH SHOOTING TOUCH SHOOTING AFAF AREAAREA OFFOFF Operation performed Operation performed AF-S/MF: Take a picture AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF Other Areas Other Areas Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display, whether during still photography or movie re-

cording and regardless of the option selected for touch screen mode. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 140 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust shooting options for still photography. To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the A(SHOOTING SETTING) tab. SHOOTING SETTING SCENE POSITION DRIVE SETTING HDR SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT SELF-TIMER SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING SELF-TIMER LAMP EXIT SCENE POSITION Choose a scene for use when the auto mode selector lever is ro-

tated to w (P 62). DRIVE SETTING Adjust settings for the various drive modes. Option Option BKT1 SETTING BKT2 SETTING CH HIGH SPEED BURST CL LOW SPEED BURST MULTIPLE EXPOSURE CTRL Description Description Choose the settings used when the drive dial is rotated to BKT1 or BKT2 (P 84). Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to CH (high-speed burst) (P 89). Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to CL (low-speed burst) (P 89). Adjust multiple exposure options for use when the drive dial is rotated to j (multiple exposure) (P 94). Adv. FILTER 1 SELECT Choose the lter used when the drive dial is rotated to Adv. FILTER 2 SELECT Adv.1 or Adv.2 (P 96). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 141 HDR Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three shots, varying exposure each time, and combines them into a sin-

gle picture. The resulting photograph preserves details in high-

lights and shadows. Follow the steps below to take HDR photos. 1 Rotate the auto mode selector lever to v. 2 Rotate the drive dial to S (Single frame). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 3 Select A SHOOTING SETTING> HDR in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. 4 Choose the amount the brightnesses of the exposures vary. Option Option OFF HDR AUTO HDR200 HDR400 HDR800 HDR800+

Description Description HDR disabled. Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%

to 800%. Dynamic range is set to 200%. Dynamic range is set to 400%. Dynamic range is set to 800%. Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dy-

namic range. 5 Take photographs. The camera will create a combined image. 142 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) O Keep the camera steady. The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or the composition or lighting changes during shooting. The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution will drop slightly. Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a val-

ue according to the scene. Extended sensitivity values are not supported. Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures may not be taken at the selected shutter speed. The fl ash does not fi re. N HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 143 SPORTS FINDER MODE Take pictures using the crop in the center of the display. Choose this option for pic-

tures of athletes, birds, and other moving subjects. Option Option ON OFF Description Description Pictures are taken using a 1.25 crop, reducing the picture angle by an amount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.25; the crop is shown by a frame in the display. The 1.25 crop is disabled. N The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-

ing menu is fi xed at P. The sports fi nder is not available in modes that off er an electronic shutter. PRE-SHOT sJ To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all the way down and the resulting picture being recorded to the memory card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic shutter when the shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a series shots starting just before the shutter button is pressed the rest of the way down. Options Options ON OFF N Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode (P 148). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 144 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) SELF-TIMER Choose a shutter release delay. Option Option R 2 SEC S 10 SEC OFF Description Description The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts down. The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken. Self-timer o . If an option other than OFF is select-

ed, the timer will start when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The display shows the number of seconds re-

maining until the shutter is released. To stop the timer before the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK. 9 O Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure. The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off . SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING If ON is selected, the chosen self-timer setting will remain in ef-

fect after a picture is taken or the camera is turned off . Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 145 SELF-TIMER LAMP If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit. Options Options ON OFF INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING Confi gure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset interval. 1 Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING, and press MENU/OK. INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES INTERVAL NUMBER OF TIMES 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the interval and number of shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed. 3 Use the focus stick to choose the starting time and then press MENU/OK. Shooting will start automatically. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s END CANCEL START WAITING TIME LATER ESTIMATED START TIME PM START CANCEL CANCEL 146 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of B(bulb) or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released. N Use of a tripod is recommended. Check the battery level before starting. We recommend using USB power source (P 243). The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before the next shot is taken. The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button. To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photogra-

phy started, set the number of shots to . INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots. Options Options ON OFF N Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-

ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING> INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim dramatically during shooting. In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an AUTO option is selected for sensitivity. PHOTOMETRY Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 81). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 147 SHUTTER TYPE Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute the shutter sound. Option Option t MECHANICAL SHUTTER s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER u MECHANICAL+ ELECTRONIC Description Description Take pictures with the mechanical shutter. Take pictures with the electronic shutter. The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic shutter according to shooting conditions. If s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER or u MECHANICAL+ELECTRONIC is selected, shutter speeds faster than 000s can be chosen by rotating the shutter speed dial to 4000 and then rotating the rear command dial. O When using the electronic shutter, note the following:

Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects. Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high shut-

ter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended. Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fl uorescent lights or other fl ickering or erratic illumination. When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 216), respect your subjects image rights and right to privacy. N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:

Extended sensitivity values are not supported Long exposure noise reduction has no eff ect The fl ash cannot be used 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 148 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) FLICKER REDUCTION Reduce fl icker in pictures and the display when shooting under fl uorescent lighting and other similar light sources. Option Option ALL FRAMES FIRST FRAME OFF Description Description Flicker reduction is performed for all frames. Compared to when icker reduction is performed only on the rst frame, the frame advance rate for burst photography will drop. Flicker reduction is performed for the rst frame only; in burst photography, the value measured for the rst frame in each burst will be used for all subsequent shots. Flicker may be visible during burst photography. Flicker reduction disabled. O Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures. OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shut-

ter is used. Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 149 IS MODE Reduce blur caused by camera shake or subject motion. Option Option L CONTINUOUS

+ MOTION l CONTINUOUS Description Description Image stabilization on. If + MOTION is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed to reduce motion blur when mov-

ing objects are detected. M SHOOTING

+ MOTION m SHOOTING ONLY OFF As above, except that image stabilization is performed only when the shutter button is pressed halfway (focus mode C only) or the shutter is released. If + MOTION is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed to reduce motion blur when moving objects are detected. Image stabilization o . Choose this option when using a tripod. N + MOTION has no eff ect when sensitivity is set to a fi xed value, and may also be unavailable at some other combinations of settings. The eff ect may vary with lighting conditions and the speed at which the object is moving. This option is available only with lenses that support image stabili-

zation. The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode. Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image stabilization takes eff ect. ISO Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light (P 79). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 150 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. The smartphone can then be used to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-

tures Upload location data to the camera N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 151 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust fl ash-related settings for still photography. To display fl ash settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the F(FLASH SETTING) tab. FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Choose a fl ash control mode, fl ash mode, or sync mode or adjust the fl ash level. The options available vary with the fl ash. N For more information on fl ash settings, see External Flash Units (P 268) in Peripher-

als and Optional Accessories. RED EYE REMOVAL Remove red-eye eff ects caused by the fl ash. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT MODE Built-In Flash ADJUST END Option Option FLASH+REMOVAL FLASH REMOVAL OFF Description Description A red-eye reduction pre- ash is combined with digital red-eye removal. Flash red-eye reduction only. Digital red-eye removal only. Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal o . N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL fl ash control mode. Digital red-eye removal is performed only when a face is detected. Digital red-eye removal is not available with RAW images. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 152 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) TTL-LOCK MODE Instead of adjusting fl ash level with each shot, TTL fl ash control can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-

graphs. Option Option LOCK WITH LAST FLASH LOCK WITH METERING FLASH Description Description Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most recent photo. The camera emits a series of pre- ashes and locks ash output at the metered value. N To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 255). Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in eff ect. Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no previously metered value exists. LED LIGHT SETTING Choose whether to use the fl ash units LED video light (if avail-

able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. Option Option CATCHLIGHT AF ASSIST Role of LED video light in still photography Role of LED video light in still photography Catchlight AF-assist illuminator AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight OFF None N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 153 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) COMMANDER SETTING Choose groups when using the camera fl ash unit as a command-

er for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control. This option is available when the camera is used with clip-on fl ash units that support Fujifi lm optical wireless fl ash control. Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF Options Options N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. CH SETTING Choose the channel used for communication between the com-

mander and remote fl ash units. Separate channels can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent interference when multi-

ple systems are operating in close proximity. CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Options Options 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 154 MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust options for movies shot during still photography using function buttons that have been assigned MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE. To display movie settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE FILE FORMAT FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC F IS MODE AUDIO SETTING MIC/REMOTE RELEASE EXIT MOVIE MODE This item is also found in the movie menus (P 158). Changes here also apply to the item in the movie menus. FILE FORMAT This item is also found in the movie menus (P 159). Changes here also apply to the item in the movie menus. FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC This item is also found in the movie menus (P 160). Changes here also apply to the item in the movie menus. F IS MODE This item is also found in the movie menus (P 164). Changes here also apply to the item in the movie menus. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 155 AUDIO SETTING Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording. INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Turn the built-in microphone o . EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for external microphones. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Disable recording using external microphones. MIC JACK SETTING Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack. Option Option MIC LINE Description Description Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-

phone. Choose this option for external audio devices connected via line output. MIC LEVEL LIMITER Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the microphones audio circuits. Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 156 MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) WIND FILTER Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF LOW CUT FILTER Choose whether to enable the low-cut fi lter, reducing low-fre-

quency noise during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF HEADPHONES VOLUME Adjust the headphone volume. Option Option 0 110 Description Description Mute output to the headphones. Choose a volume of from 1 to 10. MIC/REMOTE RELEASE Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/re-

mote release connector is a microphone or a remote release. Options Options m MIC n REMOTE 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 157 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust options for movies shot with the drive dial rotated to F(movie). To display options for movie recording, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting dis-

play and select the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE FILE FORMAT FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION F-Log RECORDING 4K MOVIE OUTPUT FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY EXIT MOVIE MODE Before shooting movies, choose the frame rate, bit rate, and frame size and aspect ratio. MOVIE MODE 1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-

light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 158 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the desired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stick right. Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ra-

tios of 16 or 17 to 9. Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9. 3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a frame rate (B) and press the stick right. Options Options 23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P 4 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight a bit rate (C) and press MENU/OK. 50Mbps Options Options 100Mbps 200Mbps N The choice of frame and bit rates varies with the movie mode. FILE FORMAT Choose a movie format. Option Option MOV/H.264 LPCM MP4/H.264 AAC Description Description High picture and sound quality. A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded to the web. N Movies are recorded to the memory card in 8-bit 420 and output to HDMI in 10-bit 422. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 159 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC Record high-frame-rate Full HD movies. High-frame-rate mov-

ies can be played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving subjects or details too fl eeting for the naked eye. Se-

lect ON to choose the recording and playback rates separately. Playback 23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P Options Options Recording 100P 120P 200P 240P Options Options N High-speed movies are recorded with no sound. Maximum recording length is 6 minutes, but varies with camera set-

tings. The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the goal of keeping the amount of data recorded to 200Mbps per sec-

ond. The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected for rate of recording. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 160 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.291. This makes it easier to match crops when fi lming in diff erent formats. Options Options ON OFF F-Log RECORDING Select ON to record movies using a soft gamma curve with a wide gamut suitable for further processing post-production. Sensitivi-

ty is restricted to values between ISO640 and 12800. Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 161 4K MOVIE OUTPUT Choose the destination for 4K movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI recorder or other device that supports 4K. Option Option b 4K Y 4K b 4K Y FHD b FHD Y 4K b Y 4K Description Description 4K movies are recorded to the camera memory card and out-

put to the HDMI device in 4K. 4K movies are recorded to a camera memory card in 4K and output to the HDMI device in Full HD. 4K movies are output to the HDMI device in 4K and recorded to the camera memory card in Full HD. 4K movies are output to the HDMI device in 4K. The camera does not record 4K movies to a memory card. N This option is only available when V 16 : 9 or d 17 : 9 is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE MODE in the shooting menu. FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Choose the destination for Full HD movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device. Option Option b FHD Y FHD b Y FHD Description Description Full HD movies are output to the HDMI device and recorded to the camera memory card. Full HD movies are not recorded to the camera memory card but are output to the HDMI device. N This option is only available when W 16 : 9 or W 17 : 9 is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE MODE in the shooting menu. When OFF is selected for HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY, movies will be output to the HDMI device in 4:2:2 10-bit format. 162 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected will mirror the information in the camera display. Options Options ON OFF 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY Choose whether output to connected HDMI devices switches from 4K to Full HD during standby. Option Option V Output to HDMI devices continues at 4K during standby. Description Description W Output to HDMI devices switches to Full HD during standby, reducing the drain on the battery. HDMI REC CONTROL Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start and stop movie recording. Options Options ON OFF F PHOTOMETRY Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 81). N The photometry option selected in the photo menus applies to mov-

ies recorded using function buttons that have been assigned MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 163 F IS MODE Enable or disable image stabilization. Option Option l CONTINUOUS OFF Description Description Image stabilization on. Image stabilization o ; x appears in the display. Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod or otherwise xed in place. N Image stabilization is available with compatible lenses only. The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode. Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image stabilization takes eff ect. F ISO Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Option Option H (25600) 16012800 AUTO Description Description Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may be reduced and that pictures may be mottled. Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display. Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting conditions. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 164 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) ZEBRA SETTING Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes in the movie mode display. Option Option ZEBRA RIGHT ZEBRA LEFT OFF ZEBRA LEVEL Description Description Right-slanting stripes. Left-slanting stripes. Stripes o . Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display. 50 55 60 65 70 Options Options 75 80 85 90 95 100 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the command dials and touch-screen controls. You may fi nd this helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being re-

corded with movies (P 23). Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 165 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) TALLY LIGHT Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. Indicator lamp AF-assist illuminator Description Description The indicator lamp lights during movie recording. The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain o during movie recording. Option Option FRONT OFF REAR z FRONT OFF REAR y FRONT z REAR z FRONT z REAR OFF FRONT y REAR y FRONT y REAR OFF FRONT OFF REAR OFF xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION This item is also found in the photo menus (P 151). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 166 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust image quality settings for movies. To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE TONE CURVE COLOR SHARPNESS HIGH ISO NR EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. F FILM SIMULATION Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 106). F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 108). F WHITE BALANCE Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 109). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 167 F DYNAMIC RANGE Choose a dynamic range for movie recording. Option Option V100%

W200%

X400%

Description Description See DYNAMIC RANGE (P 113). N AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during movie recording. W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800, X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 640 to 12800. The B MOVIE SETTING> F DYNAMIC RANGE option is available when OFF is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> F-Log RECORDING. F TONE CURVE Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 114). F COLOR Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 115). 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 168 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) F SHARPNESS Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 115). F HIGH ISO NR Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 115). V INTERFRAME NR Select ON to enable interframe noise reduction. Options Options ON OFF N Interframe noise reduction is available only when frame rates of 29.97P or slower are selected at a frame size of V or d. Ghosting may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved during shooting. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 169 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF N If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera is attached using a FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER (available separately), peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING> PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION in the shooting menu (P 125). Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this op-

tion. xF MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING This item is also found in the photo menus (P 123). Changes to one apply to the other. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 170 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust focus settings for movies. To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. AF/MF SETTING FOCUS AREA AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTING AF ILLUMINATOR FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING MF ASSIST FOCUS CHECK INSTANT AF SETTING EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. F FOCUS AREA Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 69). F AF MODE Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording. Option Option MULTI AREA Description Description The camera selects the focus area automatically. The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 171 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus mode C. TRACKING SENSITIVITY Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-

ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-

ject. See TRACKING SENSITIVITY (P 128). 0 1 Options Options 2 3 4 O The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when you attempt to switch subjects. The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus from your subject to other objects in the focus area. AF SPEED Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for faster response times, lower values for slower response times. 5 4 3 2 1 Options Options 0

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5 xF AF ILLUMINATOR This item is also found in the photo menus (P 132). Changes to one apply to the other. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 172 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording movies. Option Option FACE DETECTION ON OFF Description Description See FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING (P 133). Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority o . O If the focus mode selector is rotated to S when FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING during movie recording, the camera will automatically switch to C

(continuous AF). Selecting M (manual focus) when FACE DETECTION ON is selected for FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING disables Intelligent Face Detection. F MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Option Option STANDARD FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT Description Description Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking is not available). The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 173 F FOCUS CHECK Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 136). xF INSTANT AF SETTING This item is also found in the photo menus (P 137). Changes to one apply to the other. xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE This item is also found in the photo menus (P 137). Changes to one apply to the other. xF AF RANGE LIMITER This item is also found in the photo menus (P 138). Changes to one apply to the other. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 174 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) xF TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. ModeMode TOUCH SHOOTING AF AREA Description Description Instead of pressing the shutter button, you can tap your subject in the display to focus and start recording. During recording, you can tap the display to focus as described below. To end record-

ing, press the shutter button. Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping your subject in the display. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-

lected by tapping the display. When shooting movies in focus mode M(MF), you can tap the display before recording begins to focus on the selected point using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to posi-

tion the focus point. Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use the button to which AF-ON is assigned. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-

lected by tapping the display. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to posi-

tion the focus area over your subject. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s OFF Touch controls disabled. 175 N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. This item is also found in the photo menus (P 139). Changes to one apply to the other. Touch Controls for Focus Zoom Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled). Central Area Central Area Tapping the center of the display performs the operations below. ModeMode TOUCH SHOOTING TOUCH SHOOTING AFAF AREAAREA OFFOFF Operation performed Operation performed AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF Other Areas Other Areas Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display, whether during still photography or movie re-

cording and regardless of the option selected for touch screen mode. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 176 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) FOCUS CHECK LOCK Choose whether focus zoom remains in eff ect once movie re-

cording begins. Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 177 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust settings for audio recorded during fi lming. To display audio settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the P(AUDIO SETTING) tab. AUDIO SETTING INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MIC JACK SETTING MIC LEVEL LIMITER WIND FILTER LOW CUT FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME MIC/REMOTE RELEASE EXIT INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Turn the built-in microphone o . EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for external microphones. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Disable recording using external microphones. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 178 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) MIC JACK SETTING Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack. Option Option MIC LINE Description Description Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-

phone. Choose this option for external audio devices connected via line output. MIC LEVEL LIMITER Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the microphones audio circuits. Options Options ON OFF WIND FILTER Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF LOW CUT FILTER Choose whether to enable the low-cut fi lter, reducing low-fre-

quency noise during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s HEADPHONES VOLUME Adjust the headphone volume. Option Option 0 110 Description Description Mute output to the headphones. Choose a volume of from 1 to 10. 179 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) MIC/REMOTE RELEASE Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/re-

mote release connector is a microphone or a remote release. Options Options m MIC n REMOTE 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 180 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame num-

ber) display settings for movie recording. To display time code settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the Q(TIME CODE SETTING) tab. TIME CODE SETTING TIME CODE DISPLAY START TIME SETTING COUNT UP SETTING DROP FRAME HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT TIME CODE DISPLAY Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and playback. EXIT Options Options ON OFF START TIME SETTING Choose the time code starting time. Option Option MANUAL INPUT CURRENT TIME RESET Description Description Highlight this option and press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose a start time manually. Set the start time to the current time. Set the start time to 00:00:00. COUNT UP SETTING Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during movie recording. Option Option REC RUN FREE RUN Description Description Time is clocked only during movie recording. Time is clocked continuously. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 181 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) DROP FRAME At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-

ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second). Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match the recording time to the time code. ON Option Option Description Description The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict match between the time code and the actual recording time. Frames are not dropped. N The time code display varies with the option selected. OFF ON OFF Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop. HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices. Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 182 Playback and the Playback Menu 183 The Playback Display This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during playback. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. A B CD E F G H h g f e d c b a Z Y X I J K L M l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 W V U ST QR OP N A Date and time ..................................37, 39, 211 B Frame-number display C Face detection indicator ............................133 D Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................239 E Image transfer order ...................................201 F Image transfer status ........................239, 282 G Number of frames selected for upload ...201 H Frame number ..............................................236 I Sound and ash indicator ........................213 J Protected image ...........................................196 K Location data.......................................244, 283 L Battery level ......................................................36 M Image quality................................................105 N Image size ......................................................104 O Film format ....................................................159 P Film simulation ............................................106 Q Dynamic range ............................................113 R HDR ..................................................................142 S White balance ..............................................109 T Sensitivity ..........................................................79 U Exposure compensation ...............................77 V Aperture ...............................................54, 59, 60 W Shutter speed .....................................54, 56, 60 X Playback mode indicator .............................44 Y Movie icon ........................................................51 Z Time code .......................................................181 a HDR image ....................................................142 b Red-eye removal indicator ...............152, 198 c Filter ....................................................................96 d Gift image .........................................................44 e Photobook assist indicator .......................203 f DPOF print indicator ...................................205 g Voice memo ..................................................199 h Rating ..............................................................200 184 The Playback Display The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators during playback. Standard Information off NEXTNEXT Info display l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 185 Viewing Photo Information The photo information display changes each time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up. The Playback Display Basic data Info display 1 NEXTNEXT LENS FOCAL LENGTH COLOR SPACE LENS MODULATION OPT. 23.0mm F5.6 23.0mm sRGB ON S.S F ISO Info display 3 Info display 2 BACK NEXT l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Zooming in on the Focus Point Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point. Press again to return to full-frame playback. 186 Viewing Pictures Read this section for information on playback zoom and multi-frame playback. Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Full-frame playback 100-0001 Multi-frame playback Playback zoom DISP/BACK MENU/OK Nine-frame view Medium zoom l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Hundred- frame view Maximum zoom 187 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Viewing Pictures Playback Zoom Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK or MENU/OK, or the center of the rear command dial. N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE. Playback zoom is not available with cropped or resized copies saved at a size of a. Scroll When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick

(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the image not currently visible in the display. Navigation window Multi-Frame Playback To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-

mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame. N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK to view the highlighted image full frame. In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or down to view more pictures. 188 The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. The playback menu is displayed when you press MENU/OK in playback mode. PLAY BACK MENU RAW CONVERSION ERASE CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING EXIT RAW CONVERSION Even if you dont have a computer, you can use the camera to modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats. Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format 1 Display a RAW picture. 2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu. 3 Press MENU/OK. RAW CONVERSION A list of settings will be displayed. REFLECT SHOOTING COND. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY PUSH/PULL PROCESSING DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY CREATE CANCEL 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a setting. 5 Press the focus stick right to display options. RAW CONVERSION 100%

200%

400%

WB 189 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 6 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option. 7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to adjust additional settings. 8 Press the Q button. A preview of the copy will be displayed. 9 Press MENU/OK. The copy will be saved. N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-

ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 190 The Playback Menu The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from RAW to another format are:

Setting Setting REFLECT SHOOTING COND. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY PUSH/PULL PROCESSING DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE WHITE BALANCE WB SHIFT TONE CURVE COLOR SHARPNESS HIGH ISO NR CLARITY LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER COLOR SPACE HDR Description Description Create a copy using the settings in e ect at the time the photo was taken. Choose an image size. Adjust image quality. Adjust exposure. Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast. Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes. Simulate the e ects of di erent types of lm. Choose a monochrome tint for photographs tak-

en using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS and b MONOCHROME. Add a lm grain e ect. Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens. Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues. Adjust white balance. Fine-tune white balance. Adjust highlights and shadows. Adjust color density. Sharpen or soften outlines. Process the copy to reduce mottling. Increase de nition. Improve de nition by adjusting for di raction and the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. Choose the color space used for color reproduction. Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows. O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen when the picture was taken. 191 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 ERASE Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-

tures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. Option Option FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES Description Description Delete pictures one at a time. Delete multiple selected pictures. Delete all unprotected pictures. FRAME 1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. N A confi rmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK. Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the fo-

cus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 192 The Playback Menu SELECTED FRAMES 1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select. Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R). To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again. 3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a confi rmation dialog. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-

tures. N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S. ALL FRAMES 1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures. N Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted before the button was pressed cannot be recovered. If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures. 193 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 CROP Create a cropped copy of the current picture. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select CROP in the playback menu. 3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the picture until the desired portion is displayed. 4 Press MENU/OK to display a confi rmation dialog. 5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate fi le. N The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the cropped copy. If the size of the fi nal copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow. All copies have an aspect ratio of 32. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 194 The Playback Menu RESIZE Create a small copy of the current picture. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu. 3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confi rmation dialog. 4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate fi le. N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 195 PROTECT Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK. Option Option FRAME SET ALL RESET ALL Description Description Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete. Protect all pictures. Remove protection from all pictures. O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted. N Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smartphones or tablets removes upload marking. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 196 The Playback Menu IMAGE ROTATE Rotate pictures. 1 Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB. 2 Display the desired picture. 3 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu. 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture 90 clockwise, up to rotate it 90 counterclockwise. 5 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the camera. N Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-

tating pictures. The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when viewed on a computer or on other cameras. Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB are auto-

matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 197 RED EYE REMOVAL Remove red-eye from portraits. The camera will analyze the im-

age; if red-eye is detected, the image will be processed to create a copy with reduced red-eye. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select RED EYE REMOVAL in the playback menu. 3 Press MENU/OK. N Results vary depending on the scene and the cameras success in de-

tecting faces. The amount of time needed to process the image varies with the number of faces detected. Red eye cannot be removed from pictures that have already been processed using red-eye removal, which are indicated by a e icon during playback. Red eye removal cannot be performed on RAW images. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 198 The Playback Menu VOICE MEMO SETTING Add a voice memo to the current photograph. 1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu. 2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo. 3 Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-

cord the memo. Recording ends after 30s or when you re-

lease the button. N The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos. Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures. Deleting the picture also deletes the memo. Playing Voice Memos Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback. To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front com-

mand dial. A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back. Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume. Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-

ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. 199 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 RATING Rate pictures using stars. 1 Select RATING in the playback menu. 2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars

(I). N The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front com-

mand dial to choose a picture. The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AE-L button in single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback. Use touch controls to zoom in or out. Ratings cannot be applied to:

- Protected pictures

- Movie

- Gift pictures (pictures taken with other cameras) l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 200 The Playback Menu IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet. 1 Select IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER > SELECT FRAMES in the playback menu. 2 Highlight photos and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Re-

peat until all the desired photos have been selected. 3 Press DISP/BACK to exit to playback. N If ON is selected for both D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> Bluetooth ON/OFF and AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER, upload will begin shortly after you exit to playback or turn the camera off . N Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures. The following cannot be selected for upload:

- Protected pictures

- Movies

- RAW images

- Gift pictures (pictures taken with other cameras) If PAIRING/TRANSFER ORDER for D CONNECTION SETTING> GENERAL SETTINGS> r BUTTON SETTING, the IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button. To remove upload marking from all pictures in the current order, se-

lect IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER> RESET ORDER. If ON is selected for D CONNECTION SETTING > Bluetooth SETTINGS> AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER, photos will automatically be marked for upload as they are taken. is selected 201 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. The smartphone can then be used to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-

tures Upload location data to the camera N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

If WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D CONNECTION SETTING> GENERAL SETTINGS> r BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the smartphone by pressing the Fn1 button. SLIDE SHOW View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to start and press the focus stick (focus lever) right or left to skip ahead or back. Press DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view on-

screen help. The show can be ended at any time by pressing MENU/OK. N The camera will not turn off automatically while a slide show is in prog-

ress. 202 The Playback Menu PHOTOBOOK ASSIST Create books from your favorite photos. Creating a Photobook 1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU> PHOTOBOOK ASSIST. 2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-

ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the book is complete. N Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected for photobooks. The fi rst picture selected becomes the cover image. A diff erent picture can be selected at any time. 3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-

lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu. N Books can contain up to 300 pictures. Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 203 Viewing Photobooks Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through the pictures. Editing and Deleting Photobooks Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-

screen instructions. EDIT: Edit the book as described in Creating a Photobook. ERASE: Delete the book. PC AUTO SAVE Upload pictures from the camera to a computer running the latest version of FUJIFILM PC AutoSave (note that you must fi rst install the software and confi gure the computer as a destination for images copied from the camera). N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/pc_autosave/

l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 204 The Playback Menu PRINT ORDER (DPOF) Create a digital print order for DPOF-compatible printers. 1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> PRINT ORDER (DPOF). 2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-

tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before proceeding. 3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the print order. 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to choose the number of copies (up to 99). PRINT ORDER (DPOF) DPOF: 00001 01 SHEETS FRAME SET Total number of prints Number of copies l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l N To remove a picture from the order, press the focus stick down until the number of copies is 0. Repeat steps 34 to complete the print order. 7 5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press MENU/OK to exit. N The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon during playback. Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single memory card. If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-

other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as described above. 205 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 instax PRINTER PRINT To print pictures to optional Fujifi lm instax SHARE printers, fi rst se-

lect D CONNECTION SETTING> instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and password, then follow the steps below. 1 Turn the printer on. 2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 206 The Playback Menu DISP ASPECT Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on High Defi nition (HD) devices (this option is available only when an HDMI cable is connected). 16: 9 16 : 9 Options Options 3:2 3 : 2 N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9 full screen. The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms cropped out. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 207 MEMO 208 The Setup Menus 209 USER SETTING Adjust basic camera settings. To access basic camera settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose USER SETTING. FORMAT To format a memory card:

USER SETTING FORMAT DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE a MY MENU SETTING MY MENU SETTING SENSOR CLEANING SOUND & FLASH EXIT 1 Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. To format the memory card, highlight OK and press MENU/OK. FORMAT OK?

FORMAT T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 OK CANCEL N To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK. O All dataincluding protected pictureswill be deleted from the memory card. Be sure important fi les have been copied to a comput-

er or other storage device. Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting. N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding the b button. 210 USER SETTING DATE/TIME To set the camera clock:

1 Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. To change the order in which the year, month, and day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the focus stick up or down. 3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock. TIME DIFFERENCE Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the diff erence between your local and home time zone:

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the time diff erence between local time and your home time zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete. To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time zone, select h HOME. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 g LOCAL h HOME Options Options N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three seconds when the camera is turned on. 211 Qa Choose a language. x MY MENU SETTING Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-

tom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 247). F MY MENU SETTING Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-

tom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 247). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 212 USER SETTING SENSOR CLEANING Remove dust from the camera image sensor. Option Option OK WHEN SWITCHED ON WHEN SWITCHED OFF Description Description Clean the sensor immediately. Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is turned on. Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns o (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-

era turns o in playback mode). N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed using a blower (P 312). SOUND & FLASH Select OFF to disable the speaker, fl ash, illuminator, and self-tim-

er lamp in situations in which camera sounds and lights may be unwelcome. Options Options ON OFF T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 213 USER SETTING RESET Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values. 1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Option Option STILL MENU RESET MOVIE MENU RESET SET-UP RESET Description Description Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white balance and custom settings banks created using EDIT/

SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values. Reset all settings other than custom white balance op-

tions selected using F WHITE BALANCE. Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME, TIME DIFFERENCE, COPYRIGHT INFO, and con-

nection-related CONNECTION SETTING options to default values. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK. REGULATORY To view electronic copies of the product model number, and other certifi cates, select D USER SETTING> REGULATORY in the setup menu. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 214 SOUND SETTING Make changes to camera sounds. To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SOUND SET-UP. SOUND SETTING AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. SHUTTER VOLUME SHUTTER SOUND PLAYBACK VOLUME EXIT AF BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 215 SOUND SETTING OPERATION VOL. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-

trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SHUTTER VOLUME Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SHUTTER SOUND Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter. i SOUND 1 PLAYBACK VOLUME Options Options j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3 Adjust the volume for movie playback. 0 1 2 3 4 Options Options 5 6 7 8 9 10 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 216 SCREEN SETTING Make changes to display settings. To access display settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SCREEN SET-UP. SCREEN SETTING VIEW MODE SETTING EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF COLOR EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT LCD BRIGHTNESS LCD COLOR LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT IMAGE DISP. EXIT VIEW MODE SETTING Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfi nder), or LCD monitor view modes (P 14). N Menus are not displayed in the LCD monitor when EVF ONLY is select-

ed; to change settings, put your eye to the viewfi nder. EVF BRIGHTNESS Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfi nder. Option Option AUTO MANUAL EVF COLOR Description Description Automatic brightness adjustment. Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between 7 and +5. Adjust the hue of the display in the electronic viewfi nder. 5 4 3 2 1 Options Options 0

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 217 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfi nder. 1 Adjust colors using the focus stick

(focus lever). EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 2 Press MENU/OK. LCD BRIGHTNESS Adjust monitor brightness. 5 4 3 2 1 LCD COLOR Adjust monitor hue. 5 4 3 2 1 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT Options Options 0 Options Options 0 SET CANCEL

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5 Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor. 1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever). 2 Press MENU/OK. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 218 SCREEN SETTING IMAGE DISP. Choose how long images are displayed after shooting. Option Option CONTINUOUS 1.5 SEC 0.5 SEC OFF Description Description Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus point, press the center of the rear command dial; press again to cancel zoom. Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter button is pressed halfway. Pictures are not displayed after shooting. N Colors may diff er slightly from those in the fi nal image. Noise mottling may be visible at high sensitivities. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS Choose whether the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor rotate to match camera orientation. Options Options ON OFF T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 219 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview in manual exposure mode. Option Option Description Description PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview. PREVIEW WB OFF Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in which exposure and white balance are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when you use a ash with an incandescent monitoring lamp. Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-

tion when using a ash or on other occasions on which expo-

sure may change when the picture is taken. NATURAL LIVE VIEW Choose whether the eff ects of fi lm simulation, white balance, and other settings are visible in the monitor. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Option Option ON OFF Description Description The e ects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor, but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-

to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will di er from those in the nal picture. The display will however be adjusted to show the e ects of advanced lters and of monochrome and sepia settings. The e ects of lm simulation, white balance, and other settings can be previewed in the monitor. 220 F-Log VIEW ASSIST Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies. SCREEN SETTING Options Options ON OFF FRAMING GUIDELINE Choose a framing grid for shooting mode. F GRID 9 Option Option G GRID 24 H HD FRAMING D i s p l a y For rule of thirds compo-

sition. A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the crop shown by the lines at the top and bottom of the display. N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed using D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 17). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 221 AUTOROTATE PB Choose ON to automatically rotate tall (portrait-orientation) pictures during playback. Options Options ON OFF FOCUS SCALE UNITS Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator. METERS FEET Options Options T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number

(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for still camera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the docu-

mentation provided with the lens. Option Option T NUMBER F NUMBER Description Description A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematogra-

phers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better cal-

culate exposure. A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers. Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that the same aperture may produce di erent exposures depending on the lens. DISP. CUSTOM SETTING Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display

(P 17). 222 SCREEN SETTING LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfi nd-

er. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0

-1

-1

-2

-2

-3

-3

-4

-4

-5

-5 OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 11). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 255). LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-

dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 13). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 255). 223 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Choose the indicators displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP>

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Expo. DISP. Scale Option Option AExpo. DISP. Bd Scale CL1, L2, L3, L4 DR1, R2, R3, R4 Description Description Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display. Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK. Select ON to display the exposure indicator. Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side of the screen. Choose up to four large icons for display on the right side of the screen. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. Adjust display contrast. Option Option HIGH CONTRAST STANDARD LOW CONTRAST High contrast. Normal contrast. Low contrast. Description Description DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting. 224 SCREEN SETTING x Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is displayed during still photography. TRANSPARENT BLACK Options Options F Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is displayed during movie recording. TRANSPARENT BLACK Options Options T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 225 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING Access options for camera controls. To access control options, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS EXIT FOCUS LEVER SETTING Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the fo-

cus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, or right. PUSH Option Option OFF EDIT FOCUS AREA ZOOM T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Description Description Pressing the center of the stick has no e ect. Press the center of the stick to view a focus-area display where you can choose the focus area. If FACE DETECTION ON is selected for FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, In-

telligent Face Detection will be temporarily disabled. Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus area (P 72). If FACE DETECTION ON is selected for FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, Intelligent Face Detec-

tion will be temporarily disabled. 226 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING TILT o Option Option OFF DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION EDIT FOCUS AREA DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION/FACE SELECT Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no e ect. Description Description Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display. Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-area display and choose the focus area. Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting dis-

play. If FACE DETECTION ON is selected for FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can also choose the face used for focus. x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still pho-

tography (P 252). F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when fi lming movies (P 252). FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 255). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 227 COMMAND DIAL SETTING Choose the roles played by the command dials. Option Option FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1 FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3 REAR COMMAND DIAL Description Description Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aper-

ture (APERTURE) 1 to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-

(APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation

(EXP. erture COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-

(APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation

(EXP. erture COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to the rear command dial. 1 Aperture set to A (auto) and lens equipped with aperture ring or COMMAND selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> APERTURE RING SETTING (A). 2 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C. N COMMAND DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and holding the center of the front command dial. You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 228 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Option Option AF-S AF-C Description Description ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway. OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed half-

way. OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. SHUTTER AE If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be ad-

justed separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual fo-

cus). Options Options ON OFF N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot taken in burst mode. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 229 SHOOT WITHOUT LENS Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is at-

tached. Options Options ON OFF SHOOT WITHOUT CARD Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory card inserted in the camera. Option Option ON OFF Description Description When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be displayed. The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card. FOCUS RING Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-

crease the focus distance. X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise) Options Options FOCUS RING OPERATION Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-

ment of the focus ring. Option Option NONLINEAR LINEAR Description Description Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated. Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is ro-

tated, but the focusing speed is una ected by the speed the ring is rotated. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 230 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING AE/AF-LOCK MODE This option determines the behavior of the button to which exposure and/or focus lock is assigned. Option Option AE&AF ON WHEN PRESSING AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH Description Description Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed. Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and re-

main locked until it is pressed again. AWB-LOCK MODE Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance (AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance. Option Option AWB ON WHEN PRESSING AWB ON/OFF SWITCH Description Description Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed. Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end the lock. APERTURE RING SETTING (A) Choose whether the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture when aperture is set to A (auto). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Option Option AUTO COMMAND Description Description The camera adjusts aperture automatically. Aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial. 231 APERTURE SETTING Choose the method used to adjust aperture when using lenses with no aperture rings. Option Option AUTO +

o MANUAL AUTO MANUAL Description Description Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture. Rotate past minimum aperture to choose A (auto). Aperture is selected automatically; camera functions in exposure mode P (program AE) or S (shutter-priority AE). Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture; camera functions in exposure mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (man-

ual). TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Enable or disable touch-screen controls. x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Option Option ON OFF Description Description The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting. Touch controls disabled. x DOUBLE TAP SETTING Option Option ON OFF Description Description Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during shooting. Touch zoom disabled. c TOUCH FUNCTION Option Option ON OFF Description Description Enable touch-function gestures. Disable touch-function gestures. 232 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Option Option ON OFF Description Description The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback. Touch controls disabled. EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while the viewfi nder is active. The area used for touch controls can be selected from:

Option Option 6 0 2 4 1 3 5 OFF Description Description All. Right half. Top right quarter. Bottom right quarter. Left half. Top left quarter. Bottom left quarter. Touch controls disabled. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 233 POWER MANAGEMENT Adjust power management settings. To access power management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE BOOST SETTING EXIT AUTO POWER OFF Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automati-

cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off manually. 5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF Options Options T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 234 POWER MANAGEMENT PERFORMANCE Select BOOST to improve focus and EVF display performance. Option Option BOOST NORMAL Description Description Boost camera focus and EVF display performance. The bat-

tery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected. Choose for standard focus and EVF display performance and battery endurance. BOOST SETTING Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is selected for PERFORMANCE. Option Option LOW LIGHT PRIORITY Description Description Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shadows easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting. RESOLUTION PRIORITY Display resolution is increased to make details easier to see. FRAME RATE PRIORITY The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing motion. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 235 SAVE DATA SETTING Make changes to fi le management settings. To access fi le management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. SAVE DATA SETTING FRAME NO. SAVE ORG IMAGE EDIT FILE NAME SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO FRAME NO. EXIT Frame number New pictures are stored in image fi les named using a four-digit fi le number assigned by adding one to the last fi le number used. The fi le number is displayed during playback as shown. FRAME NO. controls whether fi le num-

bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or the current memory card is formatted. Directory number File number T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Option Option CONTINUOUS RENEW Description Description Numbering continues from the last le number used or the rst available le number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to reduce the number of pictures with duplicate le names. Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new memory card is inserted. N If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be disabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card before resuming shooting. Selecting D USER SETTING> RESET does not reset the fi le number. Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may diff er. 236 SAVE DATA SETTING SAVE ORG IMAGE Choose ON to save unprocessed copies of pictures taken using RED EYE REMOVAL. Options Options ON OFF EDIT FILE NAME Change the fi le name prefi x. sRGB images use a four-letter prefi x

(default DSCF), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefi x (DSF) preceded by an underscore. Option Option sRGB AdobeRGB Default prefi x Default prefi x DSCF _DSF Sample fi le name Sample fi le name ABCD0001 _ABC0001 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 237 SAVE DATA SETTING SELECT FOLDER Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent pictures. Option Option SELECT FOLDER CREATE FOLDER Description Description To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK. Enter a ve-character folder name. The new folder will be created with the next picture you take and subsequent pictures will be stored in that folder. COPYRIGHT INFO Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information are refl ected only in images taken after the changes are made. Option Option Description Description DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information. ENTER AUTHORS INFO Enter the creators name. ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder. DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO Delete the current copyright information. This change applies only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright information recorded with existing images is not a ected. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 238 CONNECTION SETTING Adjust settings for connection to other devices. To access connection settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose CONNECTION SETTING. CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING CONNECTION MODE USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING EXIT N For more information on wireless connections, visit:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/wifi/

Bluetooth SETTINGS Adjust Bluetooth settings. Option Option PAIRING REGISTRATION SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION DELETE PAIRING REG. Bluetooth ON/OFF AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SMARTPHONE SYNC. SETTING Description Description Pair the camera with a smartphone running the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the camera has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO CONNECTION to exit without connecting. Delete pairing information for selected devices. Choose the de-

vice in the device list. The selected device will also be removed from the devices listed in SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION. ON: The camera automatically establishes a Bluetooth con-

nection with paired devices when turned on. OFF: The camera does not connect via Bluetooth. ON: Mark photos for upload as they are taken. Mark JPEG photos for upload as they are taken. OFF: Photos are not marked for upload as they are taken. Choose whether to synchronize the camera to the time and/or location provided by a paired smartphone. LOCATION&TIME: Synchronize the time and location. LOCATION: Synchronize the location. TIME: Synchronize the time. OFF: Synchronization o . T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 239 N Install the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app on your smartphone or tablet before pairing the device with your camera or uploading images. When ON is selected for both Bluetooth ON/OFF and AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER or images are currently selected for upload using the IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER option in the C(playback) menu, upload to paired devices will begin shortly after you exit to playback or turn the camera off . IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER can also be used to select pictures for upload when AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER is off . PC AUTO SAVE Adjust settings for connection to computers via wireless LAN. Option Option PC AUTO SAVE SETTING Description Description Choose the method used for connection to computers via a wireless LAN. SIMPLE SETUP: Connect using WPS. MANUAL SETUP: Choose the network from a list (SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manually

(ENTER SSID). DELETE REGISTERED DESTINATION PC DETAILS OF PREVIOUS CONNECTION Remove selected destinations. View computers to which the camera has recently connected. N These settings also apply when pictures are downloaded to a comput-

er using FUJIFILM PC AutoSave software. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 240 CONNECTION SETTING instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifi lm instax SHARE printers. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 241 CONNECTION MODE Adjust settings for connection to external devices. Option Option USB CARD READER X WEBCAM USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO *

USB MOVIE SHOOTING FIXED *

USB RAW CONV./

BACKUP RESTORE Description Description Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically enables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to the computer. The camera functions normally when not con-

nected. The camera can be used as a webcam when connected to a computer running FUJIFILM X Webcam. The cameras movie-recording features can be controlled from gimbals, drones, or other devices connected via USB. The camera automatically enters tethered shooting (i.e., re-

mote-control) mode when the external device is turned on and returns to normal operation when the external device turned o or disconnected. The features available vary with the type of device connected. As for USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO, except that the camera remains in tethered shooting (remote-control) mode when the external device is o or not connected, al-

lowing the device to resume control when the connection is re-established after an accidental disconnection or other disruption. Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatical-

ly enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The camera functions normally when not connected. USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the cam-

eras image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW les to high-quality JPEG images. BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and load camera settings. Recon gure the camera in an instant or share settings with other cameras of the same type.

* Rotate the drive dial to F (movie). N For information on compatible computer software, see Software for Use with Your Camera (P 298). 242 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 CONNECTION SETTING USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING Choose whether power is supplied to the camera when it is con-

nected to a computer or other device via a USB cable. Option Option ON OFF Description Description The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing the drain on the camera battery. The camera does not draw power from the connected device. O The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from devices that do not supply power. Select OFF before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection may not be available for data transfer or the like when ON is selected. N Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while the camera is off . T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 243 CONNECTION SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Option Option NAME RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE H GEOTAGGING Description Description Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default). Choose whether to resize images for upload to smartphones. Resizing applies only to the copy uploaded to the smartphone;

the original is not a ected. ON: Larger images are resized to H for upload. OFF: Images are uploaded at their original size. Choose whether location data downloaded from a smartphone are embedded in pictures as they are taken. LOCATION INFO Display the location data last downloaded from a smartphone. r BUTTON SETTING Choose the role played by the Fn1button during playback. r PAIRING/TRANSFER ORDER: The Fn1 button can be used for pairing and selecting images for transfer during play-

back. r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION: The Fn1 button can be used during playback to establish wireless connections. INFORMATION View the cameras MAC and Bluetooth address. RESET WIRELESS SETTING Restore wireless settings to their default values. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 244 Shortcuts 245 Shortcut Options Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation. Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-

tom my menu or assigned to a function button or touch-func-

tion gesture for direct access:

Shortcut Option Shortcut Option My menu The Quick Menu The function button Touch-function gestures Description Description Add frequently-used options to this custom menu, which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and se-

lecting the E (MY MENU) tab. The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button. Use the Q menu to view or change the options se-

lected for frequently-used menu items. Use the function buttons for direct access to select-

ed features. Use touch function button ick gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to selected features. PP 247 249 255 258 S h o r t c u t s 9 246 MY MENU Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options. To display my menu, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the E (MY MENU) tab. MY MENU SELF-TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE IS MODE FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING EXIT O The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to E MY MENU. MY MENU SETTING To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 In the setup menu, select D USER SETTING> x MY MENU SETTING or F MY MENU SETTING. N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS. To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS. MY MENU SETTING ADD ITEMS RANK ITEMS REMOVE ITEMS MY MENU SETTING 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and press MENU/OK. Options that can be added to my menu are highlighted in blue. N Items currently in my menu are indicated by check marks. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE SELECT S h o r t c u t s 9 CANCEL 247 3 Choose a position for the item and press MENU/OK. The item will be added to my menu. SELECT ITEM LOCATION 1 2 IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY MY MENU 4 Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been added. MOVE SAVE N My menu can contain up to 16 items. S h o r t c u t s 9 248 The Quick Menu Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To view the quick menu, press the Qbutton. The Quick Menu Display The quick menu off ers diff erent options in photo and movie modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:

Still photography ISO SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM AA SHOOTING MODE/

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING GG IMAGE QUALITY Default Default BB ISO CC WHITE BALANCE D DYNAMIC RANGE E HIGH ISO NR F IMAGE SIZE HH FILM SIMULATION II SELF-TIMER J FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING K FLASH FUNCTION SETTING L EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items BL, which can be changed. S h o r t c u t s 9 249 Movie recording S.S. 5.0 60 10000 SET END Default Default AA SHOOTING MODE EE APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROLoL) BB S.S. (MOVIE OPTIMIZED FF F ISO CONTROLoL) CC MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/

GG MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE ASPECT RATIO D F WHITE BALANCE HH WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.

(WHEN k SELECTED) The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items BH, which can be changed. S h o r t c u t s 9 250 Viewing and Changing Settings 1 Press Q to display the quick menu during shooting. The Quick Menu 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight items and rotate the rear command dial to change. ISO SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM N To jump to the EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button when the quick menu is displayed. 3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete. N The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls. Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function buttons or assign the Q buttons default role to a function button

(P 255). To disable the Q(quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING> Q BUTTON SETTING. S h o r t c u t s 9 251 Editing the Quick Menu To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during shooting. N Whether the camera displays the photo or movie quick menu de-

pends on the position of the mode dial. 2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick

(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. The following can be assigned to the quick menu. N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU. S h o r t c u t s 9 252 The Quick Menu Available Items (Still Photography) Choose from:

IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.

(WHENk SELECTED) HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS CLARITY HIGH ISO NR AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING MF ASSIST N To disable the function button, choose NONE. TOUCH SCREEN MODE HDR SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO FLASH FUNCTION SETTING FLASH COMPENSATION MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/

ASPECTRATIO MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE MOVIE MODE BIT RATE FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT SOUND & FLASH EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS EVF/LCD COLOR NONE S h o r t c u t s 9 253 The Quick Menu Available Items (Movies) FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.

(WHEN k SELECTED) HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS HIGH ISO NR FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING MF ASSIST TOUCH SCREEN MODE PHOTOMETRY MOVIE ISO MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/

ASPECT RATIO N To disable the function button, choose NONE. MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE MOVIE MODE BIT RATE FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC MOVIE AF MODE FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION S.S. (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL) APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL) INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT SOUND & FLASH EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS EVF/LCD COLOR NONE S h o r t c u t s 9 254 Function Controls Assign a role to each function button or touch-function gesture for quick access to the selected feature. The Function Buttons Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the se-

lected feature. Function Button Defaults The default assignments are:

Fn1 button Fn1 button AE-L button AE-L button PERFORMANCE AF-L button AF-L button AE LOCK ONLY Center of rear command dial Center of rear command dial AF LOCK ONLY Q button Q button FOCUS CHECK VIEW MODE button VIEW MODE button QUICK MENU VIEW MODE SETTING S h o r t c u t s 9 255 Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING op-

tion in the setup menu. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE CLARITY SELECT CUSTOM SETTING FOCUS AREA FOCUS CHECK AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE DETECTION ON/OFF AF RANGE LIMITER FOCUS CHECK LOCK DRIVE SETTING HDR SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT sJ SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO IS MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FLASH COMPENSATION N To disable the function button, choose NONE. 256 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING TTL-LOCK MODELING FLASH MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION ZEBRA SETTING INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL VIEW MODE SETTING PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW HISTOGRAM ELECTRONIC LEVEL LARGE INDICATORS MODE F-Log VIEW ASSIST AE LOCK ONLY AF LOCK ONLY AE/AF LOCK AF-ON AWB LOCK ONLY APERTURE SETTING PERFORMANCE AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION Bluetooth ON/OFF QUICK MENU PLAYBACK NONE S h o r t c u t s 9 Function Controls AF-ON Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus. MODELING FLASH If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-

ed fl ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fi re the fl ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling fl ash). TTL-LOCK If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock fl ash output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>

TTL-LOCK MODE (P 153). S h o r t c u t s 9 257 Touch-Function Gestures Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4) for quick access to selected features. N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-

tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION. Touch-Function Gesture Defaults The default assignments for the diff erent gestures are:

T-Fn2 (fl ick left) T-Fn2 (fl ick left) T-Fn1 (fl ick up) T-Fn1 (fl ick up) DRIVE SETTING T-Fn3 (fl ick right) T-Fn3 (fl ick right) FILM SIMULATION T-Fn4 (fl ick down) T-Fn4 (fl ick down) WHITE BALANCE AF MODE S h o r t c u t s 9 258 Function Controls Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected us-

ing the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE CLARITY SELECT CUSTOM SETTING FOCUS AREA FOCUS CHECK AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE DETECTION ON/OFF AF RANGE LIMITER FOCUS CHECK LOCK DRIVE SETTING HDR SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT sJ SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO N To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE. IS MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FLASH COMPENSATION FLASH FUNCTION SETTING TTL-LOCK MODELING FLASH FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION ZEBRA SETTING INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL VIEW MODE SETTING PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW HISTOGRAM ELECTRONIC LEVEL LARGE INDICATORS MODE F-Log VIEW ASSIST APERTURE SETTING PERFORMANCE AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION Bluetooth ON/OFF QUICK MENU PLAYBACK NONE S h o r t c u t s 9 259 MEMO 260 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 261 Lenses The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Lens Parts P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 A Lens hood B Mounting marks C Focus ring D Zoom ring E Aperture ring N A XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS lens is used here for illustrative purposes. F O.I.S. switch G Aperture mode switch H Lens signal contacts I Front lens cap J Rear lens cap 262 Removing Lens Caps Remove lens caps as shown. Lenses O Lens caps may diff er from those shown. Attaching Lens Hoods When attached, lens hoods reduce glare and protect the front lens element. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 263 Lenses with Aperture Rings At settings other than A, you can adjust aperture by rotating the lens aperture ring (exposure modes A and M). A 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8 A 16 11 8 5.6 4 Aperture ring N Selecting ON for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL disables the aperture ring. When the aperture ring is set to A, rotate the command dials to adjust aperture. The Aperture Mode Switch If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aper-

ture can be adjusted manually by sliding the switch to Z and rotating the aperture ring. Aperture ring Aperture mode switch P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 264 Lenses Lenses with No Aperture Rings The method used to adjust aperture can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING. When an option other than AUTO is selected, aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial. N Aperture control defaults to the front command dial, but can be reas-

signed to the rear command dial using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

COMMAND DIAL SETTING. Lenses with O.I.S. Switches If the lens supports optical image sta-

bilization (O.I.S.), the image stabiliza-

tion mode can be chosen in the camera menus. To activate image stabilization, slide the O.I.S. switch to ON. O.I.S. switch P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 265 Manual Focus Lenses Slide the focus ring to the front for auto-

focus. For manual focus, slide the focus ring to the back and rotate it while checking the results in the camera display. The focus distance and depth-of-fi eld indicators can be used to assist manual focus. O Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes. The Depth-of-Field Indicator The depth-of-fi eld indicator shows the approxi-

mate depth of fi eld (the distance in front of and behind the focus point that appears to be in focus). The indicator is displayed in fi lm format. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 266 Lenses Lens Care Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifi lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fl uid has been applied. Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 267 External Flash Units Use optional external fl ash units for fl ash photography. Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used at shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync speed, while others can function as commanders controlling remote units via optical wireless fl ash control. O You may be unable to test-fi re the fl ash in some circumstances, for ex-

ample when camera menus are displayed. Red-Eye Removal Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected for F FLASH SETTING> RED EYE REMOVAL and G AF/MF SETTING>

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is FACE DETECTION ON. Red-eye re-

moval minimizes red-eye caused when light from the fl ash is refl ected from the subjects retinas. Flash Sync Speed The fl ash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1180s or slow-

er. Optional Flash Units from Fujifi lm The camera can be used with optional Fujifi lm shoe-mounted fl ash units. Third-Party Flash Units Do not use third-party fl ash units that apply over 300V to the camera hot shoe. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 268 Using an External Flash 1 Connect the unit to the camera. 2 In shooting mode, select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH SETTING) menu tab. The options available vary with the fl ash unit. External Flash Units FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT MenuMenu Description Description Built-In Flash Displayed when the built-in ash is raised. SYNC TERMINAL SHOE MOUNT FLASH COMMANDER

(OPTICAL) Sync terminal options will be displayed if the built-in ash is lowered and either no ash unit, or an incompatible ash unit, is mounted on the hot shoe. Displayed when an optional ash unit other than the EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on. Displayed if an optional ash unit functioning as a com-

mander for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control is connected and turned on. PP 98 270 271 274 3 Highlight items using the focus stick

(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-

mand dial to change the highlighted setting. MODE Built-In Flash 4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into eff ect. ADJUST END P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 269 SYNC TERMINAL SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the built-in fl ash is lowered and either no fl ash unit, or an incompatible fl ash unit, is mounted on the hot shoe. MODE SYNC TERMINAL ADJUST END Setting Setting A Flash control mode B Sync Description Description Choose from the following options:

M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the unit uses long ashes or has a slow response time. D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled. Choose whether the ash is timed to re immediately after the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 270 External Flash Units SHOE MOUNT FLASH following options are available when an optional The shoe-mounted fl ash unit is attached and turned on. MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH Setting Setting A Flash control mode ADJUST END Description Description The ash control mode selected with the ash unit. This can in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-

able vary with the ash. TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ash compensation (B). M: The ash res at the selected output regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be adjusted from the camera (B). MULTI: Repeating ash. Compatible shoe-mounted ash units will re multiple times with each shot. D (OFF): The ash does not re. Some ash units can be turned o from the camera. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 271 Setting Setting Description Description B Flash compensation/

output C Flash mode (TTL) The options available vary with ash control mode. TTL: Adjust ash compensation (the full value may not be applied if the limits of the ash control system are exceed-

ed). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the select-

ed value is added to the value selected with the ash unit. M/MULTI: Adjust ash output (compatible units only). Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power, from (mode M) or (MULTI) down to in increments equivalent to EV. The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the ash control system; take a test shot and check the results. Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options avail-

able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash lev-

el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-

cates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possible;

ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 272 Setting Setting Description Description External Flash Units Control ash timing. H (1ST CURTAIN): The ash res immediately after the shut-

ter opens (generally the best choice). I (2ND CURTAIN): The ash res immediately before the shutter closes. R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-

speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for ash control mode. The angle of illumination ( ash coverage) for units that sup-

port ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-

matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage. K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-

raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT), as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-

light and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT). Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography. D Sync E Zoom F Lighting G LED light G Number of fl ashes * Choose the number of times the ash res each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the frequency at which the ash res in MULTI mode. H Frequency *

* Full value may not be applied if limits of ash control system are exceeded. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 273 COMMANDER(OPTICAL) The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning as a commander for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control. MODE COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ADJUST END Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control off ers a choice of four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical signals between the commander and remote fl ash units. Sepa-

rate channels can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to pre-

vent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. The fl ash units can also be placed in up to three groups (A, B, and C) and fl ash mode and fl ash level adjusted separately for each group. A C BB 274 P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 Setting Setting A Flash control mode

(group A) B Flash control mode

(group B) C Flash control mode

(group C) D Flash compensation/

output (group A) E Flash compensation/

output (group B) F Flash compensation/

output (group C) External Flash Units Description Description Choose ash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%

is available for groups A and B only. TTL: The units in the group re in TTL mode. Flash com-

pensation can be adjusted separately for each group. TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can specify the output of the selected group as a percent-

age of the other and adjust overall ash compensation for both groups. M: In mode M, the units in the group re at the selected output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units in all groups to repeating ash mode. All units will re multiple times with each shot. D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will not re. Adjust ash level for the selected group according to option selected for ash control mode. Note that the full value may not be applied if the limits of the ash control system are exceeded. TTL: Adjust ash compensation. M/MULTI: Adjust ash output. TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and adjust overall ash compensation. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 275 Setting Setting G Flash mode (TTL) P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 H Sync I Zoom J Lighting 276 Description Description Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-

lected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A picon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possi-

ble; ash level is adjusted according to subject bright-

ness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Control ash timing. H (1ST CURTAIN): The ash res immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice). I (2ND CURTAIN): The ash res immediately before the shutter closes. R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-

speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for ash control mode. The angle of illumination ( ash coverage) for units that sup-

port ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-

matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-

ducing coverage. K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. Setting Setting K Commander K Number of fl ashes L Channel L Frequency External Flash Units Description Description Choose the group for units functioning as a command-

er for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control in TTL, TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clip-

on ash units that support Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control. Gr A: Assign the commander to group A. Gr B: Assign the commander to group B. Gr C: Assign the commander to group C. OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that does not a ect the nal picture. Choose the number of times the ash res each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the channel used by the commander for commu-

nication with the remote ash units. Separate channels can be used for di erent ash systems or to prevent in-

terference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. Choose the frequency at which the ash res in MULTI mode. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 277 MEMO 278 Connections 279 HDMI Output Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI devices. Connecting to HDMI Devices Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a third-party HDMI cable. 1 Turn the camera off . 2 Connect the cable as shown below. Insert into HDMI connector Insert into HDMI Micro connector (Type D) 3 Confi gure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-

umentation supplied with the device. 4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off in playback mode (P 281). O Making sure the connectors are fully inserted. Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long. The USB cable cannot be used while an HDMI cable is connected. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 280 HDMI Output Shooting Shoot photos and record movies while viewing the scene through the camera lens on or saving footage to the HDMI device. N This feature can be used to save 4K and Full HD movies to an HDMI recorder. Playback To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera mon-

itor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI device. Note that the camera volume controls have no eff ect on sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to adjust the volume. N Some televisions may briefl y display a black screen when movie play-

back begins. An adapter cable (sold separately; P 331) is required when using headphones. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 281 Wireless Connections

(Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) Access wireless networks and connect to computers, smartphones, or tablets. For more information, visit:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/wifi/

Smartphones and Tablets: FUJIFILM Camera Remote Connect to the camera via Bluetooth or wireless LAN. N To establish a wireless connection to the camera, you will need to in-

stall the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app on your smartphone or tablet. FUJIFILM Camera Remote Once a connection has been established, you can use FUJIFILM Camera Remote to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures Upload location data to the camera Release the camera shutter Update camera fi rmware For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

C o n n e c t i o n s 11 282 Wireless Connections (Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) SmartPhones and Tablets: Bluetooth Pairing Use D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> PAIRING REGISTRATION to pair the camera with smartphones or tablets. Pairing off ers a simple method for downloading photos from the camera. N Photos are downloaded via a wireless connection. Once pairing is complete, you will be able to synchronize the camera clock and location data with the smartphone or tablet (P 239). You can choose a connection from up to 7 paired smartphones or tablets. Smartphones and Tablets: Wireless LAN Establish wireless LAN connections to smartphones or tablets us-

ing WIRELESS COMMUNICATION in the A SHOOTING SETTING, B MOVIE SETTING, or C PLAY BACK MENU. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 283 Wireless Connections (Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) Copying Pictures to a Computer: PC AutoSave Install the latest version of FUJIFILM PC Autosave to your com-

puter to upload pictures from the camera over wireless networks

(Wi-Fi). FUJIFILM PC AutoSave For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/pc_autosave/

Computers: Wireless Connections You can upload pictures from the camera using the PC AUTO SAVE option in the playback menu. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 284 Connecting via USB The camera can be connected to computers and smart-

phones via USB. Connecting to Computers N Before downloading pictures or taking pictures remotely, connect the camera to a computer and check that it functions normally. 1 Turn the computer on. 2 Adjust settings according to how the camera will be used. Copying Pictures from a Memory Card to a Computer

(P 288) Using Your Camera as a Webcam (FUJIFILM X Webcam)

(P 288) Converting RAW Images: FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO (P 289) Backing up and Restoring Camera Settings (FUJIFILM X Acquire) (P 289) 3 Turn the camera off . 4 Connect a USB cable. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 USB connector (Type-C) O The USB cable must be no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long and be suitable for data transfer. 285 5 Turn the camera on. 6 Copy pictures to your computer. Image transfer: Use applications provided with your operat-

ing system. Using your camera as a webcam: Launch FUJIFILM X Webcam. RAW conversion: Process RAW images using FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO. The power of the cameras image processing en-

gine is used for rapid processing. Saving and loading camera settings: Use FUJIFILM X Acquire to save or load camera settings. Save your preferred settings to a fi le in a single operation and copy them to multiple cameras. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 286 Connecting via USB O Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable. When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-

serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-

necting the camera. If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted, there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-

able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer pictures. Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before discon-

necting the camera. Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-

alone computer. Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-

connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has ceased to be displayed. The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet connection. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 287 Copying Pictures from a Memory Card to a Computer Before copying pictures to a computer, se-

lect USB CARD READER for D CONNECTION SETTING> CONNECTION MODE. The software that can be used to copy pictures varies with your computer op-

erating system. CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE CONNECTION MODE USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING USB CARD READER X WEBCAM USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB MOVIE SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE EXIT Mac OS X/macOS Pictures can be copied to your computer using Image Capture

(supplied with your computer) or other software. O Use a card reader to copy fi les over 4GB in size. Windows Pictures can be copied to your computer using applications sup-

plied with the operating system. Using Your Camera as a Webcam (FUJIFILM X Webcam) Before proceeding, select X WEBCAM for D CONNECTION SETTING> CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. Launch FUJIFILM X Webcam. CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE USB CARD READER X WEBCAM USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB MOVIE SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE CONNECTION MODE USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING N For more information on FUJIFILM X Webcam, see Software for Use with Your Camera (P 298). EXIT C o n n e c t i o n s 11 288 Tethered Movie Recording Before proceeding, select USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO for D CONNECTION SETTING> CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. Use this option when the camera is con-

nected to gimbals, drones, or other devices. N Rotate the drive dial to F (movie). Connecting via USB CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE USB CARD READER X WEBCAM USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB MOVIE SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE CONNECTION MODE USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING EXIT The features available vary with the type of device connected. Choose USB MOVIE SHOOTING FIXED if the camera will be used solely for tethered movie recording. Note that if the USB cable is dis-

connected, the camera will continue to function in tethered mode and pictures will not be saved to the camera memory card. Converting RAW Images: FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO Before proceeding, select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for D CON-

NECTION SETTING > CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO can be used to convert RAW images to JPEG or TIFF images. N For more information on FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO, see Software for CONNECTION MODE USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING USB CARD READER X WEBCAM USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB MOVIE SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE EXIT Use with Your Camera (P 298). Backing up and Restoring Camera Settings

(FUJIFILM X Acquire) Before proceeding, select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for D CON-

NECTION SETTING > CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. FUJIFILM X Acquire can be used to backup and restore camera settings. N For more information on FUJIFILM X Acquire, see Software for Use with CONNECTION MODE USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING USB CARD READER X WEBCAM USB MOVIE SHOOTING AUTO PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB MOVIE SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE EXIT Your Camera (P 298). C o n n e c t i o n s 11 289 Connecting to Smartphones To copy pictures to a smartphone, select OFF for D CONNECTION SETTING> USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING and connect the cam-

era to the phone using a USB cable. For Customers Using Android Devices How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB connector with which your smartphone is equipped. Type-C Type-C Ready a cable equipped with connectors matching the USB

(Type-C) connector on the camera. Third-party USB cable Type-C connector (male) Type-C connector (male) Micro-B Micro-B Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable. Supplied USB cable USB OTG cable C o n n e c t i o n s 11 Type-C connector (male) Micro-B connector (male) Type-A connector (male) Type-A connector (female) O The smartphone must support USB OTG. The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-Cto Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable. 290 Connecting via USB 1 Set the cameras D CONNECTION SETTING > USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING to OFF. 2 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. N If the smartphone asks for permission for an application other than the Camera Importer to access the camera, tap Cancel and move on to the next step. 3 On your smartphone, tap the notifi cation Connected to USB PTP. 4 From the recommended applications, select Camera Importer. The app will automatically start and allow you to import pho-

tos and movies to your smartphone. N If the message There is no MTP device connected appears on the app, please try again from step 2. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 291 Connecting via USB For Customers Using iOS An Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter is required. Supplied USB cable Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter Type-C connector (male) Use an Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter Type-A connector (male) 1 Set the cameras D CONNECTION SETTING > USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING to OFF. 2 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your smartphone. O A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad Pro and iPad Air devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors. The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-Cto Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 292 instax SHARE Printers Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE printers. Establishing a Connection Select D CONNECTION SETTING > instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and pass-

word. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 293 Printing Pictures 1 Turn the printer on. 2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. instax SHARE Printers PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 4 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 294 Technical Notes 295 Accessories from Fujifi lm The following optional accessories are available from Fujifi lm. For the latest information on the accessories available in your region, check with your local Fujifi lm representative or visit https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/. Rechargeable Li-ion batteries Rechargeable Li-ion batteries NP-W126S: Additional high-capacity NP-W126S rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required. Battery chargers Battery chargers BC-W126S: Replacement battery chargers can be purchased as required. At

+20 C/+68 F, the BC-W126S charges an NP-W126S in about 150 minutes. AC power adapters AC power adapters AC-9V (requires CP-W126 DC coupler): Use this 100240V, 50/60Hz AC power adapter for extended shooting and playback or when copying pictures to a computer. DC couplers DC couplers CP-W126: For extended shooting or playback or when using the camera with a computer, use the CP-W126 to connect the camera to the AC-9V power adapter. Remote releases Remote releases RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time ex-

posure (2.5mm). Stereo microphones Stereo microphones MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording. FUJINON lenses FUJINON lenses XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM X-mount. FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Macro extension tubes Macro extension tubes MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduc-

tion ratios. Teleconverters Teleconverters XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4. XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0. 296 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Accessories from Fujifi lm Mount adapters Mount adapters FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selection of M-mount lenses. Body caps Body caps BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached. Shoe-mounted fl ash units Shoe-mounted fl ash units EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL ash control, this clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-

lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ash sync speed. Featuring support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fuji lm optical wireless ash control, it can be used as a commander or remote ash unit for remote wireless ash photography. EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 ash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries. EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL ash control, this clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-

lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ash sync speed. It can also be used as remote ash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless com-

mander. EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developed by Nissin Japan, this wireless ash commander can be used with optional EF-60 clip-on ash units and other NAS-compliant units.

* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd. EF-42: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports manual and TTL ash control. EF-X20: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports manual and TTL ash control. EF-20: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports TTL ash control (manual ash control is not supported). Grip belts Grip belts GB-001: Improves grip. Combine with a hand grip for more secure handling. instax SHARE printers instax SHARE printers SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax lm. 297 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Software for Use with Your Camera The camera can be used with the following software. For the latest information on software available from Fujifi lm, visit https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/. FUJIFILM Camera Remote Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a smartphone or tablet (P 282). http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

FUJIFILM PC AutoSave Download pictures from your camera over wireless networks

(P 284). http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/pc_autosave/

RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conver-

sion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of charge from the Fujifi lm website. https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converter-

ex-powered-by-silkypix/

N RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is supplied by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Capture One Express Fujifi lm Capture One Express Fujifi lm is image edit software from Capture One A/S. View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. Capture One Express Fujifi lm is available free of charge from Capture One. https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm N Visit the Capture One A/S website for the latest support information. 298 Software for Use with Your Camera Capture One Pro Fujifi lm Capture One Pro Fujifi lm is workfl ow software from Capture One A/S. Capture One Pro Fujifi lm supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other formats. https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm O Auto download (tethered shooting) is not supported with some cam-

eras. N Visit the Capture One A/S website for the latest support information. FUJIFILM X Acquire This application for Windows and macOS lets you connect to the camera via USB or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specifi ed folder as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/

O Auto download (tethered shooting) is not supported with some cam-

eras. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO can use the cameras unique image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW fi les to create high-quality images in other formats. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/

FUJIFILM X Webcam Connect the camera to a computer via USB to turn it into a web-

cam. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-webcam/

299 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-

tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-

turer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Antennas Antennas Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-

tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-

ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Ground Clamp e Equipment Electric Service Equipment t Ground Clamps Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC ART 250. PART H) AAntenna Lead in Wire AAAntenna An Discharge Unit D N

(NEC SECTION 8 810-20) Grounding Conductors (NEC SECTION 810-21) Read Instructions Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. Retain Instructions Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions Follow Instructions: All operating and use should be followed. instructions Installation Installation Power Sources: This video product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-

bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-

pany. For video products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will t into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to t, contact your electri-

cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third

(grounding) pin. This plug will only t into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-

place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of re or electric shock. Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-

uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been ad-

hered to. This video product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-

terfor example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 300 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-

ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. UseUse Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-

fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into this video product through openings as they may touch dan-

gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the video product. Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-

ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and power-line surges. Service Service Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali ed service personnel. Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to quali ed service person-

nel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the video product. If the video product has been exposed to rain or water. If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. If the video product does not operate normally follow the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-

ment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali ed technician to restore the video product to its normal operation. When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-

i ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to this video product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-

er operating condition. Be sure to read these notes before use The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-

resent the following:

Safety Notes Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious in-

jury can result if the information is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. Unplug from power socket The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). AC DC Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.) WARNING WARNING If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC power adapter. power adapter. Continued use of the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

era or connecting cables. era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids. Should liquid nd its way into the camera or con-

necting cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. 301 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. can cause a re or electric shock. Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-

Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-

er open the case). er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

accident, do not touch the exposed parts. serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-

move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord. tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and cause a re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not use cables with bent connectors. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause injury. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not use the camera while walking or driving. This can result in you falling down or being involved in a tra c accident. Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a thunderstorm. thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due to induced current from the lightning discharge. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Load the battery as shown by the indicator. Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-

abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-

charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-

charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-

charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking, causing re, burns, or other injury. Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the power supply voltage shown. power supply voltage shown. The use of other power sources can cause a re. Do not use in the bathroom or shower Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 302 If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean water and seek medical attention or call an emergency water and seek medical attention or call an emergency number right away. number right away. Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than those specifi ed here. those specifi ed here. The supplied charger is for use only with batteries of the type supplied with the camera. Using the charger to charge conventional batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst. Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual impairment. visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-

tographing infants and young children. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly at high am-

bient temperatures or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are rec-

ommended. Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the product for prolonged periods while the product is on. product for prolonged periods while the product is on. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-

longed use, at high ambient temperatures, or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

sive gases, or dust. sive gases, or dust. When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the battery terminals with insulation tape. battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with other metallic objects or batteries could cause the battery to ignite or burst. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out of the reach of small children. out of the reach of small children. Children may swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical attention or call emergency. Keep out of reach of small children. Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-

ments that could cause injury are the strap, which could become entangled about a childs neck, causing strangulation, and the ash, which could cause visual impairment. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. This product generates radio-frequency emissions that could interfere with navigational or medical equipment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a re fumes, steam, humidity or dust. or electric shock. Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely high temperatures. high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-

tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight. This can cause a re. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause injury. Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still connected. still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage the power cord or cables and cause a re or electric shock. Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-

Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-

er in a cloth or blanket. er in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build up and distort the casing or cause a re. Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t securely into the outlet. securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-

caution could result in re or electric shock. When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Failure to do so can cause a re or electric shock. When charging ends, unplug the charger from the When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power socket. power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the power socket can cause a re. When a memory card is removed, the card could come When a memory card is removed, the card could come out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. gently release the card. Injury could result to those struck by the ejected card. Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause camera. a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer to request internal cleaning every two years. Please note that this service is not free of charge. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. the like. For Your Safety T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 303 The Battery and Power Supply Cautions: Handling the Battery Cautions: Handling the Battery Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-

laces or hairpins. Do not expose to ame or heat. Do not disassemble or modify. Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures. Use with designated chargers only. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks. Do not expose to water. Keep the terminals clean. The battery and camera body may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal. Caution: Disposal Disposal Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate. Do not mechanically crush or split batteries. AC Power Adapters AC Power Adapters The AC power adapter is for indoor use only. Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera. Turn the camera o before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-

connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable. Do not disassemble. Do not expose to high heat and humidity. Do not subject to strong physical shocks. The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during use. This is normal. If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read the appropriate sections. WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. The following describes the proper use of batteries and how to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or cause leakage, overheating, re, or explosion. Li-ion Batteries Li-ion Batteries Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. Notes on the Battery Notes on the Battery The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. Battery life can be extended by turning the camera o when not in use. Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating devices. Charging the Battery Charging the Battery The battery can be charged using a BC-W126S battery char-

ger (available separately). Charging times will increase at am-

bient temperatures below +10 C (+50 F) or above +35 C

(+95 F). Do not attempt to charge the battery at tempera-

tures above +40 C (+104 F); at temperatures below +5 C

(+41 F), the battery will not charge. Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery does not however need to be fully discharged before charging. The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after charging or use. This is normal. Battery Life Battery Life A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-

vice life and should be replaced. Storage Storage If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-

mately one half to capacity. If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-

move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient temperature of from +15 C to +25 C (+59 F to +77 F). Do not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature. 304 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety Using the Camera Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, including arti cial light sources or natural light sources such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera image sensor. Strong sunlight focused through the view nder may dam-

age the panel of electronic view nder (EVF). Do not aim the electronic view nder at the sun. Take Test Shots Take Test Shots Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept liability for damages or lost pro ts incurred as a result of product malfunction. Notes on Copyright Notes on Copyright Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-

er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. Handling Handling To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are being recorded. Liquid Crystal Liquid Crystal In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-

en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action indicated should any of the following situations arise:

If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and running water. If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ush the a ected eye with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-

iting, then seek medical assistance. Although the display is manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and images recorded with the product are una ected. Trademark Information Trademark Information Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiwan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, OS X, macOS and Lightning are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a registered trademark of Mi-

crosoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trade-

marks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Fuji lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. The HDMI logo is a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of their respective owners. Electrical Interference Electrical Interference This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-

ment. Consult with hospital or airline sta before using the camera in a hospital or on an aircraft. Color Television Systems Color Television Systems NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-

vision telecasting speci cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A., Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color television system adopted mainly in European countries and China. Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera le format in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-

or reproduction during printing. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-

ware without the permission of the applicable governing bodies is prohibited. Lenses and Other Accessories Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod. Fuji lm will not be held liable for performance issues or damage caused by the use of third-party accessories. 305 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Please read the Safety Notes and make sure you understand them before using the camera. NOTICES Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-

ernments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci c Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certi ed power level in all tested frequency bands. Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this product must be used with a Fuji lm-speci ed fer-

rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord. A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Di-

vision 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Ef-

ciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through 1609 Perchlorate Materialspecial handling may apply. See:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate For Customers in the U. S. A. For Customers in the U. S. A. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Contains IC : 10293A-WMBNBM26A Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBNBM26A FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-

vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-

lowing measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and re-

ceiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di erent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modi cations not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter. 306 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety For Customers in Canada For Customers in Canada CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-

dian ICES-003. Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-

try Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-

terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-

erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scienti c evi-

dence does not show that any health problems are asso-

ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health e ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating e ects causes no known adverse health e ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological e ects. Some studies have suggested that some biological e ects might occur, but such ndings have not been con rmed by additional research. X-T30 II has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-

vironment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. This symbol on the batteries or accumulators indicates that those batteries shall not be treated as household waste. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-

mulators please dispose these separately according to your local requirements. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-

sources. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city o ce, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-

thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal. In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates that they are to be disposed of separately. To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Caring for the Camera Storage and Use Storage and Use If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera in locations that are:

exposed to rain, steam, or smoke very humid or extremely dusty exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day extremely cold subject to strong vibration exposed to strong magnetic elds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer, or magnet in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides next to rubber or vinyl products 307 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions This product complies with the following EU Directives:

RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU RE Directive 2014/53/EU Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF210005 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-t30-ii/pdf/x-t30-ii_doc-olg.pdf This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth). Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):

WLAN: 3.35 dBm Bluetooth: -3.92 dBm IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the cameras built-in wireless transmitter. Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.. Fuji lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater degree of reliability than o ered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to ensure safety and prevent malfunction. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device. Fuji lm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference that may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz band using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz band using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-

tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.

- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access rights.

- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.

- This device cannot be directly connected to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services. The following may be punishable by law:

The following may be punishable by law:

- Disassembly or modi cation or this device

- Removal of device certi cation labels This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-

ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Con rm that the RFID transmitter is not in operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the a ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fuji lm representative. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Note that Bluetooth may remain on even when the camera is o . Bluetooth can be disabled by selecting OFF for D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> Bluetooth ON/OFF. 308 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety U.K. Importer:

FUJIFILM UK Limited Unit 10A, St Martins Business Centre, St Martins Way, Bedford MK42 0LF, United Kingdom EU Importer:

FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 309 Be sure to read these notes before using the lens For Your Safety WARNING WARNING Do not immerse in or expose to water. Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution can cause a re or electric shock. Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re, electric shock, or injury due to product malfunction. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-

move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not place on unstable surfaces. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may fall, causing injury. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

fi nders. fi nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause permanent visual impairment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re. Keep out of the reach of small children. Keep out of the reach of small children. This product could cause injury in the hands of a child. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution can cause electric shock. Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects. subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame can cause re or burns. When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the store out of direct sunlight. lens can cause re or burns. Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached to a tripod. to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-

jects, causing injury. Safety Notes Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING WARNING CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that death or serious injury can result if the information is ig-

nored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Do not immerse Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 310 Product Care To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals, which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body. Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor, taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-

tly with a piece of Fujifi lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fl uid has been applied. To prevent dust entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in place. Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-

age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING> SENSOR CLEANING. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 311 Cleaning the Image Sensor Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >

SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as de-

scribed below. O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if it is damaged during cleaning. 1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove dust from the sensor. O Do not use a brush or blower brush. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the sensor. 2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Re-

peat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary. 3 Replace the body cap or lens. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 312 Firmware Updates Updates to product fi rmware may result in changes not described in the manual. For more information, visit:

https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/

Checking the Firmware Version O The camera will only display the fi rmware version if a memory card is inserted. 1 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted. 2 Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The current fi rmware version will be displayed; check the fi rm-

ware version. 3 Turn the camera off . N To view the fi rmware version or update fi rmware for optional acces-

sories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted fl ash units, and mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 313 Troubleshooting Consult the table below should you encounter problems using your camera. If you dont fi nd the solution here, con-

tact your local Fujifi lm distributor. Power and Battery Problem Problem The camera does not turn on. The monitor does not turn on. The battery runs down quickly. Solution Solution The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 33). The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-

entation (P 30). The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-

tery-chamber cover (P 30). The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned o and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button pressed halfway until the monitor activates. The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-

et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-

mediately before taking a picture. There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals with a soft, dry cloth. ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF: Turn PRE-AF o (P 132). The auto mode selector lever is rotated to w: To ex-

tend battery endurance, we recommend that you choose a di erent mode (P 61). The battery has been charged many times: The battery has reached the end of its charging life. Purchase a new bat-

tery. The camera turns off suddenly. The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 33). 314 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Problem Problem Charging does not start

(USB). Charging does not start

(battery charger). Charging is slow. The indicator lamp blinks, but the battery does not charge. Troubleshooting Solution Solution Insert the camera battery (P 30). Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation

(P 30). Con rm that the camera is connected to the computer

(P 33). If the computer is o or in sleep mode, turn on or wake the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB ca-

ble (P 33). Insert the battery. Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation. Make sure that the charger is correctly plugged in. Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the charger. Charge the battery at room temperature. There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals with a soft, dry cloth (P 30). The battery has been charged many times: The battery has reached the end of its charging life. Purchase a new bat-

tery. If the battery still fails to charge, contact your Fuji lm dealer (P 296). The power supply icon is not displayed. Con rm that ON is selected for USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING (P 243). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 315 Menus and Displays Problem Problem Display is not in English. Solution Solution Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING> Qa

(P 39, 212). Shooting Problem Problem No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed. Solution Solution The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete pictures (P 30, 192). The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card in the camera (P 210). There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card

(P 30). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 33). The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on

(P 35). You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 230). Mottling (noise) appears in the monitor or viewfi nder when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The camera does not focus. Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the displays. Images taken with the camera are una ected. The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manual focus (P 82). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 316 Problem Problem No panorama is recorded when the shutter button is pressed. No face is detected. The fl ash does not fi re. Some fl ash modes are not available. The fl ash does not fully light the subject. Pictures are blurred. Troubleshooting Solution Solution The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns o (P 8). The subjects face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 133). The subjects face occupies only a small area of the frame:

Change the composition so that the subjects face occu-

pies a larger area of the frame (P 133). The subjects face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-

ject to face the camera (P 133). The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level. The subjects face is poorly lit: Shoot in bright light. The fl ash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 152). The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE that does not use the electronic shutter (P 148). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 33). The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single frame mode (P 5). The fl ash is lowered: Raise the ash (P 98). OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON (P 213). The subject is not in range of the fl ash: Position the subject in range of the ash. The fl ash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly. Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower shutter speed (P 56, 60, 330). The lens is dirty: Clean the lens. The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens

(P 42). s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-

played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 43). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 317 Problem Problem Pictures are mottled. Solution Solution Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is high: This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. * Use pixel mapping (P 117).

* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various col-

ors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce the occurrence of such bright spots. The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:

Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool down (P 35, 326). A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool down (P 35, 326). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 318 Troubleshooting Playback Problem Problem Pictures are grainy. Playback zoom is unavailable. No sound in movie playback. Selected pictures are not deleted. Pictures remain after ERASE> ALL FRAMES is selected. File numbering is unexpectedly reset. Solution Solution The pictures were taken with a di erent make or model of camera. The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a di erent make or model of camera. Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume

(P 216). The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during recording. The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during playback. OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON

(P 213). Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected. Remove protection using the device with which it was originally applied (P 196). The battery-chamber cover was opened while the cam-

era was on. Turn the camera o before opening the bat-

tery-chamber cover (P 236). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 319 Connections Problem Problem The monitor is blank. Both the TV and camera monitor are blank. No picture or sound on TV. The computer does not recognize the camera. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO or FUJIFILM X Acquire fails to correctly detect the camera. Cannot connect to iPhones or iPads. Cannot connect to smartphone. Solution Solution The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 280). EVF ONLY + E is selected for VIEW MODE: Put your eye to the view nder or choose a di erent VIEW MODE option (P 14, 217). The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera properly (P 280). Input on the television is set to TV: Set input to HDMI

(P 280). The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-

vision to adjust the volume (P 280). Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected

(P 285). Check the option selected for CONNECTION MODE on the camera. Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE before connecting the USB cable (P 289). ON is selected for USB POWER SUPPLY SETTING. Se-

lect OFF when the camera is connected via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply power (P 243). Confi rm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure for connecting the camera varies with the type of connec-

tor with which the smartphone is equipped (P 290). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 320 Troubleshooting Wireless Transfer For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connec-

tions, visit:

https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/

Problem Problem Cannot connect to smartphone. The camera is slow to connect or upload pictures to the smartphone. Upload fails or is interrupted. Cannot upload images. Smartphone will not display pictures. Solution Solution The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer

(P 282). Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-

era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cord-

less phones (P 282). The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-

phone and camera can connect to only one device at a time. End the connection and try again (P 282). There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make connection di cult (P 282). The image was created on another device: The camera may not be able to upload images created on other devices. The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in formats they do not support. Select ON for GENERAL SETTINGS> RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE H. Selecting OFF increases up-

load times for larger images; in addition, some phones may not display images over a certain size (P 244). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 321 Troubleshooting Miscellaneous Problem Problem The camera is unresponsive. The camera does not func-

tion as expected. Motion in the viewfi nder or monitor appears jerky rather than smooth. No sound. Solution Solution Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the battery (P 30). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 33). The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the con-

nection. Remove and reinsert the battery (P 30). If the prob-

lem persists, contact your Fuji lm dealer. When NORMAL is selected for PERFORMANCE, the frame rate will drop if no operations are performed for a set period. The normal frame rate will be restored after you operate camera controls (P 235). Adjust the volume (P 215). OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON

(P 213). Pressing the Qbutton does not display the quick menu. TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 153). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 322 Warning Messages and Displays The following warnings appear in the display. Warning Warning i (red) j (blinks red) s (displayed in red with red focus frame) Aperture or shutter speed displayed in red FOCUS ERROR LENS CONTROL ERROR TURN OFF THE CAMERA AND TURN ON AGAIN CARD NOT INITIALIZED Description Description Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery. Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery. The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-

other subject at the same distance, then recompose the picture. The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be over- or under-exposed. Use the ash for additional light-

ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject. Camera malfunction. Turn the camera o , remove the lens, and check for foreign matter between the lens and the camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory card using D USER SETTING> FORMAT. The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-

tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 323 Warning Warning LENS ERROR CARD ERROR PROTECTED CARD BUSY b MEMORY FULL Description Description Turn the camera o , remove the lens, and check for for-

eign matter between the lens and the camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-

mat the card. The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-

sists, replace the card. Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera to format the card. The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded. Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 324 Warning Warning WRITE ERROR FRAME NO. FULL READ ERROR PROTECTED FRAME Warning Messages and Displays Description Description Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or turn the camera o and then on again. If the message persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:

Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card. The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:

Do not remove the memory card during recording. The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> FRAME NO.. Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO.. The fi le is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The le cannot be viewed. The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-

tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected pic-

ture. Remove protection and try again. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 325 Warning Messages and Displays Warning Warning CAN NOT CROP DPOF FILE ERROR Description Description The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera. Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-

ry card and create a second print order. The picture cannot be printed using DPOF. CAN NOT SET DPOF F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF. The selected picture cannot be rotated. CAN NOT ROTATE F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated. F CANNOT EXECUTE Red-eye removal cannot be applied to movies. Red-eye removal cannot be applied to pictures created with other devices. The movie mode selected with the camera is not compat-

ible with the device to which the camera is connected via HDMI. Try selecting a di erent movie mode (P 158). Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when this warning is displayed. Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool. While this warn-

ing is displayed, movie recording may not be available, mottling may increase, and performance, including frame advance rate and display quality, may drop. m CANNOT EXECUTE MISMATCH: 4K MODE AND EXTERNAL MONITOR CHANGE MOVIE MODE p (yellow) p (red) T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 326 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the recording time or number of pictures available at diff erent image sizes. All fi gures are approximate; fi le size varies with the scene recorded, pro-

ducing wide variations in the number of fi les that can be stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may not diminish at an even rate. Capacity Capacity 16GB 16GB 32GB 32GB TT OO 3 322 RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) RAW (COMPRESSED) RAW (COMPRESSED) 2160 VV2160 1080 WW1080 P P h h o o t t o o s s M M o o v v i i e e s s 1 1

, 2 2 FINEFINE 1030 NORMAL NORMAL 1540 FINEFINE 2060 NORMAL NORMAL 3090 270 500 690 20 minutes 20 minutes 550 1010 1400 40 minutes 40 minutes 1 Use a UHS speed class 3 card or better. 2 Assumes default bit rate. O If the memory card has a capacity of over 32GB, movies will be record-

ed in single fi les, regardless of size. If the card has a capacity of 32GB or less, movies over 4GB in size will be recorded uninterrupted across multiple fi les. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 327 Specifi cations System Model Product Number Eff ective pixels Image sensor Storage media Memory card slot File system File format FUJIFILM X-T30 II FF210005 Approx. 26.1 million 23.5 mm 15.6 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS sensor with primary color lter Fuji lm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards SD memory card slot (UHS-I compliant) Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF2.0), Exif 2.32, and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Still pictures: Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF2.0) JPEG: Compliant with Exif 2.32 and Digital Print Order For-

mat (DPOF) RAW (original RAF format; special purpose software required):

Uncompressed, or compressed using either a lossless or non-reversible algorithm; RAW+JPEG available O 11 (4160 4160) Movies: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 standard with stereo sound (MOV/

MP4) Audio (voice memos): Stereo sound (WAV) O 32 (6240 4160) O 169 (6240 3512) P 32 (4416 2944) P 169 (4416 2488) Q 32 (3120 2080) Q 169 (3120 1760) RAW (6240 4160) O panorama: vertical (2160 9600)/horizontal (9600 1440) P panorama: vertical (2160 6400)/horizontal (6400 1440) FUJIFILM X mount Q 11 (2080 2080) P 11 (2944 2944) Image size T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Lens mount 328 Specifi cations Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO160 12800 in increments of EV; AUTO; extended out-

put sensitivity equivalent to ISO 80, 100, 125, 25600, or 51200 Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO160 12800 in increments of EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-

alent to ISO 25600 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;

MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;

aperture-priority AE; manual exposure Exposure compensation Still pictures: 5EV +5EV in increments of EV System Sensitivity Metering Exposure control Shutter speed Movies: 2EV +2EV in increments of EV MECHANICAL SHUTTER Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 15min. to s Bulb: Max. 60min. ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 15min. to s Bulb: Fixed at 1s MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 15min. to s Bulb: Max. 60 min. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 329 System Continuous Focus White balance Self-timer Flash Flash mode Hot shoe Sync contact 330 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 CONTINUOUS MODE CONTINUOUS MODE 30fps(1.25X CROP) **

30fps(1.25X CROP) 20fps(1.25X CROP) **

20fps(1.25X CROP) 10fps(1.25X CROP) **

10fps(1.25X CROP) 20fps **

20fps 10fps **

10fps 8.0fps 8.0fps 5.0fps 5.0fps 4.0fps 4.0fps 3.0fps 3.0fps Available frame advance rates Available frame advance rates

(JPEG)

(JPEG) 30 20 10 20 10 8.0 5.0 4.0 3.0

* Available with electronic shutter only. O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-

ies with shooting conditions and type of memory card used. Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/

phase-detection AF) with AF-assist illuminator Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sun-

light, shade, daylight uorescent, warm white uorescent, cool white uorescent, incandescent, underwater O , 2 sec., 10 sec. Type: Manual pop-up ash unit Guide number: Approx. 7/22 (ISO200, m/ft.) MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.), MANUAL, COMMANDER, OFF SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (high-

speed sync) RED EYE REMOVAL: e FLASH+REMOVAL, L FLASH, d REMOVAL, OFF Accessory shoe with TTL contacts; supports sync speeds as fast as s X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as s Specifi cations System Sync terminal Electronic viewfi nder

(EVF) LCD monitor Movies

(with stereo sound) High-speed movies 0.39-in., 2360k-dot OLED view nder; magni cation 0.62 with 50mm lens (35mm format equivalent) at in nity and diopter set to 1.0 m1; diagonal angle of view approximately 31

(horizontal angle of view approximately 26) Diopter adjustment: 4 to +2m1 Eyepoint: Approximately 17.5mm 3.0-in/7.6cm, 1620k-dot color touch screen LCD monitor, tilting Movie size: V 169, d 179, W 169, W 179 Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P Bit rate: 200Mbps, 100Mbps, 50Mbps Recording/output format: SD card, 420, 8-bit/HDMI output, 422, 10-bit Movie size: FULL HD 169 Frame advance rate: 240P, 200P, 120P, 100P Input/output terminals Microphone connector 2.5 mm mini-stereo jack Headphone jack socket Requires a USB Type-C to 3.5mm stereo mini-pin jack adapter cable compatible with analog audio I/O (USB Type-C Audio Adapter Accessory Mode) Remote release connector 2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.2 Gen1x1 HDMI output HDMI Micro connector (type D) T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 331 NP-W126S rechargeable battery (supplied with camera) Battery type: NP-W126S Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R External fl ash units: Disabled Shooting mode: Mode P PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE BOOST NORMAL Number of shots Number of shots LCDLCD Approx. 260 Approx. 325 EVFEVF Approx. 235 Approx. 300 Total length of footage that can be recorded on Total length of footage that can be recorded on a single charge a single charge ModeMode V11 W22 High-speed movies33 Actual battery life Actual battery life of movie capture of movie capture Approx. 40minutes Approx. 40minutes Approx. 40minutes Continuance Continuance battery life of battery life of movie capture movie capture Approx. 55minutes Approx. 65minutes 1 At a frame rate of 29.97fps. 2 At a frame rate of 59.94fps. 3 At a frame rate of 120fps. CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera and SD memory card. Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and the gures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-

ance will decline at low temperatures. Power supply/other Power supply Battery life T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 332 Specifi cations Power supply/other Camera size

(W H D) Camera weight 118.4mm 82.8mm 46.8mm (31.9mm excluding projections, measured at thinnest part)/4.96 in. 3.35 in. 2.57 in. (1.30 in.) Approx. 329 g/11.6 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and memory card Approx. 378 g/13.3 oz., including battery and memory card Shooting weight Operating conditions Temperature: 0 C to +40 C/+32 F to +104 F Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation) Wireless transmitter Wireless LAN Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) Access protocols Bluetooth Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) IEEE 802.11b/g/n (standard wireless protocol) 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels) Infrastructure Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) 2,402 MHz2,480 MHz T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 333 Specifi cations 7.2V 1260mAh 0C to +40C/+32F to +104F NP-W126S rechargeable battery Nominal voltage Nominal capacity Operating temperature Dimensions

(W H D) Weight Approx. 47g/1.7oz. 36.4mm 47.1mm 15.7mm/1.4in. 1.9in. 0.6in. N Weight and dimensions vary with the country or region of sale. O Specifi cations and performance are subject to change without notice. Fujifi lm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain. The appearance of the product may diff er from that described in this manual. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 334 MEMO 335 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN https://fujifilm-x.com

 

 

Owners Manual BL0000XXXX-Z00 EN Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be read by all who use the product. For the Latest Information For the latest information on this product, including the latest ver-

sions of the manuals and sample color photographs, visit:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/manuals/

The site can be accessed not only from your computer but also from smartphones and tablets. For information on fi rmware updates, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software/

2 About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM GFX 100S digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual:

O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. N Additional information that may be helpful when using the product. P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplifi ed, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as memory cards. The electronic viewfi nder may be referred to as the EVF and the LCD monitor as the LCD. The Serial Number Plate Do not remove the serial number plate, which provides the FCC ID, KC mark, CMIIT ID, serial number, and other important information. 3 Inserting the Battery Insert the battery in the camera as described below. 1 Open the battery-chamber cover. Slide the battery-chamber latch as shown and open the battery-cham-

ber cover. O Do not open the battery-chamber cover when the camera is on. Fail-

ure to observe this precaution could damage image fi les or memory cards. Do not use excessive force when handling the battery-chamber cover. 2 Insert the battery as shown. O Insert the battery in the orientation shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. Confi rm that the battery is securely latched. 4 Inserting the Battery 3 Close the battery-chamber cover. Close and latch the cover. O If the cover does not close, check that the battery is in the correct orienta-

tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-

er shut. Removing the Battery Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-cham-

ber cover. To remove the battery, press the battery latch to the side, and slide the battery out of the camera as shown. O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery. 5 Charging the Battery The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use. O An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera. Turn the camera off for charging. The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface. Leave the computer on during charging. O The battery will not charge while the camera is on. Connect the supplied USB cable. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable. Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-

puter, computer settings, and the computers current state. The battery takes about 5 hours to charge with a charging input of 5 V/500 mA. To charge the battery from a household AC power outlet, use a BC-W235 battery charger (available separately). 6 Charging the Battery Charge Status The indicator lamp shows battery charge status as follows:

Indicator lamp Indicator lamp On O Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery charging Charging complete Battery fault O Do not affi x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from the camera. Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat. Read the cautions in The Battery and Power Supply. Use only genuine Fujifi lm rechargeable batteries designated for use in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-

uct malfunction. Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel the outer casing. The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its charging life and must be replaced. Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging. Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures. N If the camera is turned on during charging, charging will end and the USB connection will instead be used to power the camera. The battery level will begin to gradually decline. The camera will display an external power source icon when pow-

ered via USB. 7 Inserting Memory Cards Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately). N The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots. 1 Open the memory card slot cover. Unlatch and open the cover. O Do not open the memory card-slot cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could damage image fi les or memory cards. 2 Insert the memory card. Holding the card in the orientation shown, slide it in until it clicks into place at the back of the slot. Close and latch the memory card slot cover. O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle or use force. 3 Format the memory card. O Format memory cards before fi rst use, and be sure to reformat all memory cards after using them in a computer or other device. 8 Removing Memory Cards Before removing memory cards, turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover. Inserting Memory Cards Press and release the card to eject it part way (to prevent the card falling from the slot, press the center of the card and release it slowly, without removing your fi nger from the card). The card can then be removed by hand. 9 Using Two Cards The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the second slot only when the card in the fi rst slot is full. This can be changed using D SAVE DATA SETTING> CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE). Option Option Description Description Display Display SEQUENTIAL

(default) BACKUP RAW/JPEG The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the rst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE DATA SETTING > SWITCH SLOT (SEQUENTIAL), re-

cording will start on the card in the second slot and switch to the rst slot when the card in the second slot is full. Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card. As for SEQUENTIAL, except that the RAW copy of pictures taken with FINE + RAW or NORMAL + RAW selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE QUALITY will be saved to the card in the rst slot and the JPEG copy to the card in the second slot. The card used to store movies can be selected using D SAVE DATA SETTING> MOVIE FILE DESTINATION. Compatible Memory Cards FUJIFILM and SanDisk SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards have been approved for use in the camera; UHS-II cards can be used in both slots, while cards with a UHS speed class of 3 or better are recommended for movies. A complete list of approved memory cards is available at http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/

compatibility/. Operation is not guaranteed with other cards. The camera can not be used with xD-Picture Cards or MultiMediaCard

(MMC) devices. 10 Inserting Memory Cards O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. Memory cards can be locked, making it impossi-

ble to format the card or to record or delete im-

ages. Before inserting a memory card, slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. Format memory cards before fi rst use, and be sure to reformat all mem-

ory cards after using them in a computer or other device. Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance immediately. miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-

era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove the card. Do not affi x labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels can cause camera malfunction. Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card. Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which pic-

tures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device to edit, delete, or rename image fi les. Always use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming fi les, copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the originals. Renam-

ing the fi les on the camera can cause problems during playback. 11 Turning the Camera On and Off Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off . Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera on, or to OFF to turn the camera off . O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfi nder can aff ect pic-

tures or the view through the viewfi nder. Keep the lens and viewfi nder clean. N Press the a button to start playback. Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT> AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automat-

ically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF switch to OFF and then back to ON. 12 Checking the Battery Level After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the display. Battery level is shown as follows:

Description Description Indicator Indicator e Battery partially discharged. f Battery about 80% full. g Battery about 60% full. h Battery about 40% full. i Battery about 20% full. i

(red) j Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.

(blinks red) Battery exhausted. Turn camera o and recharge battery. 13 Basic Setup A language-selection dialog is displayed the fi rst time the camera is turned on. 1 Turn the camera on. A language-selection dialog will be dis-

played. 2 Choose a language. Highlight a language and press MENU/OK. 3 Pair the camera with the smartphone or tablet. Press MENU/OK to pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet running the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. N To skip pairing, press DISP/BACK. PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIR WITH SMARTPHONE?

IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED TO SMARTPHONE BY PAIRING SCAN QR CODE OR SEARCH FOR "FUJIFILM Camera Remote" APP ON THE WEB SET SKIP HELP 4 Check the time. When pairing is complete, you will be prompt-

ed to set the camera clock to the time report-

ed by the smartphone or tablet. Check that the time is correct. PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIRING COMPLETE 1/ 1/2018 12:00 PM SET DATE/TIME FROM SMARTPHONE?

SET CANCEL N To set the clock manually, press DISP/BACK. 14 Basic Setup SET 5 Synchronize the camera settings with the set-

tings con gured on your smartphone or tab-

let. SMARTPHONE SYNC. SETTING LOCATION&TIME LOCATION TIME OFF N The option selected can be changed at any time using D CONNECTION SETTINGS> Bluetooth SETTINGS. 6 Set the clock. Press MENU/OK to set the camera clock to the time reported by the smartphone or tablet and exit to shooting mode. N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the camera is turned on. Skipping the Current Step Press DISP/BACK to skip the current step. A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played; select NO to avoid repeating any steps you skipped the next time the camera is turned on. 15 Basic Setup Choosing a Diff erent Language To change the language:

1 Display language options. Select D USER SETTING> a. 2 Choose a language. Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Changing the Time and Date To set the camera clock:

1 Display DATE/TIME options. Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME. 2 Set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock. REGULATORY To view electronic copies of the product model number, CMIIT ID, and other certifi cates, select D USER SETTING> REGULATORY in the setup menu. 16 Taking Photographs (Mode P) This section describes how to take pictures using program AE (mode P). 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL. 2 Adjust settings for program AE. A Mode dial B Aperture C Focus mode Setting Setting P (Program) A (auto) S (single AF) 3 Check the shooting mode. Confi rm that P appears in the display.

17 4 Ready the camera. Hold the camera steady with both hands and brace your elbows against your sides. Shaking or un-

steady hands can blur your shots. To prevent pictures that are out of focus or too dark (underexposed), keep your fi ngers and other objects away from the lens and AF-assist illuminator. 5 Frame the picture. Lenses with Zoom Rings Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom out, right to zoom in. 18 Taking Photographs (Mode P) 6 Focus. Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

Focus indicator Focus frame If the camera is able to focus, it will beep twice and focus frame and focus indicator will glow green. If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white. N If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus operation. Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock). The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro and standard focus ranges. 7 Shoot. Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture. 19 a Viewing Pictures Pictures can be viewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor. To view pictures full frame, press a button. 100-0001 Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick

(focus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame. N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (gift image) icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback zoom may not be available. Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY BACK MENU> SWITCH SLOT option. 20 b Deleting Pictures Use the b button to delete pictures. O Deleted pictures can not be recovered. Copy important pictures to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. 1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and se-

lect FRAME. ERASE FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confi rmation dialog is not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures. N Protected pictures can not be deleted. Remove protection from any pictures you wish to delete. Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK MENU> ERASE option. 21 F Recording Movies This section describes how to fi lm movies in auto mode. 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to MOVIE. 2 Adjust settings for program AE. A Mode dial B Aperture C Focus mode Setting Setting P (Program) A (auto) C (continuous AF) 22 Recording Movies 3 Press the shutter button to start re-

cording. A recording indicator (V) and the time remaining are displayed while recording is in progress. 4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends auto-

matically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. 12800 Using an External Microphone Sound can be recorded with external micro-

phones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in di-

ameter; microphones that require plug-in pow-

er cannot be used. See the microphone manual for details. O Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording. Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds made by the camera during recording. Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 23 a Viewing Movies View movies on the camera. In full-frame playback, movies are identi-

fi ed by a W icon. Press the selector down to start movie playback. 01/01/2018 10:00 AM The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed:

PLAYPLAY

+1.0 12800 Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever)

(focus lever) Up Down Full-frame playback Full-frame playback Playback in Playback in progress (

progress (xx)) Playback Playback paused (

paused (yy)) End playback Start playback Pause playback Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed Start/resume playback Single frame rewind/

advance 29m59s Progress is shown in the display during playback. O Do not cover the speaker during playback. N Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the selector up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. STOP PAUSE 24 Flash Photography Use the optional shoe-mounted fl ash unit for additional lighting at night or indoors under low light. 1 Remove the hot shoe cover and slide the fl ash onto the hot shoe as shown, stopping when it clicks into place. 2 Raise the fl ash. 3 Select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING in the F FLASH SETTING menu. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT O If the fl ash is not raised, settings will be adjusted for units con-

nected via the sync terminal. N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts. 4 Highlight items using the selector and rotate the rear command dial to change the highlighted setting. MODE SUPPLIED FLASH ADJUST END 25 5 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into eff ect. O Depending on the distance to the subject, some lenses may cast shadows in photos taken with the fl ash. The fl ash will not fi re at some settings, for example in panorama mode or when the electronic shutter is used. Choose shutter speeds slower than 250X when using the fl ash in ex-

posure mode S (shutter-priority AE) or manual (M). N In TTL mode, the fl ash may fi re several times with each shot. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete. 26 Flash Settings The following options are available with op-

tional shoe-mounted fl ash units. MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH Flash Photography Setting Setting Description Description ADJUST END A Flash control mode B Flash compen-

sation/output C Flash mode

(TTL) The ash control mode selected with the ash unit. This can in some cas-

es be adjusted from the camera; the options available vary with the ash. TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ash compensation (B). M: The ash res at the selected output regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be ad-

justed from the camera (B). MULTI: Repeating ash. The ash res multiple times with each shot. OFF: The ash does not re. Some ash units can be turned o from the camera. The options available vary with ash control mode. TTL: Adjust ash compensation (the full value may not be applied if the limits of the ash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF-X500, EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the ash unit. M/MULTI: Adjust ash output (compatible units only). Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power, from (mode M) or

(MULTI) down to in increments equivalent to EV. The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the ash control system; take a test shot and check the results. Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control:

FLASH AUTO: The ash res only as required; ash level is adjusted accord-

ing to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. STANDARD: The ash res with every shot if possible; ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. SLOW SYNC.: Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when pho-

tographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. 27 Setting Setting Description Description D Sync E Zoom F Lighting Control ash timing. 1ST CURTAIN: The ash res immediately after the shutter opens

(generally the best choice). 2ND CURTAIN: The ash res immediately before the shutter closes. AUTO FP(HSS): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for ash control mode. The angle of illumination ( ash coverage) for units that support ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the cam-

era. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

FLASH POWER PRIORITY: Gain range by slightly reducing coverage. STANDARD: Match coverage to picture angle. EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY: Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. G LED light Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography

(compatible units only): as a catchlight (CATCHLIGHT), as an AF-assist illuminator (AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-ASSIST il-

luminator (AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT). Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography. Choose the number of times the ash res each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. H Frequency *

Choose the frequency at which the ash res in MULTI mode.

* Full value may not be applied if limits of ash control system are exceeded. G Number of fl ashes *

28 For Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read Instructions Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. Retain Instructions Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the oper-

ating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions Follow Instructions: All operating and use instructions should be followed. Installation Installation Power Sources: This video product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For vid-

eo products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will t into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to t, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (ground-

ing) pin. This plug will only t into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of re or electric shock. Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been adhered to. This video product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-

terfor example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Antennas Antennas Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable sys-

tem is connected to the video product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides in-

formation with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an an-

tenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Ground Clamp AAntenna Lead in Wire AAAntenna An Discharge Unit D

(NEC SECTION N 810-20) 8 Grounding Conductors (NEC SECTION 810-21) t Electric Service Equipment e Equipment Ground Clamps Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC ART 250. PART H) Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. 29 UseUse Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into this video product through openings as they may touch danger-

ous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the video product. Lightning: For added protection for this video product receiv-

er during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and power-line surges. Service Service Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali ed service personnel. Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to quali ed service personnel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the video product. If the video product has been exposed to rain or water. If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. If the video product does not operate normally follow the op-

erating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are cov-

ered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali ed technician to restore the video product to its normal operation. When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-

i ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to this video product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the video product is in proper op-

erating condition. Be sure to read these notes before use Safety Notes Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these safety notes and your Owners Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the infor-

mation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. Unplug from power socket WARNING WARNING CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that death or serious in-

jury can result if the information is ignored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). Do not use in the bathroom or shower Do not disassemble The symbols on the product (including the accesories) repre-

sent the following:

Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.) WARNING WARNING If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the bat-

If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the bat-

tery, and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. tery, and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Continued use of the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

era.era. If water or foreign objects get inside the cam-

era, turn the camera o , remove the battery, and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Con-

tinued use of the camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This can cause a re or electric shock. Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. AC DC 30 Do not touch internal parts WARNING WARNING Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord. tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and cause a re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause injury. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not use the camera while walking or driving. This can result in you falling down or being involved in a tra c accident. Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a thunderstorm. thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due to induced current from the lightning discharge. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Load the battery as shown by the indicator. Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Fail-

ure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking, causing re, burns, or other injury. Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the power supply voltage shown. power supply voltage shown. The use of other power sources can cause a re. If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean water and seek medical attention or call an emergency water and seek medical attention or call an emergency number right away. number right away. Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than those specifi ed here. those specifi ed here. The supplied charger is for use only with batteries of the type supplied with the camera. Using the charger to charge conventional batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst. Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual impairment. impairment. Take particular care when photograph-

ing infants and young children. Flash Photography WARNING WARNING Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly at high ambient temperatures or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the product for prolonged periods while the product is on. product for prolonged periods while the product is on. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-

longed use, at high ambient temperatures, or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

sive gases, or dust. sive gases, or dust. When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the battery terminals with insulation tape. battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with other metallic objects or batteries could cause the battery to ignite or burst. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out of the reach of small children. of the reach of small children. Children may swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical attention or call emergency. Keep out of reach of small children. Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-

ments that could cause injury are the strap, which could become entangled about a childs neck, caus-

ing strangulation, and the ash, which could cause visual impairment. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. This product generates radio-frequency emissions that could interfere with navigational or medical equipment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, steam, humidity or dust. steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a re or elec-

tric shock. Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely high temperatures. high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-

tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight. This can cause a re. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause injury. Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still connected. connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to dis-

connect the AC power adapter. This can damage the power cord or cables and cause a re or electric shock. Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build up and distort the casing or cause a re. 31 CAUTION CAUTION Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t securely into the outlet. securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precau-

tion could result in re or electric shock. When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Failure to do so can cause a re or electric shock. When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power socket. socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the power socket can cause a re. CAUTION CAUTION When a memory card is removed, the card could come When a memory card is removed, the card could come out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. gently release the card. Injury could result to those struck by the ejected card. Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your camera. camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer to request internal cleaning every two years. Please note that this service is not free of charge. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. The Battery and Power Supply Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read the appropriate sections. WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, re or the like. The following describes the proper use of batteries and how to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or cause leakage, overheating, re, or explosion. Li-ion Batteries Li-ion Batteries Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery be-

fore use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. Notes on the Battery Notes on the Battery The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. Battery life can be extended by turning the camera o when not in use. Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating devices. Charging the Battery Charging the Battery Charge the battery in the supplied battery charger. Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below +10 C

(+50 F) or above +35 C (+95 F). Do not attempt to charge the battery at temperatures above +40 C (+104 F); at temperatures below +5 C (+41 F), the battery will not charge. Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery does not however need to be fully discharged before charging. The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after charging or use. This is normal. Battery Life Battery Life At normal temperatures, the battery can be recharged about 300 times. A noticeable decrease in the length of time the bat-

tery will hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced. 32 Storage Storage Performance may be impaired if the battery is left unused for extended periods when fully charged. Run the battery at be-

fore storing it. If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient tempera-

ture of from +15 C to +25 C (+59 F to +77 F). Do not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature. Cautions: Handling the Battery Cautions: Handling the Battery Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-

laces or hairpins. Do not expose to ame or heat. Do not disassemble or modify. Use with designated chargers only. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks. Do not expose to water. Keep the terminals clean. The battery and camera body may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal. Caution: Disposal Disposal Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate. AC Power Adapters AC Power Adapters Use only Fuji lm AC power adapters designated for use with this camera. Other adapters could damage the camera. The AC power adapter is for indoor use only. Be sure the DC plug is securely connected to the camera. Turn the camera o before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-

connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable. Do not use with other devices. Do not disassemble. Do not expose to high heat and humidity. Do not subject to strong physical shocks. The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during use. This is normal. If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. For Your Safety Using the Camera Trademark Information Trademark Information Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. xD-Picture Card and E are trademarks of FUJIFILM Corporation. The type-

faces included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiwan Inc. Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Fuji lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. The HDMI logo is a trade-

mark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Electrical Interference Electrical Interference This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equipment. Consult with hospital or airline sta before using the camera in a hospital or on an aircraft. Color Television Systems Color Television Systems NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-

vision telecasting speci cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A., Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color television system adopted mainly in European countries and China. Exif Print (Exif Version 2.3) Exif Print (Exif Version 2.3) Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera le format in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction during printing. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-

ware without the permission of the applicable governing bodies is prohibited. Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this precau-

tion could damage the camera image sensor. Strong sunlight focused through the view nder may damage the panel of electronic view nder (EVF). Do not aim the elec-

tronic view nder at the sun. Take Test Shots Take Test Shots Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is func-

tioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept liabil-

ity for damages or lost pro ts incurred as a result of product malfunction. Notes on Copyright Notes on Copyright Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded us-

ing your digital camera system cannot be used in ways that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the owner. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. Handling Handling To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are be-

ing recorded. Liquid Crystal Liquid Crystal In the event that the display is damaged, care should be taken to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action indi-

cated should any of the following situations arise:

If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and run-

ning water. If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ush the a ected eye with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vomit-

ing, then seek medical assistance. Although the display is manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and images recorded with the product are una ected. 33 NOTICES To prevent re or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Please read the Safety Notes and make sure you understand them before using the camera. Perchlorate Materialspecial handling may apply. See:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate For Customers in the U. S. A. For Customers in the U. S. A. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Contains IC: 10293A-WMBNBM26A Contains FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential instal-

lation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep-

tion, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di erent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modi cations not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the govern-

ments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci c Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are con-

ducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certi ed power level in all tested frequency bands. 34 Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this product must be used with a Fuji lm-speci ed ferrite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord. A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. California Code of Regulations, Title20, Division2, Chapter4, Article4, Appliance E ciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through 1609 For Customers in Canada For Customers in Canada CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause in-

terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or oper-

ating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, ex-

cept tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scienti c evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency en-

ergy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health e ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating e ects causes no known adverse health e ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological e ects. Some studies have suggested that some biological e ects might occur, but such ndings have not been con rmed by ad-

ditional research. X-Pro3 has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liech-

tenstein: This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its packag-

ing indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences to the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inap-

propriate waste handling of this product. This symbol on the batteries or accumulators in-

dicates that those batteries shall not be treated as household waste. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-

mulators please dispose these separately according to your local requirements. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resourc-

es. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city o ce, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local authorities and ask for the correct way of disposal. In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates that they are to be disposed of separately. For Your Safety 35 Be sure to read these notes before using the lens For Your Safety Safety Notes Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety notes and the camera Owners Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the infor-

mation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING WARNING CAUTION CAUTION This icon indicates that death or serious in-

jury can result if the information is ignored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Do not immerse Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). WARNING WARNING Do not immerse in or expose to water. Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution can cause a re or electric shock. Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re, electric shock, or injury due to product malfunction. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not place on unstable surfaces. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may fall, causing injury. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

fi nders. fi nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause permanent visual impairment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re. Keep out of the reach of small children. Keep out of the reach of small children. This product could cause injury in the hands of a child. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution can cause electric shock. Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit sub-

Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit sub-

jects. jects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame can cause re or burns. When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and store out of direct sunlight. store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the lens can cause re or burns. Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached to a tripod. to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-

jects, causing injury. 37 Wireless transmitter Wireless transmitter Wireless transmitter Wireless LAN Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) Access protocols Bluetooth Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) IEEE 802.11b/g/n (standard wireless protocol) 2,412 MHz2,462 MHz (11 channels) Infrastructure Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) 2,402 MHz2,480 MHz 38 MEMO 39 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN http://www.fujifilm.com/products/digital_cameras/index.html

 

 

Owners Manual BL00005003-200 EN Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents be-

fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be read by all who use the product. For the Latest Information The latest versions of the manuals are available from:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The site can be accessed not only from your computer but also from smartphones and tablets. It also contains information on the software license. For information on fi rmware updates, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software/

ii P Chapter Index Menu List 1 Before You Begin 2 First Steps 3 Basic Photography and Playback 4 Movie Recording and Playback 5 Taking Photographs 6 The Shooting Menus 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 8 The Setup Menus 9 Shortcuts 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 Connections 12 Technical Notes iv 1 25 41 47 53 97 161 185 221 233 249 261 iii Menu List Camera menu options are listed below. Shooting Menus Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies. N See page 97 for details. H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING G AF/MF SETTING M e n u L i s t IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION LONG EXPOSURE NR LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER COLOR SPACE PIXEL MAPPING SELECT CUSTOM SETTING EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING P 98 99 99 100 101 101 101 102 104 105 106 106 106 106 107 107 107 107 108 108 109 1313 2323 P FOCUS AREA 110 AF MODE 111 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 112 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 115 AF POINT DISPLAY yz 115 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 116 PRE-AF 116 AF ILLUMINATOR 116 FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 117 AF+MF 119 MF ASSIST 120 FOCUS CHECK 120 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 121 INSTANT AF SETTING 121 DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 122 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 122 123 3333 TOUCH SCREEN MODE 1313 2323 3333 iv A SHOOTING SETTING SCENE POSITION DRIVE SETTING SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT sJ SELF-TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION IS MODE ISO MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 1212 2222 F FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING P 126 127 130 130 131 132 133 134 135 135 136 138 140 P 141 141 142 142 143 143 M e n u L i s t Menu List B MOVIE SETTING P MOVIE MODE 144 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC 145 F FILM SIMULATION 146 F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) 146 F WHITE BALANCE 147 F DYNAMIC RANGE 147 F HIGHLIGHT TONE 148 F SHADOW TONE 148 F COLOR 148 F SHARPNESS 149 F NOISE REDUCTION 149 V INTERFRAME NR 149 F-Log RECORDING 149 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 150 F FOCUS AREA 150 MOVIE AF MODE 150 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING 151 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 152 F MF ASSIST 152 F FOCUS CHECK 153 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY 153 4K MOVIE OUTPUT 154 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT 154 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY 155 HDMI REC CONTROL 155 ZEBRA SETTING 155 ZEBRA LEVEL 155 AUDIO SETTING 156 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE 158 TIME CODE SETTING 158 TALLY LIGHT 160 MOVIE SILENT CONTROL 160 1144 2244 3344 4444 v C PLAY BACK MENU 2222 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SLIDE SHOW PHOTOBOOK ASSIST PC AUTO SAVE PRINT ORDER (DPOF) instax PRINTER PRINT DISP ASPECT P 178 179 179 180 181 182 183 184 The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. N See page 167 for details. C PLAY BACK MENU RAW CONVERSION ERASE CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING 1122 M e n u L i s t P 167 170 172 173 174 175 176 177 vi Setup Menus Adjust basic camera settings. N See page 185 for details. D USER SETTING P FORMAT 186 DATE/TIME 187 TIME DIFFERENCE 187 Qa 188 MY MENU SETTING 188 SENSOR CLEANING 189 SOUND & FLASH 189 RESET 189 D SOUND SETTING P AF BEEP VOL. 190 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 190 OPERATION VOL. 190 SHUTTER VOLUME 191 SHUTTER SOUND 191 PLAYBACK VOLUME 191 Menu List M e n u L i s t 1313 D SCREEN SETTING P EVF BRIGHTNESS 192 EVF COLOR 192 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 192 LCD BRIGHTNESS 193 LCD COLOR 193 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 193 IMAGE DISP. 194 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 194 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 195 NATURAL LIVE VIEW 195 FRAMING GUIDELINE 196 AUTOROTATE PB 196 FOCUS SCALE UNITS 197 APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS 197 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 198 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 199 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 200 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 201 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 201 2323 3333 vii M e n u L i s t 1122 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT CARD FOCUS RING FOCUS RING OPERATION AE/AF-LOCK MODE AWB-LOCK MODE APERTURE RING SETTING (A) APERTURE SETTING TOUCH SCREEN SETTING D POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE 2222 Menu List D SAVE DATA SETTING P FRAME NO. 213 SAVE ORG IMAGE 214 EDIT FILE NAME 214 SELECT FOLDER 214 COPYRIGHT INFO 215 D CONNECTION SETTING P Bluetooth SETTINGS 216 PC AUTO SAVE 217 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING 218 PC CONNECTION MODE 218 GENERAL SETTINGS 219 INFORMATION 219 RESET WIRELESS SETTING 219 P 202 203 204 207 208 208 208 209 209 209 209 210 210 210 211 P 212 212 viii P Table of Contents Introduction ........................................................................................................... ii For the Latest Information ............................................................................................ ii Menu List................................................................................................................iv Shooting Menus ................................................................................................................iv The Playback Menu .........................................................................................................vi Setup Menus .......................................................................................................................vii Supplied Accessories .......................................................................................xix About This Manual .............................................................................................xx Symbols and Conventions .........................................................................................xx Terminology ........................................................................................................................xx 1 Before You Begin Before You Begin 1 1 Parts of the Camera .............................................................................................2 The Serial Number Plate ................................................................................................4 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) .....................................................................................4 The Shutter Speed Dial...................................................................................................5 The Drive Dial .......................................................................................................................5 The Exposure Compensation Dial ...........................................................................5 The Auto Mode Selector Lever ..................................................................................6 The Command Dials ........................................................................................................7 The Indicator Lamp ..........................................................................................................8 Focusing the Viewfi nder ................................................................................................9 The LCD Monitor ................................................................................................................9 Camera Displays .................................................................................................10 The Electronic Viewfi nder ..........................................................................................10 The LCD Monitor .............................................................................................................12 Choosing a Display Mode .........................................................................................14 Adjusting Display Brightness ...................................................................................15 Display Rotation ...............................................................................................................15 The DISP/BACK Button ................................................................................................16 Customizing the Standard Display ......................................................................17 Using the Menus ................................................................................................20 Touch Screen Mode ...........................................................................................21 Shooting Touch Controls ...........................................................................................21 Playback Touch Controls ............................................................................................24 ix 2 First Steps First Steps 25 25 Attaching the Strap ...........................................................................................26 Attaching a Lens .................................................................................................28 Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card ................................................29 Compatible Memory Cards ......................................................................................32 Charging the Battery ........................................................................................33 Turning the Camera On and Off ...................................................................36 Checking the Battery Level.............................................................................37 Basic Setup ...........................................................................................................38 Choosing a Diff erent Language.............................................................................40 Changing the Time and Date ..................................................................................40 3 Basic Photography and Playback Basic Photography and Playback 41 41 Taking Photographs (Mode P) .......................................................................42 Viewing Pictures .................................................................................................45 Deleting Pictures ................................................................................................46 4 Movie Recording and Playback Movie Recording and Playback 47 47 Recording Movies ..............................................................................................48 Adjusting Movie Settings ...........................................................................................50 Viewing Movies ...................................................................................................51 5 Taking Photographs Taking Photographs 53 53 Choosing a Shooting Mode ...........................................................................54 Mode P: Program AE .....................................................................................................54 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE ......................................................................................56 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ..................................................................................59 Mode M: Manual Exposure .......................................................................................60 Auto Mode ..........................................................................................................................61 Autofocus ..............................................................................................................64 Focus Mode ........................................................................................................................65 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ................................................................................67 Focus-Point Selection...................................................................................................69 Manual Focus.......................................................................................................73 Checking Focus ................................................................................................................75 x Table of Contents Exposure Compensation .................................................................................77 C (Custom) ..........................................................................................................................77 Focus/Exposure Lock ........................................................................................78 The AF-L and AE-L Buttons .......................................................................................79 Bracketing .............................................................................................................80 O AE BKT .............................................................................................................................81 W ISO BKT ..........................................................................................................................81 X FILM SIMULATION BKT ........................................................................................81 V WHITE BALANCE BKT ............................................................................................81 Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ..........................................................................................82 Z FOCUS BKT .................................................................................................................82 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) ............................................................83 Multiple Exposures ............................................................................................85 Advanced Filters .................................................................................................87 Advanced Filter Options .............................................................................................88 Panoramas ............................................................................................................89 Flash Photography.............................................................................................92 Flash Settings ....................................................................................................................94 6 The Shooting Menus The Shooting Menus 97 97 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING ................................................................................98 IMAGE SIZE ..........................................................................................................................98 IMAGE QUALITY ...............................................................................................................99 RAW RECORDING ............................................................................................................99 FILM SIMULATION ........................................................................................................ 100 B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) ............................................................................. 101 GRAIN EFFECT ................................................................................................................ 101 COLOR CHROME EFFECT......................................................................................... 101 WHITE BALANCE ........................................................................................................... 102 DYNAMIC RANGE ......................................................................................................... 104 D RANGE PRIORITY ...................................................................................................... 105 HIGHLIGHT TONE ......................................................................................................... 106 SHADOW TONE ............................................................................................................. 106 COLOR ................................................................................................................................. 106 SHARPNESS ...................................................................................................................... 106 xi NOISE REDUCTION ...................................................................................................... 107 LONG EXPOSURE NR .................................................................................................. 107 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ......................................................................... 107 COLOR SPACE ................................................................................................................. 107 PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................................. 108 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................................................... 108 EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................... 109 AF/MF SETTING ................................................................................................ 110 FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................... 110 AF MODE ........................................................................................................................... 111 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ......................................................................................... 112 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................... 115 AF POINT DISPLAY yz ........................................................................................ 115 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS ................................................................................. 116 PRE-AF ................................................................................................................................. 116 AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................................... 116 FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 117 AF+MF ................................................................................................................................ 119 MF ASSIST ......................................................................................................................... 120 FOCUS CHECK ................................................................................................................ 120 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA................................................................ 121 INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................................. 121 DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE ........................................................................................... 122 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ..................................................................................... 122 TOUCH SCREEN MODE ............................................................................................. 123 SHOOTING SETTING ....................................................................................... 126 SCENE POSITION ........................................................................................................... 126 DRIVE SETTING ............................................................................................................... 127 SPORTS FINDER MODE ............................................................................................. 130 PRE-SHOT sJ ............................................................................................................ 130 SELF-TIMER ....................................................................................................................... 131 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING .................................................................................. 132 PHOTOMETRY ................................................................................................................. 133 SHUTTER TYPE ............................................................................................................... 134 FLICKER REDUCTION .................................................................................................. 135 IS MODE ............................................................................................................................. 135 ISO ......................................................................................................................................... 136 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n xii 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING ................................................................................... 138 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 140 FLASH SETTING ................................................................................................ 141 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................... 141 RED EYE REMOVAL ...................................................................................................... 141 TTL-LOCK MODE ........................................................................................................... 142 LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................... 142 MASTER SETTING ......................................................................................................... 143 CH SETTING ..................................................................................................................... 143 MOVIE SETTING ............................................................................................... 144 MOVIE MODE .................................................................................................................. 144 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC ...................................................................................... 145 F FILM SIMULATION ................................................................................................. 146 F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) ...................................................................... 146 F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................... 147 F DYNAMIC RANGE .................................................................................................. 147 F HIGHLIGHT TONE .................................................................................................. 148 F SHADOW TONE ...................................................................................................... 148 F COLOR ......................................................................................................................... 148 F SHARPNESS .............................................................................................................. 149 F NOISE REDUCTION .............................................................................................. 149 V INTERFRAME NR ................................................................................................... 149 F-Log RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 149 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................... 150 F FOCUS AREA ............................................................................................................ 150 MOVIE AF MODE .......................................................................................................... 150 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................... 151 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 152 F MF ASSIST .................................................................................................................. 152 F FOCUS CHECK ......................................................................................................... 153 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY............................................................................... 153 4K MOVIE OUTPUT ...................................................................................................... 154 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT ........................................................................................ 154 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY ................................................................................. 155 HDMI REC CONTROL .................................................................................................. 155 ZEBRA SETTING ............................................................................................................. 155 ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................... 155 xiii 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n AUDIO SETTING ............................................................................................................ 156 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE .............................................................................................. 158 TIME CODE SETTING .................................................................................................. 158 TALLY LIGHT ..................................................................................................................... 160 MOVIE SILENT CONTROL ......................................................................................... 160 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 161 Playback and the Playback Menu 161 The Playback Display ..................................................................................... 162 The DISP/BACK Button ............................................................................................. 163 Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................. 165 Playback Zoom .............................................................................................................. 166 Multi-Frame Playback ................................................................................................ 166 The Playback Menu ........................................................................................ 167 RAW CONVERSION ...................................................................................................... 167 ERASE ................................................................................................................................... 170 CROP .................................................................................................................................... 172 RESIZE .................................................................................................................................. 173 PROTECT ............................................................................................................................ 174 IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................... 175 RED EYE REMOVAL ...................................................................................................... 176 VOICE MEMO SETTING ............................................................................................. 177 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER ........................................................................................ 178 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 179 SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................... 179 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST .................................................................................................. 180 PC AUTO SAVE ................................................................................................................ 181 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ................................................................................................. 182 instax PRINTER PRINT ................................................................................................. 183 DISP ASPECT ................................................................................................................... 184 8 The Setup Menus The Setup Menus 185 185 USER SETTING .................................................................................................. 186 FORMAT ............................................................................................................................. 186 DATE/TIME ........................................................................................................................ 187 TIME DIFFERENCE ........................................................................................................ 187 Qa ................................................................................................................. 188 MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................................... 188 xiv 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents SENSOR CLEANING ..................................................................................................... 189 SOUND & FLASH ........................................................................................................... 189 RESET ................................................................................................................................... 189 SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................. 190 AF BEEP VOL. .................................................................................................................. 190 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. .............................................................................................. 190 OPERATION VOL. .......................................................................................................... 190 SHUTTER VOLUME ....................................................................................................... 191 SHUTTER SOUND ......................................................................................................... 191 PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................... 191 SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................. 192 EVF BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................... 192 EVF COLOR ....................................................................................................................... 192 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................... 192 LCD BRIGHTNESS .......................................................................................................... 193 LCD COLOR ...................................................................................................................... 193 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................... 193 IMAGE DISP. ..................................................................................................................... 194 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS ............................................................................................ 194 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ............................................................. 195 NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................... 195 FRAMING GUIDELINE ................................................................................................. 196 AUTOROTATE PB ........................................................................................................... 196 FOCUS SCALE UNITS .................................................................................................. 197 APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS ................................................................. 197 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................................ 198 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ......................................................................... 199 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ........................................................................ 200 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................... 201 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. ......................................................................... 201 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING ................................................................................ 202 FOCUS LEVER SETTING ............................................................................................. 202 EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.......................................................................................... 203 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ......................................................................................... 204 COMMAND DIAL SETTING ..................................................................................... 207 xv 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n SHUTTER AF..................................................................................................................... 208 SHUTTER AE..................................................................................................................... 208 SHOOT WITHOUT LENS ............................................................................................ 208 SHOOT WITHOUT CARD .......................................................................................... 209 FOCUS RING .................................................................................................................... 209 FOCUS RING OPERATION ........................................................................................ 209 AE/AF-LOCK MODE ..................................................................................................... 209 AWB-LOCK MODE ........................................................................................................ 210 APERTURE RING SETTING (A) ................................................................................ 210 APERTURE SETTING .................................................................................................... 210 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ........................................................................................ 211 POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................. 212 AUTO POWER OFF ....................................................................................................... 212 PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................................. 212 SAVE DATA SETTING ....................................................................................... 213 FRAME NO. ...................................................................................................................... 213 SAVE ORG IMAGE ......................................................................................................... 214 EDIT FILE NAME ............................................................................................................. 214 SELECT FOLDER ............................................................................................................ 214 COPYRIGHT INFO ......................................................................................................... 215 CONNECTION SETTING ................................................................................. 216 Bluetooth SETTINGS ................................................................................................... 216 PC AUTO SAVE ................................................................................................................ 217 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING ......................................................... 218 PC CONNECTION MODE.......................................................................................... 218 GENERAL SETTINGS .................................................................................................... 219 INFORMATION ................................................................................................................ 219 RESET WIRELESS SETTING ....................................................................................... 219 9 Shortcuts 221 Shortcuts 221 Shortcut Options ............................................................................................. 222 MY MENU ........................................................................................................... 223 MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................................... 223 The Q (Quick Menu) Button ......................................................................... 225 The Quick Menu Display ......................................................................................... 225 Viewing and Changing Settings ......................................................................... 226 Editing the Quick Menu ........................................................................................... 227 xvi 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents The Fn (Function) Buttons ........................................................................... 228 Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons ...................................................... 230 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories Peripherals and Optional Accessories 233 233 External Flash Units ........................................................................................ 234 Using an External Flash ............................................................................................ 235 SYNC TERMINAL ............................................................................................................ 236 SHOE MOUNT FLASH ................................................................................................ 237 MASTER(OPTICAL) ....................................................................................................... 240 Lenses .................................................................................................................. 244 Lens Parts .......................................................................................................................... 244 Removing Lens Caps ................................................................................................. 245 Attaching Lens Hoods .............................................................................................. 245 Power Zoom ................................................................................................................... 246 Lenses with Aperture Rings................................................................................... 246 Lenses with No Aperture Rings ........................................................................... 247 Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ..................................................................................... 247 Manual Focus Lenses ................................................................................................. 248 Lens Care ........................................................................................................................... 248 11 Connections 249 Connections 249 HDMI Output .................................................................................................... 250 Connecting to HDMI Devices .............................................................................. 250 Shooting ............................................................................................................................ 251 Playback ............................................................................................................................. 251 Wireless Connections (Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) ................... 252 Smartphones and Tablets: FUJIFILM Camera Remote .......................... 252 Copying Pictures to a Computer: PC AutoSave ........................................ 254 Connecting to Computers via USB ........................................................... 255 Copying Pictures to a Computer ........................................................................ 257 Creating JPEG Copies of RAW Images:

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO....................................................................................... 258 Saving and Loading Camera Settings (FUJIFILM X Acquire) ............. 258 instax SHARE Printers .................................................................................... 259 Establishing a Connection ..................................................................................... 259 Printing Pictures ............................................................................................................ 260 xvii Table of Contents 12 Technical Notes Technical Notes 261 261 Accessories from Fujifi lm.............................................................................. 262 Software from Fujifi lm ................................................................................... 265 FUJIFILM Camera Remote ...................................................................................... 265 FUJIFILM PC AutoSave .............................................................................................. 265 MyFinePix Studio .......................................................................................................... 265 RAW FILE CONVERTER EX ........................................................................................ 265 FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ......................................................................................... 266 FUJIFILM X Acquire ..................................................................................................... 266 For Your Safety ................................................................................................. 267 Product Care ..................................................................................................... 276 Cleaning the Image Sensor ......................................................................... 277 Firmware Updates ........................................................................................... 278 Checking the Firmware Version .......................................................................... 278 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 279 Warning Messages and Displays ............................................................... 288 Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................. 291 Specifi cations ................................................................................................... 292 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n xviii Supplied Accessories The following are included with the camera:

NP-W126S rechargeable battery AC-5VG AC power adapter Plug adapter (Shape of adapter varies with region of sale) USB cable Body cap Metal strap clips ( 2) Clip attaching tool Protective covers ( 2) Shoulder strap Owners Manual (this manual) 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n N The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region. If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included. For information on compatible computer software, see Software from Fujifi lm (P 265). xix 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-T30 digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual:

O N Additional information that may be helpful when using the P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplifi ed, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. product. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as memory cards. The electronic viewfi nder may be referred to as the EVF and the LCD monitor as the LCD. xx Before You Begin 1 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i A Exposure compensation dial ..................5, 77 B Shutter button .................................................44 C Auto mode selector lever ................................... 6 D Shutter speed dial

.................................................. 5, 54, 56, 59, 60 E Hot shoe ...................................................92, 237 F Drive dial ..............................................................5 G N ( ash pop-up) lever ..................................92 H Strap eyelet .......................................................26 I Connector cover J Focus mode selector ......................................65 K Lens signal contacts L Lens release button ........................................28 M Microphone ............................................49, 156 N AF-assist illuminator ..........................116, 160 Self-timer lamp .............................................131 O Front command dial .............................. 7, 207 P ON/OFF switch .................................................36 Q Fn1 button ......................................................228 R Flash ...................................................................92 S Body cap ...........................................................28 T Microphone/remote release connector

(2.5mm) ............................................... 49, 58 U USB connector (Type-C) ......................35, 255 V HDMI Micro connector (Type D) ..............250 2 Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i W b (delete) button ..........................................46 X a (playback) button ...................................45 Y Diopter adjustment control ...........................9 Z Electronic view nder (EVF)......................10, 14 a VIEW MODE button .........................................14 b AE-L (exposure lock) button ...............79, 228 c Rear command dial .......................7, 165, 207 d AF-L (focus lock) button .......................79, 228 e Indicator lamp ......................................... 8, 160 f Q (quick menu) button ...............................225 g Focus stick (focus lever) ...................4, 69, 202 h MENU/OK button ............................................20 i DISP (display)/BACK button ...............16, 163 j Cable channel cover for DC coupler .......262 k Battery-chamber cover ................................29 l Battery-chamber cover latch......................29 m Serial number plate ..........................................4 n Tripod mount o Speaker .....................................................51, 191 p LCD monitor ...................................9, 12, 14, 15 Touch screen ..................................21, 123, 211 q Eye sensor .........................................................14 r Battery latch ....................................................31 s Battery chamber ............................................29 t Memory card slot ...........................................30 3 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Serial Number Plate Do not remove the serial number plate, which provides the FCCID, KC mark, serial number, and other important information. The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-

cus area. The focus stick can also be used to navigate the menus. 4 The Shutter Speed Dial The shutter speed dial is used to choose the shutter speed. The Drive Dial Rotate the dial to choose from the follow-

ing the drive modes. Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode FF Movie BKT1BKT1 BKT2BKT2 Bracketing CHCH High-speed burst CLCL Low-speed burst PP 48 80 83 ModeMode Single frame SS Adv.1 Adv.1 Adv.2 Advanced lter Adv.2 jj Multiple exposure uu Panorama The Exposure Compensation Dial Rotate the dial to choose an exposure compensation amount. PP 42 87 85 89 5 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The Auto Mode Selector Lever Switch between auto and manual modes. Position Position ModeMode Select from P (program AE), S (shutter-priority AE), A (aper-

ture-priority AE), and M (manual) modes (P 54, 56, 59, 60). Adjust shutter speed and aperture using program shift

(mode P) or set shutter speed and/or aperture manually (modes S, A, and M). Auto mode. The camera adjusts settings automatically accord-

ing to the option selected by rotating the front command dial. Choose from modes suited to speci c subject types (P 61), or select S ADVANCED SR AUTO to let the camera auto-

matically match the mode to the subject (P 61). Scene se-

lection is not available in drive modes Adv.1, Adv.2, j, and u. N Restrictions may apply to camera settings depending on the mode and shooting conditions. 6 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Parts of the Camera The Command Dials Rotate or press the command dials to:

Front command dial Rear command dial Select menu tabs or page through menus Adjust aperture 1, 2 Choose a scene (auto mode) Adjust exposure compensation 4 Adjust sensitivity 2 View other pictures during playback Switch back and forth between aperture and exposure compen-

sation 2, 5 Press and hold to choose the op-

tion selected for D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING in the D(setup) menu Highlight menu items Choose the desired combina-

tion of shutter speed and aper-

ture (program shift) Choose a shutter speed 2 Adjust settings in the quick menu Choose the size of the focus frame Zoom in or out in full frame play-

back Zoom in or out in multi-frame playback Perform the function assigned to the DIAL function button Zoom in on the active focus point 3 Press and hold to choose the manual focus mode focus display 3 Zoom in on the active focus point during playback Rotate Rotate Press Press 1 Aperture set to A (auto) and lens equipped with aperture ring or COMMAND selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> APERTURE RING SETTING (A). 2 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 3 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button. 4 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C. 5 Can be used to switch back and forth between aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-

pensation when exposure compensation dial is rotated to C. 7 The Indicator Lamp Camera status is shown by the indicator lamp. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera status Camera status Indicator lamp Indicator lamp Glows green Blinks green orange Blinks orange Glows orange Blinks green and Focus locked. Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken. Camera on: Recording pictures. Additional pictures can be taken. Camera off : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. *

Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at this time. Flash charging; ash will not re when picture is taken. Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload. N Warnings may also appear in the display. The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfi nder. The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-

cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. Blinks red 8 Focusing the Viewfi nder Viewfi nder focus can be adjusted by ro-

tating the diopter adjustment control. The LCD Monitor The LCD monitor can be tilted for eas-

ier viewing, but be careful not to touch the wires or trap fi ngers or other objects behind the monitor. Touching the wires could cause camera malfunction. Parts of the Camera 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:

Touch photography (P 22) Focus area selection (P 21) Function selection (P 23) Muting camera controls during movie recording (P 23) Full-frame playback (P 24) 9 Camera Displays This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during shooting. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. The Electronic Viewfi nder A B C D E F G H JI K LM N 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i 0 z y x w v u t s r q p o 01/01/2019 10:00 AM O P Q R S T U V W klmn j i gh f e d c b a Y XZ 10 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays A Sports nder mode ......................................130 B Focus check .............................................76, 120 C Depth-of- eld preview .......................... 59, 75 D Location data download status .....219, 252 E Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................216 F Image transfer status .........................216, 252 G Movie mode ............................................48, 144 H Full HD high-speed recording ...................145 I Time remaining ..............................................48 J Date and time .................................38, 40, 187 K Number of available frames 1 ...................291 L Image size .........................................................98 M Image quality ..................................................99 N Temperature warning .................................290 O Touch screen mode ...............................21, 123 P White balance ...............................................102 Q AWB lock .........................................................210 R Film simulation .............................................100 S F-Log recording .............................................149 T Dynamic range .............................................104 U D-range priority ............................................105 V Sound and ash indicator .........................189 W Virtual horizon ................................................18 X Boost mode ....................................................212 Y Histogram.........................................................19 Z Distance indicator 2 ........................................75 a External power source in use ......................34 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF). b Battery level .....................................................37 c Sensitivity........................................................136 d Exposure compensation ..............................77 e Aperture ...............................................55, 59, 60 f Shutter speed ......................................55, 56, 60 g TTL lock ........................................ 142, 205, 231 h AE lock ......................................................79, 209 i Metering..........................................................133 j Shooting mode ...............................................54 k Focus mode 2 ....................................................65 l Focus indicator 2 ..............................................66 m Manual focus indicator 2 ....................... 65, 73 n AF lock ......................................................79, 209 o Time code .......................................................158 p AF+MF indicator 2 ........................................119 q Shutter type....................................................134 r Continuous mode ..........................................83 s Recording level 2 ............................................156 t Focus frame .............................................. 69, 78 u Exposure indicator .................................. 60, 77 v Self-timer indicator ......................................131 w Microphone ...................................................158 x Remote release ..............................................158 y Flash (TTL) mode ..................................94, 237 z IS mode 2 ..........................................................135 0 Flash compensation .............................94, 237 11 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The LCD Monitor A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 01/01/2019 10:00 AM P Q R S T U V W X Y kl fgh e d b Zac ijmnop z y x w v u t s r q 12 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays A Sports nder mode ......................................130 B Flash compensation .............................94, 237 C Focus check .............................................76, 120 D Depth-of- eld preview .......................... 59, 75 E Location data download status .....219, 252 F Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................216 G Image transfer status .........................216, 252 H Movie mode ............................................48, 144 I Full HD high-speed recording ...................145 J Time remaining ..............................................48 K Number of available frames 1 ...................291 L Image size .........................................................98 M Image quality ..................................................99 N Date and time .................................38, 40, 187 O Touch screen mode 3 .............................21, 123 P White balance ...............................................102 Q AWB lock .........................................................210 R Film simulation .............................................100 S F-Log recording .............................................149 T Dynamic range .............................................104 U D-range priority ............................................105 V Temperature warning .................................290 W Sound and ash indicator .........................189 X Boost mode ....................................................212 Y Histogram.........................................................19 Z External power source in use ......................34 1 Shows 9999 if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). 3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls. a Battery level .....................................................37 b Distance indicator 2 ........................................75 c Sensitivity........................................................136 d Focus frame .............................................. 69, 78 e Exposure compensation ..............................77 f Aperture ...............................................55, 59, 60 g Time code .......................................................158 h Shutter speed ......................................55, 56, 60 i TTL lock ........................................ 142, 205, 231 j AE lock ......................................................79, 209 k Metering..........................................................133 l Shooting mode ...............................................54 m Focus mode 2 ....................................................65 n Focus indicator 2 ..............................................66 o Manual focus indicator 2 ....................... 65, 73 p AF lock ......................................................79, 209 q AF+MF indicator 2 ........................................119 r Shutter type....................................................134 s Recording level 2 ............................................156 t Continuous mode ..........................................83 u Exposure indicator .................................. 60, 77 v Self-timer indicator ......................................131 w Microphone ...................................................158 x Remote release ..............................................158 y Flash (TTL) mode ..................................94, 237 z IS mode 2 ..........................................................135 13 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Choosing a Display Mode Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle through the following display modes. Option Option EE EYE SENSOR EYE SENSOR EVF ONLY EVF ONLY LCD ONLY LCD ONLY EVF ONLY +

EVF ONLY + EE EE EYE SENSOR +

EYE SENSOR +

LCD IMAGE DISP. LCD IMAGE DISP. Description Description Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on and the LCD monitor o ; taking your eye away turns the view nder o and LCD monitor on. View nder on, LCD monitor o . LCD monitor on, view nder o . Putting your eye to the view nder turns the view nder on; tak-

ing it away turns the view nder o . The LCD monitor remains o . Putting your eye to the view nder during shooting turns the view nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for the display of images once you remove your eye from the view nder after shooting. The Eye Sensor The eye sensor may respond to objects other than your eye or to light shining directly on the sensor. Eye sensor 14 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays Adjusting Display Brightness The brightness and hue of the viewfi nder and LCD monitor can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu. Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfi nder brightness or hue, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do the same for the LCD monitor. Display Rotation When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor au-

tomatically rotate to match camera orientation. 15 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor. N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfi nder while using the DISP/BACK button. View nder Standard Information off LCD Monitor Standard Information off Info display 16 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Camera Displays Customizing the Standard Display To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. 2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING. Select D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the setup menu. 3 Choose items. Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. FRAMING GUIDELINE ELECTRONIC LEVEL FOCUS FRAME AF DISTANCE INDICATOR MF DISTANCE INDICATOR HISTOGRAM LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT SHOOTING MODE APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO INFORMATION BACKGROUND Expo. Comp. (Digit) Expo. Comp. (Scale) FOCUS MODE PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLASH CONTINUOUS MODE DUAL IS MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE BOOST MODE FRAMES REMAINING IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER MIC LEVEL GUIDANCE MESSAGE BATTERY LEVEL FRAMING OUTLINE 4 Save changes. Press DISP/BACK to save changes. 5 Exit the menus. Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 17 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Virtual Horizon Selecting ELECTRONIC LEVEL displays a vir-

tual horizon. The camera is level when the two lines overlap. Note that the virtual horizon may not be displayed if the camera lens is pointed up or down. For a 3D display (shown), press the function button to which ELECTRONIC LEVEL is assigned (P 204, 230). Framing Outline Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see against dark backgrounds. Guidance Message Enable GUIDANCE MESSAGE to display status updates (for example, when settings are changed) and the like in addition to error messages. Pitch Roll 18 Histograms Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis. Camera Displays Number of pixels Shadows Highlights Pixel brightness Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve throughout the tone range. Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of the graph. Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of the graph. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-

play showing areas of the frame that will be overexposed at current settings superimposed on the view through the lens, press the func-

tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned

(P 204, 230). A Overexposed areas blink B RGB histograms N In movie mode, potentially overexposed areas (highlights) do not blink on and off but are instead indicated by zebra stripes (P 155). A B 19 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Using the Menus To display the menus, press MENU/OK. Shooting Shooting IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE

(Warm/Cool) Playback Playback PLAY BACK MENU RAW CONVERSION ERASE CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING EXIT EXIT To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left to highlight the tab for the current menu. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE

(Warm/Cool) IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE

(Warm/Cool) EXIT EXIT Tab 3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab (H, G, A, F, B, E, C or D) containing the desired item. 4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu. N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items. 20 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Touch Screen Mode The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen. Shooting Touch Controls To enable touch controls, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. TOUCH SCREEN SETTING TOUCH SCREEN SETTING DOUBLE TAP SETTING ON TOUCH FUNCTION OFF TOUCH SCREEN SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS 1 EVF The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-

tures are being framed in the electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-

itor employed for touch controls. N If n FACE SELECT op is enabled when FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, the face used for focus can be chosen via touch controls. 21 LCD Monitor Touch controls can be used for such op-

erations as choosing the focus area and taking photographs. The operation per-

formed can be selected by tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display to cycle through the following options. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i ModeMode TOUCH TOUCH SHOOTING SHOOTING AF AFOFF AREAAREA OFFOFF Description Description Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter. In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your nger on the display. In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. Touch focus and shooting disabled. O Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 125). N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls avail-

able during movie recording, see Movie Recording (TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 124). 22 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Muting Movie Controls Touch Screen Mode Movie settings can be adjusted using touch-screen controls, preventing the sounds made by camera controls being recorded with the movie. When ON is se-

lected for B MOVIE SETTING > MOVIE SILENT CONTROL in the shooting menu, a F SET icon will be displayed in the LCD monitor; tap the icon to access the following controls:

SHUTTER SPEED *

APERTURE *

EXPOSURE COMPENSATION ISO INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

* Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE SILENT CONTROL disables dial controls. WIND FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME F FILM SIMULATION F WHITE BALANCE F SET icon Touch Function Functions can be assigned to the follow-

ing fl ick gestures in much the same way as function buttons (P 228):

Flick up: T-Fn1 Flick left: T-Fn2 Flick right: T-Fn3 Flick down: T-Fn4 N In some cases, touch-function fl ick ges-

tures display a menu; tap to select the desired option. Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function ges-

tures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING>

c TOUCH FUNCTION. INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 25.5 SET CANCEL 23 Touch Screen Mode Playback Touch Controls When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls can be used for the following playback operations:

Swipe: Swipe a fi nger across the display to view other images. 1 B e f o r e Y o u B e g n i Pinch-out: Place two fi ngers on the dis-

play and spread them apart to zoom in. Pinch-in: Place two fi ngers on the display and slide them together to zoom out. further. N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in on the focus point. Drag: View other areas of the image during playback zoom. 24 First Steps 25 Attaching the Strap Attach the strap clips to the camera and then attach the strap. 1 Attach a protective cover. Place a protective cover over the eye-

let as shown, with the black side of the cover toward the camera. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Open a strap clip. Use the clip attaching tool (A) to open a strap clip (B). Protective cover

(A)

(B) 3 Slide the clip onto the tool. Slide the clip onto the tool so that it hooks over the projection. 26 4 Place the strap clip on an eyelet. Hook the strap eyelet in the clip opening. Remove the tool, using the other hand to keep the clip in place. N Keep the tool in a safe place, as you will need it to open the strap clips when removing the strap. 5 Pass the clip through the eyelet. Rotate the clip fully through the eye-

let until it clicks closed. Attaching the Strap 2 F i r s t S t e p s 6 Fasten the strap. Insert the strap through a protective cover and strap clip and fasten the buckle as shown. O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured. Strap clip Repeat the above steps for the second eyelet. Buckle 27 Attaching a Lens The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Remove the body cap from the camera and the rear cap from the lens. Place the lens on mount, keeping the marks on the lens and camera aligned (A), and then rotate the lens until it clicks into place

(B). O When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the camera. Be careful not to touch the cameras internal parts. Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place. Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens. 2 F i r s t S t e p s Removing Lenses To remove the lens, turn the camera off , then press the lens release button (A) and rotate the lens as shown (B). O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens or inside the camera, replace the lens caps and camera body cap when the lens is not attached. Lenses and Other Optional Accessories The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM X-mount. O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-

changing) lenses. Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter. Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to malfunction. Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses. 28 Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card Insert the battery and memory card as described below. 1 Open the battery-chamber cover. Slide the battery-chamber latch as shown and open the battery-cham-

ber cover. O Do not remove the battery when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could damage image fi les or memory cards. Do not use excessive force when handling the battery-chamber cover. 2 Insert the battery. Insert the battery as shown. O Insert the battery in the orientation shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. The battery will slide in easily in the correct orientation. Confi rm that the battery is securely latched. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 29 3 Insert the memory card. Holding the card in the orientation shown, slide it in until it clicks into place at the back of the slot. O Be sure card is in the correct orienta-

tion; do not insert at an angle or use force. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 4 Close the battery-chamber cover. Close and latch the cover. O If the cover does not close, check that the battery is in the correct orienta-

tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-

er shut. 5 Format the memory card (P 186). O Format memory cards before fi rst use, and be sure to reformat all memory cards after using them in a computer or other device. O Do not open the battery-chamber cover when the camera is on. Fail-

ure to observe this precaution could damage image fi les or memory cards. 30 Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card Removing the Battery and Memory Card Before removing the battery or memory card, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. To remove the battery, press the battery latch to the side, and slide the battery out of the camera as shown. O The battery may become hot when used in hightemperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery. To remove the memory card, press it in and re-

lease it slowly. The card can then be removed by hand. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Press the center of the card when ejecting it. When a memory card is removed, the card could be ejected too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. 31 2 F i r s t S t e p s Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card Compatible Memory Cards The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. The camera supports UHS-I memory cards. To record movies, use cards with a UHS speed class of 3 or better or a video speed class of V30 or better. A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifi lm website. For details, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/compatibility/. O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-

ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. Memory cards can be locked, making it impossible to format the card or to record or delete images. Before inserting a mem-

ory card, slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance immediately. miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-

era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove the card. Do not affi x labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels can cause camera malfunction. Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card. Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a com-

puter or other device to edit, delete, or rename image fi les. Always use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming fi les, copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the originals. Renaming the fi les on the camera can cause problems during playback. 32 Charging the Battery The battery is not charged at shipment. Turn the camera off and charge the battery before use. The camera charges the battery internally. O An NP-W126S rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera. Charging takes about 180minutes. 1 Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter. Attach the plug adapter as shown, making sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into place on the AC power adapter terminals. O The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-

sively with the AC-5VG AC power adapter. Do not use it with other devices. The shape of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale. 2 Charge the battery. Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into an indoor power outlet. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Connect the cable to the cameras USB connector (Type-C). Be sure the connectors are fully inserted. 33 Charge Status The indicator lamp shows battery charge status as follows:

Indicator lamp Indicator lamp On O Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery charging. Charging complete. Battery fault. 2 F i r s t S t e p s O If the camera is turned on while charging is in progress, a K icon will be displayed. Charging will end the battery level will begin to gradually decline. The supplied charger is compatible with power supplies of 100 to 240volts (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use). Do not affi x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from the camera. Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat. Read the cautions in The Battery and Power Supply. Use only battery chargers designated for use with the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could result in product malfunction. Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel the outer casing. The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its charging life and must be replaced. Unplug the charger when it is not in use. Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging. Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures. 34 Charging via Computer The battery also charges if the camera is connected to a computer. Turn the camera off , insert the battery, and connect a USB cable. Charging the Battery 2 F i r s t S t e p s USB connector (Type-C) Battery status is shown by the indicator lamp. Indicator lamp Indicator lamp On O Blinks Battery status Battery status Battery charging Charging complete Battery fault Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable. Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computers current state. 35 Turning the Camera On and Off Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off . Rotate the switch to ON to turn the cam-

era on, or to OFF to turn the camera off . 2 F i r s t S t e p s O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfi nder can aff ect pic-

tures or the view through the viewfi nder. Keep the lens and viewfi nd-

er clean. N Press the a button to start playback. Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >

AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF switch to OFF and then back to ON. 36 Checking the Battery Level After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the display. Battery level is shown as follows:

Indicator Indicator Description Description e Battery partially discharged. f Battery about 80% full. g Battery about 60% full. h Battery about 40% full. i Battery about 20% full. i

(red) j Low battery. Charge as soon as pos-

sible. Battery exhausted. Turn camera o and recharge battery.

(blinks red) 2 F i r s t S t e p s 37 Basic Setup When you turn the camera on for the fi rst time, you can choose a language and set the camera clock. At default settings, you can also pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet so that you can later synchronize the clocks or download pictures. Follow the steps below when turning the camera on for the fi rst time. N If you intend to pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet, install and launch the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote App on the smart device before proceeding. For more information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

1 Turn the camera on. A language-selection dialog will be displayed. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 2 Choose a language. Highlight a MENU/OK. language and press 3 Pair the camera with the smartphone or tablet. Press MENU/OK to pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet running the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. N To skip pairing, press DISP/BACK. PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIR WITH SMARTPHONE?

IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED TO SMARTPHONE BY PAIRING SCAN QR CODE OR SEARCH FOR "FUJIFILM Camera Remote" APP ON THE WEB SET SKIP HELP 38 4 Check the time. When pairing is complete, you will be prompted to set the camera clock to the time reported by the smartphone or tablet. Check that the time is cor-

rect. Basic Setup PAIRING REGISTRATION PAIRING COMPLETE 1/ 1/2019 12:00 PM SET DATE/TIME FROM SMARTPHONE?

SET CANCEL N To set the clock manually, press DISP/BACK (P 40). 5 Synchronize the camera settings with the settings con gured on your smart-

phone or tablet. SMARTPHONE SYNC. SETTING LOCATION&TIME LOCATION TIME OFF 2 F i r s t S t e p s SET N The option selected can be changed at any time using D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS. 6 Set the clock. Press MENU/OK to set the camera clock to the time reported by the smartphone or tablet and exit to shooting mode. N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the camera is turned on. Skipping the Current Step If you skip a step, a confi rmation dialog will be displayed; select NO to avoid repeating any steps you skipped the next time the camera is turned on. 39 Basic Setup Choosing a Diff erent Language To change the language:

1 Display language options. Select D USER SETTING> Qa. 2 Choose a language. Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Changing the Time and Date To set the camera clock:

1 Display DATE/TIME options. Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME. 2 Set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock. 2 F i r s t S t e p s 40 Basic Photography and Playback 41 Taking Photographs (Mode P) This section describes how to take pictures using program AE (mode P). See pages 5460 for information on S, A, and M modes. 1 Adjust settings for program AE. 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l A Auto mode selector lever B Shutter speed C Drive mode D Focus mode E Aperture Setting Setting z A (auto) S (single frame) S (single AF) A (auto) 2 Check the shooting mode. Confi rm that P appears in the display. PP 54 54 5 65 54 42 3 Ready the camera. Hold the camera steady with both hands and brace your elbows against your sides. Shaking or un-

steady hands can blur your shots. To prevent pictures that are out of focus or too dark (underexposed), keep your fi ngers and other objects away from the lens and AF-assist illuminator. 4 Frame the picture. Lenses with Zoom Rings Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom out, right to zoom in. Taking Photographs (Mode P) 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l 43 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l Taking Photographs (Mode P) 5 Focus. Press the shutter button halfway to focus. Focus indicator Focus frame If the camera is able to focus, it will beep twice and focus frame and focus indicator will glow green. If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white. N If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus operation. Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock). The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro and standard focus ranges. 6 Shoot. Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture. 44 a Viewing Pictures Pictures can be viewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor. To view pictures full frame, press a. 100-0001 Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame. N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (gift image) icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback zoom may not be available. 45 3 B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l b Deleting Pictures Use the b button to delete pictures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. 1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and select FRAME. 3 ERASE FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES B a s i c P h o t o g r a p h y a n d P a y b a c k l 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confi rmation dialog is not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures. N Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any pictures you wish to delete (P 174). Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK MENU> ERASE option (P 170). 46 Movie Recording and Playback 47 F Recording Movies This section describes how to fi lm movies in auto mode. 1 Rotate the drive dial to F. 2 Rotate the auto mode selector le-

ver to AUTO to shoot movies in S ADVANCED SR AUTO mode. The camera automatically optimizes set-

tings to suit the scene. 3 Press the shutter button to start re-

cording. A recording indicator (V) and the time remaining are displayed while recording is in progress. 4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. 48 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l Recording Movies Using an External Microphone Sound can be recorded with external micro-

phones that connect using jacks 2.5mm in di-

ameter; microphones that require plug-in pow-

er cannot be used. See the microphone manual for details. O Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording. Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds made by the camera during recording. Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 49 Adjusting Movie Settings Movie settings can be adjusted using the B MOVIE SETTING option in the shoot-

ing menu (P 144). Recording Movies MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE

(Warm/Cool) 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l EXIT Depth of Field Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. N The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp indicator or AF-assistthat lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you can change exposure compensation by up to 2EV and adjust zoom using the zoom ring on the lens (if available). If the lens is equipped with an aperture mode switch, select the ap-

erture mode before beginning recording. If an option other than A is selected, shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted while recording is in progress. While recording is in progress, you can:

- Adjust sensitivity

- Use the VIEW MODE button and the eye sensor to switch between the EVF and LCD monitor displays

- Refocus using any of the following methods:

Press the shutter button halfway Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned Use touch screen controls

- Display a histogram or artifi cial horizon by pressing the button to Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases settings may not apply during recording. To choose the focus area for movie recording, select B MOVIE SETTING> F FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial (P 69). which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL has been assigned 50 a Viewing Movies View movies on the camera. In full-frame playback, movies are identi-

fi ed by a W icon. Press the focus stick (fo-

cus lever) down to start movie playback. 01/01/2019 10:00 AM The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed:

PLAYPLAY

+1.0 12800 4 Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever)

(focus lever) Up Down Full-frame Full-frame playback playback Playback in Playback in progress (

progress (xx)) Playback Playback paused (

paused (yy)) End playback Start playback Pause playback Start/resume playback Single frame rewind/

advance 29m59s i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed Progress is shown in the display during playback. O Do not cover the speaker during playback. N Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. STOP PAUSE 51 Playback Speed Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to adjust playback speed during playback. Speed is shown by the number of arrows (M or N). Viewing Movies 29m59s Arrows 4 i i M o v e R e c o r d n g a n d P a y b a c k l 52 Taking Photographs 53 Choosing a Shooting Mode For control over shutter speed and aperture (P, S, A, and M modes), rotate the auto mode selector lever to z. Rotate the lever to AUTO to choose from modes suited to specifi c subject types, or select S ADVANCED SR AUTO to let the camera automatically match the mode to the subject. Mode P: Program AE Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be selected with program shift. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever z B Shutter speed C Aperture Confi rm that P appears in the display. O A (auto) A (auto) If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed and aperture displays will show . 54 Choosing a Shooting Mode Program Shift If desired, you can rotate the rear command dial to select other combinations of shutter speed and aperture without altering exposure (pro-

gram shift). Aperture Shutter speed O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:

With fl ash units that support TTL auto When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>

DYNAMIC RANGE In movie mode N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off . 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 55 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for optimal exposure. Setting Setting User-selected A (auto) A Auto mode selector lever z B Shutter speed C Aperture Confi rm that S appears in the display. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter speed, aperture will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-

ture display will show . N At settings other than 180X, shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 13EV by rotating the rear command dial. Shutter speed can be adjusted while the shutter button is pressed halfway. 56 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Choosing a Shooting Mode Time (T) Rotate the shutter speed dial to T (time) to choose slow shutter speeds for long time-exposures. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure. 1 Rotate the shutter speed dial to T. 2 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a shutter speed. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 3 Press the shutter button all the way down to take a picture at the selected shutter speed. At speeds of 1 s or slower, a count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in progress. N To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. 57 Bulb (B) Select a shutter speed of B (bulb) for long time-exposures in which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is recom-

mended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure. 1 Rotate the shutter speed dial to B. 2 Press the shutter button all the way down. The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the shutter button is pressed; the display shows the time elapsed since the ex-

posure started. N Selecting an aperture of A fi xes shutter speed at 30 s. To reduce noise (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. Using a Remote Release A remote release can be used for long time-ex-

posures. When using an optional RR-100 remote release or an electronic release from third-party suppliers, connect it to the cameras remote re-

lease connector. N A confi rmation dialog will be displayed when a remote release is connected; press MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/

REMOTE RELEASE. CHECK MIC/REMOTE RELEASE SETTING SET SKIP 58 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Choosing a Shooting Mode Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for optimal exposure. Setting Setting A (auto) Z (user-selected) A Auto mode selector lever z B Shutter speed C Aperture Confi rm that A appears in the display. O If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture, shutter speed will be displayed in red. If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed display will show . N Rotate the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Previewing Depth of Field When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned to a function button, pressing the button dis-

plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the selected setting, allowing depth of fi eld to be previewed in the display. 59 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Mode M: Manual Exposure In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and ap-

erture. Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or un-

derexposed (darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative expression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings is shown by the exposure indi-

cator; adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired expo-

sure is reached. Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever z B Shutter speed C Aperture Confi rm that M appears in the display. N Rotate the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. User-selected Z (user-selected) 5.6 At settings other than 180X, shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 13EV by rotating the rear command dial. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 60 Choosing a Shooting Mode Exposure Preview To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select an option other than OFF for D SCREEN SET-UP> PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE. N Select OFF when using the fl ash or on other occasions on which ex-

posure may change when the picture is taken. Auto Mode Auto mode off ers options suited to particular subject types. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s AUTO S (single frame) Setting Setting A Auto mode selector lever B Drive dial The currently-selected scene appears in the display. N You can also choose a scene using the A SHOOTING SETTING >

SCENE POSITION item in the shooting menu. Focus-area selection is not available when a scene is selected. 61 Choose from the following options:

ModeMode ADVANCED SSADVANCED SRAUTO SRAUTO hh PORTRAIT PORTRAIT ZZ PORTRAIT PORTRAIT ENHANCER ENHANCER LANDSCAPE MM LANDSCAPE NN SPORT SPORT NIGHT OO NIGHT HH NIGHT (TRIPOD) NIGHT (TRIPOD) pp FIREWORKS FIREWORKS QQ SUNSET SUNSET RR SNOWSNOW ss BEACH BEACH ff UNDERWATER UNDERWATER UU PARTY PARTY VV FLOWER FLOWER WW TEXT TEXT Description Description The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the scene. Choose for portraits. Processes portraits to give the subject a smooth, natu-

ral-looking complexion. Choose for daylight shots of buildings and landscapes. Choose when photographing moving subjects. Choose for poorly lit twilight or night scenes. Choose this mode for slow shutter speeds when shooting at night. Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the expanding burst of light from a rework. Choose this mode to record the vivid colors in sunrises and sunsets. Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness of scenes dominated by shining white snow. Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness of sunlit beaches. Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater lighting. Capture indoor background lighting under low-light condi-

tions. E ective for taking more vivid shots of owers. Take clear pictures of text or drawings in print. 62 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Choosing a Shooting Mode S ADVANCED SR AUTO The scene selected by the camera in S ADVANCED SR AUTO mode is shown by an icon in the display. a AUTO c LANDSCAPE d NIGHT h NIGHT (TRIPOD) e MACRO v SUNSET x SKY z SKY & GREENERY O The mode selected may vary with shooting conditions. If the mode g BACKLIT PORTRAIT a PORTRAIT&MOTION u BEACH w SNOW y GREENERY d PORTRAIT c MOVING OBJECT b BACKLIT PORTRAIT&MOTION and subject do not match, select a scene manually. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 63 Autofocus Take pictures using autofocus. 1 Rotate the auto mode selector lever to z (P 6). 2 Rotate the focus mode selector to S or C (P 65). 5 3 Use G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE to choose an AF mode

(P 67). i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 4 Choose the position and size of the focus frame (P 69). 5 Take pictures. N For information on the autofocus system, visit:

http://fujifilm-x.com/af/en/index.html 64 Focus Mode Use the focus mode selector to choose how the camera focuses. Autofocus Choose from the following options:

ModeMode S

(AF-S) C

(AF-C) M

(manual) Description Description Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for stationary subjects. Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to re ect changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion. Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (P 73). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s N Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-

justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button is not pressed. 65

) Focus status Focus status Camera focusing. The Focus Indicator Focus status is shown by the focus indicator. Focus indicator Focus indicator

(

z (lights green) Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S). Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject.

(z) (lights green) A (blinks white) Camera unable to focus. j Manual focus (focus mode M). 5 Focus indicator i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 66 Autofocus Autofocus Options (AF Mode) Choose how the camera focuses in modes S and C. 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE. 3 Choose an AF mode. N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 222). How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode. Focus Mode S (AF-S) Focus Mode S (AF-S) Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image r SINGLE POINT Camera focuses on subject in selected focus point. Use for pin-

point focus on selected subject. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s y ZONE z WIDE j ALL Camera focuses on subject in se-

lected focus zone. Focus zones in-

clude multiple focus points, mak-

ing it easier to focus on subjects in motion. Camera focuses automatically on high-contrast subjects; display shows areas in focus. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 69, 70) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE. 67 Focus Mode C (AF-C) Focus Mode C (AF-C) Option Option Description Description Sample image Sample image r SINGLE POINT Focus tracks subject at selected fo-

cus point. Use for subjects moving toward or away from camera. y ZONE Focus tracks subject in selected fo-

cus zone. Use for subjects that are moving fairly predictably. z TRACKING tracks subjects moving Focus through wide area of frame. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s j ALL Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

play (P 69, 70) to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING. 68 Autofocus Focus-Point Selection Choose a focus point for autofocus. Viewing the Focus-Point Display 1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. 2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the fo-

cus-point display. 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to choose a focus area. N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 21). Selecting a Focus Point Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the focus point and the rear command dial to choose the size of the focus frame. The procedure varies with the option se-

lected for AF mode. Focus stick Focus stick Rear command dial Rear command dial AF mode AF mode rr yy zz TiltTilt Press Press Select focus point Select center focus point Rotate Rotate Choose from 6 frame sizes Choose from 3 frame sizes Press Press Restore original size 69 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s N Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING is selected in focus mode S. If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE

(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode S) or z TRACKING

(focus mode C). The Focus-Point Display The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF mode. N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large squares. rr SINGLE POINT SINGLE POINT AF mode AF mode yy ZONE ZONE zz WIDE/TRACKING WIDE/TRACKING 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Number of points avail-

able can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING >

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Choose from zones with 7 7, 5 5, or 3 3 focus points. Position focus frame over subject you want to track. 70 Autofocus Autofocus Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be unable to focus on the subjects listed below. Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies. Subjects photographed through a window or other refl ective object. Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than refl ect light, such as hair or fur. Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or fl ame. Subjects that show little contrast with the background. Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a backdrop of highly contrasting elements). 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 71 Autofocus Checking Focus To zoom in on the current focus area for precise focus, press the center of the rear command dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. Press the center of the rear command dial again to cancel zoom.

Normal display Focus zoom N In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in eff ect. In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE. Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF is on. Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to change the function performed by the center of the rear command dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 230). 72 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Manual Focus Adjust focus manually. 1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M. j will appear in the display. 2 Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce the focus distance, right to increase. 5.6 A 3 Take pictures. N Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS RING to reverse the direc-

tion of rotation of the focus ring. Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. 73 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Quick Focus To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial). In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-

sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option chosen for G AF/MF SETTING> INSTANT AF SETTING. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 74 Manual Focus Checking Focus A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual focus mode. The Manual Focus Indicator 5.6

(white line) Focus distance The manual focus indicator indicates how closely the focus distance matches the distance to the subject in the focus brackets. The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area

(in meters or feet according to the option selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu), the blue bar the depth of fi eld, or in other words the distance in front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus. N If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-

of-fi eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. Use the G AF/MF SETTING > DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option to choose how depth of fi eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. Depth of fi eld

75 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Manual Focus Focus Zoom If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, the camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear com-

mand dial to exit zoom. N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. If STANDARD or FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom cannot be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL MICROPRISM is selected. MF Assist Use G AF/MF SETTING> MF ASSIST to choose a focus check option. N The MF ASSIST menu can be displayed by pressing and holding the center of the rear command dial. The following options are available:

FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-

trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until the subject is highlighted. DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and ro-

tate the focus ring until the four parts of the split image are correctly aligned. DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when the subject is in focus. 76 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s d Exposure Compensation Adjust exposure. Rotate the exposure compensation dial. N The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode. Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display, although the display may not accurately refl ect its eff ects if:

- the exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 EV,

- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or

- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY. Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfi nder or LCD monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the display may not accurately refl ect the eff ects of exposure compensa-

tion when W 200% or X 400% is selected for F DYNAMIC RANGE or ON is selected for F-Log RECORDING. An accurate preview can be obtained by selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly. C (Custom) When the exposure compensation dial is rotated to C, exposure compensation can be adjusted by rotating the front com-

mand dial. N The front command dial can be used to set exposure compensation to values be-

tween 5 and +5EV. The front command dial can be used to set aperture or exposure compensation. Press the dial to toggle between the two. 77 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Focus/Exposure Lock Compose photographs with off -center subjects. 1 Position the subject in the focus frame and press the shutter button halfway to lock focus and exposure. Focus and exposure will remain locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway (AF/AE lock). 2 Press the button all the way down. N Focus lock using the shutter button is only available when ON is se-

lected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AF, SHUTTER AE. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 78 Focus/Exposure Lock The AF-L and AE-L Buttons Focus and exposure can also be locked with the AF-L and AE-L buttons. At default settings, the AF-L button locks focus, the AE-L button exposure. While the assigned control is pressed, pressing the shutter button halfway will not end the lock. If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> AE/AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be ended by pressing the control a second time. The controls used for AE LOCK ONLY, AF LOCK ONLY, and AE/AF LOCK can be chosen using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING (P 204, 228). AE-L AF-L 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 79 BKT Bracketing Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures. 1 Rotate the drive dial to BKT1 or BKT2. 2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING in the A SHOOTING SETTING menu and select the desired bracketing option (P 128). Bracketing type Bracketing type OO AE BKT AE BKT ISO BKT WW ISO BKT XX FILM SIMULATION BKT FILM SIMULATION BKT V V WHITE BALANCE BKT WHITE BALANCE BKT DYNAMIC RANGE BKT Y Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ZZ FOCUS BKT FOCUS BKT N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 222). 3 Take photographs. 80 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Bracketing O AE BKT Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which the shots are taken. You can also choose the amount exposure is varied with each shot and whether the shots are taken one at a time or in a single burst. N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the limits of the exposure metering system. W ISO BKT Select a bracketing amount (13, 23, or 1). Each time the shut-

ter is released, the camera will take a picture at the current sen-

sitivity and process it to create two additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with sensitivity lowered by the selected amount. X FILM SIMULATION BKT Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create copies with diff erent fi lm simulation set-

tings. V WHITE BALANCE BKT Select a bracketing amount (1, 2, or 3). Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white balanced setting, one with fi ne-tuning increased by the selected amount, and another with fi ne-tuning decreased by the selected amount. 81 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Bracketing Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three shots with diff erent dynamic ranges: 100% for the fi rst, 200% for the second, and 400% for the third. N While dynamic range bracketing is in eff ect, sensitivity will be restrict-

ed to a minimum of ISO640; the sensitivity previously in eff ect is re-

stored when bracketing ends. Z FOCUS BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a se-

ries of photos, varying focus with each shot. You can choose the number of shots, the amount focus changes with each shot, and the interval between shots. BKT Setting Settings for exposure, sensitivity, fi lm simulation, white balance and fo-

cus bracketing can be adjusted using A SHOOTING SETTING > DRIVE SETTING> BKT1 SETTING or BKT2 SETTING. 82 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s I Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) Capture motion in a series of pictures. 1 Rotate the drive dial to select CH(high-

speed burst) or CL(low-speed burst). 2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING in the A SHOOTING SETTING menu and choose a frame advance rate (P 127). N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 222). 3 Keep the shutter button pressed to take photos at the rate selected in Step 2. N Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the memory card is full. O If fi le numbering reaches 999 before shooting is complete, the re-

maining pictures will be recorded to a new folder. Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the space available on the memory card is insuffi cient. Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken. Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus mode. Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the fl ash may not fi re. Recording times may increase during burst shooting. 83 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) Focus and Exposure Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot. To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AE. To vary both focus and exposure with each shot, select focus mode C and choose OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AE. N Exposure and focus tracking performance may vary with such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 84 j Multiple Exposures Create a photograph that combines two exposures. 1 Rotate the drive dial to j. 2 Take the fi rst shot. 3 Press MENU/OK. The fi rst shot will be shown superimposed on the view through the lens and you will be prompted to take the second shot. N To return to Step 2 and retake the fi rst shot, press the focus stick (focus lever) left. To save the fi rst shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK. NEXT RETRY EXIT 85 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 4 Take the second shot, using the fi rst frame as a guide. 5 Press MENU/OK to create the multiple exposure, or press the focus stick left to return to Step4 and retake the sec-

ond shot. Multiple Exposures EXIT RETRY EXIT 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 86 ADV. Advanced Filters Take photos with fi lter eff ects. 1 Rotate the drive dial to Adv.1 or Adv.2. 2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING> Adv. FILTER 1 SELECT or Adv. FILTER 2 SELECT in the A SHOOTING SETTING menu and choose the desired fi lter eff ect (P 127). N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 222). 3 Take photographs. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 87 Advanced Filters Advanced Filter Options Choose from the following fi lters:

Filter Filter G TOY CAMERA H MINIATURE I POP COLOR J HIGH-KEY Z LOW-KEY K DYNAMIC TONE X SOFT FOCUS Description Description Choose for a retro toy camera e ect. The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for a diorama e ect. Create high-contrast images with saturated colors. Create bright, low-contrast images. Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of em-

phasized highlights. Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy e ect. Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the whole image. u PARTIAL COLOR (RED) v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE) w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW) x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN) y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE) z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE) N Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in some Areas of the image that are the selected color are recorded in that color. All other areas of the image are recorded in black-and-white. cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue. 88 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s u Panoramas Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama. 1 Rotate the drive dial to u. 2 To select the size of the angle through which you will pan the camera while shooting, press the focus stick (focus lever) left. Highlight a size and press MENU/OK. 3 Press the focus stick right to view a choice of pan directions. Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK. 4 Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording. There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during recording. 5 Pan the camera in the direction shown by the arrow. Shooting ends automatically when the camera is panned to the end of the guides and the panorama is complete. Sweep camera along yellow line in direction of y ANGLE DIRECTION 89 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s For Best Results For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50mm or less in 35mm format). Prop your elbows against your sides and move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed, keeping the camera par-

allel or at right angles to the horizon and being careful only to pan in the direction shown by the guides. Use a tripod for best results. If the desired results are not achieved, try panning at a diff erent speed. O If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded. The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends before the panorama is complete. Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may in some cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly. Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit. Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown cancels shooting. The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle than selected. The desired results may not be achieved with:

- Moving subjects

- Subjects close to the camera

- Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a fi eld of grass

- Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls

- Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AE, ex-

posure for the entire panorama is determined by the fi rst frame. 90 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Viewing Panoramas With the panorama displayed full frame, press the focus stick (focus lever) down to start panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically, horizontal panoramas horizontally. Panoramas PLAY STOP PAUSE In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom pan-

oramas in or out. Panorama playback is controlled using the focus stick. Focus stick Focus stick

(focus lever)

(focus lever) Full-frame Full-frame playback playback Panorama Panorama playback playback Panorama Panorama playback paused playback paused 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Up Down Start playback Left/right View other pictures End playback Pause playback Choose pan direction Resume playback Scroll panorama manually 91 Flash Photography Use the built-in fl ash for additional lighting when shooting at night or indoors under low light. 1 Slide the N lever as shown to raise the fl ash. 2 Select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING in the F FLASH SETTING menu. The camera will display options for the built-in fl ash. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT O Sync terminal options will be displayed if the built-in fl ash is low-

ered and either no fl ash unit, or an incompatible fl ash unit, is mounted on the hot shoe (P 236). Raise the fl ash before ad-

justing settings. N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 222). 3 Highlight items using the focus stick

(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-

mand dial to change the highlighted setting (P 94). MODE Built-In Flash ADJUST END 92 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s Flash Photography 4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into eff ect. O Depending on the distance to the subject, some lenses may cast shadows in photos taken with the fl ash. Be careful not to injure yourself on the edges of the raised fl ash. The fl ash will not fi re at some settings, for example in panorama mode or when the electronic shutter is used. Choose shutter speeds slower than 180X when using the fl ash in ex-

posure mode S (shutter-priority AE) or manual (M). N In TTL mode, the fl ash may fi re several times with each shot. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete. The fl ash will not fi re if OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH in the D USER SETTING menu. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 93 Flash Settings The following settings are available with the built-in fl ash. MODE Built-In Flash ADJUST END Description Description Choose from the following options:

TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ash compensation (B) and choose a ash mode (C). M: The ash res at the selected output (B) regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressed in fractions of full power, from to . The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the ash control system; take a test shot and check the results. C (COMMANDER): Choose if the ash is being used to con-

trol remote synced ash units, for example as part of a stu-

dio ash system. D (OFF): The ash does not re. Adjust ash level. The options available vary with the ash control mode (A). Setting Setting 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s A Flash control mode B Flash compensation/

output 94 Setting Setting Description Description Flash Photography Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options avail-

able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash lev-

el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-

cates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possible;

ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Choose whether the ash is timed to re immediately after the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances. 5 C Flash mode (TTL) D Sync i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 95 Flash Photography Red-Eye Removal Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected for F FLASH SETTING> RED EYE REMOVAL and G AF/MF SETTING>

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is FACE DETECTION ON. Red-eye re-

moval minimizes red-eye caused when light from the fl ash is refl ected from the subjects retinas. Flash Sync Speed The fl ash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1180s or slow-

er. Optional Flash Units from Fujifi lm The camera can be used with optional Fujifi lm shoe-mounted fl ash units. Third-Party Flash Units Do not use third-party fl ash units that apply over 300V to the camera hot shoe. 5 i T a k n g P h o t o g r a p h s 96 The Shooting Menus 97 H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING Adjust image quality settings. To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and se-

lect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE

(Warm/Cool) EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. IMAGE SIZE Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded. Option Option O 3 : 2 P 3 : 2 Q 3 : 2 Image size Image size 6240 4160 4416 2944 3120 2080 Option Option O 16 : 9 P 16 : 9 Q 16 : 9 Image size Image size 6240 3512 4416 2488 3120 1760 Option Option O 1 : 1 P 1 : 1 Q 1 : 1 Image size Image size 4160 4160 2944 2944 2080 2080 The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE and when 1.25X CROP is selected in CH HIGH SPEED BURST mode:

Option Option P 3 : 2 Image size Image size 3328 3328 N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another Image size Image size 4992 2808 Image size Image size 4992 3328 Option Option P 16 : 9 Option Option P 1 : 1 shooting mode is selected. 98 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE QUALITY Choose a fi le format and compression ratio. Option Option FINE NORMAL FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW RAW Description Description Lower compression ratios are used for higher-quality im-

ages. Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of images that can be stored. Record both RAW and ne-quality JPEG images. Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG images. Record RAW images only. The Function Buttons To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a function button (P 230). Press the button once to select the option in the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column). Option currently selected for Option currently selected for IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY Option selected by pressing function Option selected by pressing function button to which RAWRAW is assigned button to which is assigned FINE NORMAL FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW RAW FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW FINE NORMAL FINE RAW RECORDING Choose whether to compress RAW images. Option Option UNCOMPRESSED LOSSLESS COMPRESSED Description Description RAW images are not compressed. RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm that reduces le size with no loss of image data. The imag-

es can be viewed in RAW FILE CONVERTER EX (P 265), FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO (P 266), or other software that supports lossless RAW compression. 99 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s FILM SIMULATION Simulate the eff ects of diff erent kinds of fi lm, including black-

and-white (with or without color fi lters). Choose a palette ac-

cording to your subject and creative intent. Option Option c PROVIA/STANDARD d Velvia/VIVID e ASTIA/SOFT i CLASSIC CHROME g PRO Neg. Hi h PRO Neg. Std 6 X ETERNA/CINEMA Description Description Standard color reproduction. Suited to a wide range of subjects, from portraits to landscapes. A high-contrast palette of saturated colors, suited to na-

ture photos. Enhances the range of hues available for skin tones in por-

traits while preserving the bright blues of daylight skies. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography. Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look. O ers slightly more contrast than h PRO Neg. Std. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography. A soft-toned palette. The range of hues available for skin tones is enhanced, making this a good choice for studio portrait photography. Film movies using a palette that features subdued colors and deep shadows. Take black-and-white photos with rich gradation and out-

standing sharpness. Take pictures in standard black and white. Take pictures in sepia. T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s a ACROS *

b MONOCHROME *

f SEPIA

* Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) lters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color. The yellow (Ye) lter deepens purples and blues and the red (R) lter blues and greens. The green

(G) lter deepens reds and browns, including skin tones, making it a good choice for portraits. N Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness settings. Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 222). For more information, visit:

http://fujifilm-x.com/en/x-stories/the-world-of-film-simulation-episode-1/

100 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or cool color cast) to mono-

chrome pictures taken with the a ACROS or b MONOCHROME fi lm simulation. Option Option

+9 +1 0

-1 -9 Description Description Higher positive values equate to a redder color cast. Normal monochrome (grayscale). Lower negative values equate to a bluer color cast. GRAIN EFFECT Add a fi lm grain eff ect. Select an amount (STRONG or WEAK) or choose OFF to turn fi lm grain off . STRONG Options Options WEAK OFF COLOR CHROME EFFECT Deepen colors in shadows. Select an amount (STRONG or WEAK) or choose OFF to turn the eff ect off . Options Options WEAK STRONG OFF 101 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s WHITE BALANCE For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches the light source. Option Option AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically. Description Description k/l/m Measure a value for white balance. k i j k l m n g Choose a color temperature. For subjects in direct sunlight. For subjects in the shade. Use under daylight uorescent lights. Use under warm white uorescent lights. Use under cool white uorescent lights. Use under incandescent lighting. Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater light-

ing. N In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired resultsfor example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait subjectsuse custom white balance or choose a white balance op-

tion suited to the light source. White balance is adjusted for fl ash lighting only in AUTO and g modes. Turn the fl ash off using other white balance options. White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 222). 102 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s IMAGE QUALITY SETTING Fine-Tuning White Balance Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white balance option displays a fi ne-tuning dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to fi ne-tune white balance. WB SHIFT SET N To exit without fi ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-

lecting a white balance option. The focus stick (focus lever) does not tilt diagonally. Custom White Balance CUSTOM 1 SHUTTER : NEW WB SHIFT Choose k, l, or m to adjust white balance for unusual lighting conditions. White balance measurement options will be displayed; frame a white object so that it fi lls the display and press the shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to se-

lect the most recent value and display the fi ne-tuning dialog). If COMPLETED ! is displayed, press MENU/OK to set white balance to the measured value. If UNDER is displayed, raise exposure compensation and try again. If OVER is displayed, lower exposure com-

pensation and try again. NOT CHANGE COMPLETED !

CANCEL SET 103 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s k: Color Temperature Selecting k in the white balance menu displays a list of color temperatures;

highlight a color temperature and press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option and display a fi ne-tuning dialog, then highlight the desired value and press MENU/OK again. The selected color tem-

perature will be shown in the display. WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMPERATURE R:0 B:0 SET SHIFT 10000K 9100K 8300K 7700K 7100K Color Temperature Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color tempera-

ture have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are tinged with blue. You can match color temperature to the light source, or choose options that diff er sharply from the color of the light source to make pictures warmer or colder. DYNAMIC RANGE Control contrast. Choose lower values to increase contrast when shooting indoors or under overcast skies, higher values to reduce loss of detail in highlights when photographing high-contrast scenes. Higher values are recommended for scenes that include both sunlight and deep shade, for such high-contrast subjects as sunlight on water, brightly-lit autumn leaves, and portraits taken against a blue sky, and for white objects or people wearing white. AUTO V 100%

W 200%

X 400%

Options Options 104 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s IMAGE QUALITY SETTING O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a val-

ue according to the scene. N If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-

ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-

ter button is pressed halfway. W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO320 to ISO12800, X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO640 to 12800. D RANGE PRIORITY Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-

ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes. Option Option AUTO STRONG WEAK OFF Description Description Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-

ditions. Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast scenes. Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately high-contrast scenes. Contrast reduction off. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s N WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800, STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO640 to 12800. When an option other than OFF is selected, HIGHLIGHT TONE, SHADOW TONE, and DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automat-

ically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF. 105 HIGHLIGHT TONE Adjust the appearance of highlights.

+4

+3

+2 Options Options

+1 SHADOW TONE Adjust the appearance of shadows.

+4

+3

+2 COLOR Adjust color density.

+4

+3

+2

+1 SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options

+1 Options Options 0 Options Options 0 0 0 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 106 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s IMAGE QUALITY SETTING NOISE REDUCTION Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 LONG EXPOSURE NR Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures. Options Options ON OFF LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER Select ON to improve defi nition by adjusting for diff raction and the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. Options Options ON OFF COLOR SPACE Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option sRGB Adobe RGB Description Description Recommended in most situations. For commercial printing. 107 PIXEL MAPPING Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures. 1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab. 2 Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pix-

el mapping. O Results are not guaranteed. Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping. Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-

vated. Processing may take a few seconds. SELECT CUSTOM SETTING Settings can be recalled from any of the seven custom settings banks. 6 CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 Banks Banks T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 108 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING Save up to 7 sets of custom camera settings for commonly-en-

countered situations. Saved settings can be recalled using H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> SELECT CUSTOM SETTING. 1 Press MENU/OK in shooting mode to display the shooting menu. Select the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab, then highlight EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING and press MENU/OK. 2 Highlight a custom settings bank and press MENU/OK to select. 3 Adjust the following as desired:

ISO DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. ab

(Warm/Cool) GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION 4 Press DISP/BACK. A confi rmation dia-

log will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 COLOR SPACE CUSTOM 3 PIXEL MAPPING CUSTOM 4 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 5 EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7 CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS ISO DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT

(Warm/Cool) SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 SET OK?

OK CANCEL 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s N To store current camera settings in the selected bank, highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS in Step 3 and press MENU/OK. To restore default settings for the current bank, select RESET. Banks can be renamed using EDIT CUSTOM NAME. 109 G AF/MF SETTING Adjust focus settings. To display focus settings, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab. AF/MF SETTING FOCUS AREA AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION AF POINT DISPLAY NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS PRE-AF AF ILLUMINATOR EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. FOCUS AREA Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus zoom. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 110 AF/MF SETTING AF MODE Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C. Option Option r SINGLE POINT y ZONE z WIDE/TRACKING j ALL Description Description The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus point. The number of focus points available can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING> NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Use for pin-point focus on a selected subject. The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects that are in motion. In focus mode S, the camera automatically focuses on high-contrast subjects; the areas in focus are shown in the display. In focus mode C, the camera tracks focus on the subject in the selected focus point while the shutter button is pressed halfway. The camera may be unable to focus on small objects or subjects that are moving rapidly. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 69, 70) to cycle through AF modes in the fol-

lowing order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE/

TRACKING. 111 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS Select focus-tracking options for focus mode C. Choose from Sets 15 according to your subject or select Set 6 for custom focus-tracking options. AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO OK Description Description A standard tracking option that works well with the typical range of moving subjects. The focus system attempts to track the chosen subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely to enter the focus area with the subject. The focus system attempts to compensate for subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity. The focus system attempts to focus quickly on subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subjects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects. Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only to sudden changes in velocity but also to large movements front to back and left to right. Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on the values for Sets 15 (P 113, 115). Option Option SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES &

CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/

DECELERATING SUBJECT 6 SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING SUBJECT T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING

& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT SET 6 CUSTOM 112 Focus Tracking Options AF/MF SETTING The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are described below. TRACKING SENSITIVITY TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. The higher the value, the longer the camera will wait. SETS THE TRACKING SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT TRACKING SENSITIVITY LOCKED ON QUICK ADJUST SWITCH 0 1 Options Options 2 3 4 O The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when you attempt to switch subjects. The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus from your subject to other objects in the focus area. SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how sensi-

tive the tracking system is to changes in subject velocity. The higher the value, the greater the precision with which the system attempts to respond to sudden movement. SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY 6 STEADY ACCEL./DECEL. SETS THE SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT ADJUST SWITCH T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 0 Options Options 1 2 O The higher the value, the more diffi culty the camera will have focusing in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when the subject is highly refl ective or low in contrast. 113 ZONE AREA SWITCHING ZONE AREA SWITCHING This parameter determines the focus area given priority in zone AF. ZONE AREA SWITCHING CENTER AUTO FRONT SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA ADJUST SWITCH Option Option FRONT AUTO CENTER Description Description Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera. The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it. Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone. O This option takes eff ect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode. Set Values Parameter values for the diff erent sets are listed below. SPEED TRACKING SPEED TRACKING TRACKING TRACKING SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY 2 3 2 0 3 0 0 2 1 2 ZONE AREA ZONE AREA SWITCHING SWITCHING AUTO CENTER AUTO FRONT AUTO 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SET 1 SET 1 SET 2 SET 2 SET 3 SET 3 SET 4 SET 4 SET 5 SET 5 114 Custom Focus Tracking Options AF/MF SETTING Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6. 1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 6 CUSTOM SET 6 CUSTOM. TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING ADJUST AUTO SET DETAIL RESET 2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their original values, press b. 3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete. STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION Choose whether the focus mode and focus area used when the camera is in portrait orientation are stored separately from those used when the camera is in landscape orientation. Option Option OFF The same settings are used in both orientations. Description Description FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately. ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately. AF POINT DISPLAY yz Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >

AF MODE. Options Options ON OFF 115 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se-

lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE. Option Option 117 POINTS

(9 13) 425 POINTS

(17 25) Description Description Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point grid. Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point grid. PRE-AF If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps prevent missed shots. Options Options ON OFF O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery. AF ILLUMINATOR If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist autofocus. Options Options ON OFF O The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator in some cases. If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the subject. Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subjects eyes. 116 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AF/MF SETTING FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING Intelligent Face Detection sets focus and exposure for human faces anywhere in the frame, preventing the camera from focusing on the background in group portraits. Choose for shots that empha-

size portrait subjects. You can also choose whether the camera detects and focuses on either the left or right eye when Intelligent Face Detection is on. Option Option Description Description FACE DETECTION ON Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust eye detection settings. g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only. u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye to focus on when a face is detected. w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority o . O If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture is taken. In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a whole rather than the portrait subject. FACE DETECTION ON is selected automatically in S ADVANCED SR AUTO mode. 117 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s N The face selected by the camera is indicated by a green border. Any other faces detected by the camera are indicated by white borders. To have the camera focus on a diff erent subject, tap inside the white border. The g icon will change from white to green. You can also switch subjects by pressing the function button to which n FACE SELECT op is assigned and then using the focus stick (focus lever) or (during viewfi nder photography) touch controls

(P 206). If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set time for its return and consequently the green frame may sometimes appear in locations where no face is seen. You cannot switch subjects during burst photography. Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-

entation. If the camera is unable to detect the subjects eyes because they are hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus on faces. Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts

(P 222). Using Touch Controls for Intelligent Face Detection The touch controls that can be used when framing pictures in the monitor vary with the touch screen mode (P 22). Option Option Description Description TOUCH SHOOTING TOUCH SHOOTING Tap a face in the display to focus and release the shutter. AFAF AREAAREA Tap a face in the display to lock focus. Tap faces to switch subjects. Tap anywhere else to temporarily suspend face detection and switch to single-point AF (P 67). 118 6 6 T T h h e e S S h h o o o o t t i i n n g g M M e e n n u u s s AF/MF SETTING AF+MF If ON is selected in focus mode S and focus has been locked

(whether by pressing the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring. Options Options ON OFF O Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the focus distance indicator. If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to infi nity or the minimum focus distance. N Standard and focus peaking MF assist options are supported. AF + MF Focus Zoom When ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK and SINGLE POINT selected for AF MODE, focus zoom can be used to zoom in on the selected focus area. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear com-

mand dial. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 119 MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Option Option STANDARD DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE DIGITAL MICROPRISM FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT Description Description Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, and digital microprism are not available). Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR) split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the three parts of the split image are correctly aligned. A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when the subject is in focus. The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level. N You can also choose MF assist options by holding the center of the rear command dial. FOCUS CHECK If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-

cus mode. Options Options ON OFF N Pressing the center of the rear command dial cancels focus zoom. The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes when the focus area is changed. 120 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s AF/MF SETTING INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA Select ON to meter the current focus frame when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE and SPOT is selected for PHOTOMETRY. Options Options ON OFF INSTANT AF SETTING Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode. Options Options AF-S AF-C 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 121 DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assess-

ments of depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of fi eld for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. PIXEL BASIS FILM FORMAT BASIS Options Options RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY Choose how the camera focuses in focus mode AF-S or AF-C. Option Option RELEASE FOCUS Description Description Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken when the camera is not in focus. Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only taken when the camera is in focus. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 122 TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. AF/MF SETTING Still Photography ModeMode TOUCH TOUCH SHOOTING SHOOTING AF AFOFF AREAAREA OFFOFF Description Description Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter. In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your nger on the display. In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. Touch focus and shooting disabled. 123 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Movie Recording ModeMode TOUCH TOUCH SHOOTING SHOOTING AFAF 6 AREAAREA T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Description Description Instead of pressing the shutter button, you can tap your subject in the display to focus and start recording. During recording, you can tap the display to focus as described below. To end record-

ing, press the shutter button. Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping your subject in the display. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-

lected by tapping the display. In manual focus mode (MF), the camera will focus using auto-

focus when you tap the display; during recording, you can tap the display again to move the focus area to a new location. Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use the button to which AF-ON is assigned. In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-

lected by tapping the display. In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to posi-

tion the focus area over your subject. OFFOFF Touch focus and shooting disabled. N To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-

tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. Choosing ON automatical-

ly sets B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE AF MODE set to AREA, even if MULTI is currently selected. 124 AF/MF SETTING Touch Controls for Focus Zoom Diff erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled). Central Area Central Area Tapping the center of the display performs the operations below. ModeMode Still Photography Still Photography Movie Recording Movie Recording TOUCH SHOOTING TOUCH SHOOTING AF-S/MF: Take a picture AFAF AREAAREA OFFOFF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF Other Areas Other Areas Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display, whether during still photography or movie re-

cording and regardless of the option selected for touch screen mode. 125 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s A SHOOTING SETTING Adjust shooting options. To display shooting options, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and se-

lect the A(SHOOTING SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. SHOOTING SETTING SCENE POSITION DRIVE SETTING SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT SELF-TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE EXIT SCENE POSITION Scene selection is available when the auto mode selector is ro-

tated to AUTO. ModeMode SSADVANCED ADVANCED SRAUTO SRAUTO hh PORTRAIT PORTRAIT ZZ PORTRAIT PORTRAIT ENHANCER ENHANCER MM LANDSCAPE LANDSCAPE NN SPORT SPORT NIGHT OO NIGHT HH NIGHT (TRIPOD) NIGHT (TRIPOD) pp FIREWORKS FIREWORKS QQ SUNSET SUNSET RR SNOWSNOW ss BEACH BEACH ff UNDERWATER UNDERWATER Description Description The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the scene. Choose for portraits. Processes portraits to give the subject a smooth, natu-

ral-looking complexion. Choose for daylight shots of buildings and landscapes. Choose when photographing moving subjects. Choose for poorly lit twilight or night scenes. Choose this mode for slow shutter speeds when shooting at night. Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the expanding burst of light from a rework. Choose this mode to record the vivid colors in sunrises and sunsets. Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness of scenes dominated by shining white snow. Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness of sunlit beaches. Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater lighting. 126 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SHOOTING SETTING Description Description ModeMode UU PARTY PARTY Capture indoor background lighting under low-light condi-

tions. E ective for taking more vivid shots of owers. Take clear pictures of text or drawings in print. FLOWER VV FLOWER WW TEXT TEXT N Scene selection is available only when the drive dial is set to S, CH(high-speed burst), CL (low-speed burst), or F (movie). Scene selection is not available when V is selected for movie mode. DRIVE SETTING Adjust settings for the various drive modes. Option Option BKT1 SETTING BKT2 SETTING CH HIGH SPEED BURST CL LOW SPEED BURST Description Description Choose the settings used when the drive dial is rotated to BKT1 or BKT2 (P 128). Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to CH (high-speed burst). The display frame rate when the electronic shutter is used is 40fps, or 60fps in 1.25 crop mode. Options Options 30fps(1.25X CROP) R *

10fps(1.25X CROP) R *

10fps R *

20fps(1.25X CROP) R *

20fps R *

8.0fps

* Available with electronic shutter only. Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to CL (low-speed burst). 5.0fps Options Options 4.0fps 3.0fps Adv. FILTER 1 SELECT Choose the lter used when the drive dial is rotated to Adv.1 Adv. FILTER 2 SELECT or Adv.2 (P 88). 127 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s BKT1 SETTING/BKT2 SETTING Choose bracketing settings for the BKT1 and BKT2 positions on the drive dial. Option Option Description Description The following options are available when the drive dial is rotated to BKT1 or BKT2. Bracketing type Bracketing type OO AE BKT AE BKT ISO BKT WW ISO BKT XX FILM SIMULATION BKT FILM SIMULATION BKT V V WHITE BALANCE BKT WHITE BALANCE BKT DYNAMIC RANGE BKT Y Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ZZ FOCUS BKT FOCUS BKT The following options are available when O AE BKT is chosen for BKT SELECT. Option Option Description Description Choose the number of shots in the bracket-

ing sequence and the amount exposure is varied with each shot. FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. STEP: Choose the amount exposure is var-

ied with each shot. 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing se-

quence are taken one at a time. CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken in a single burst. Choose the order in which the shots are taken. FRAMES/

STEP SETTING 1 FRAME/

CONTINUOUS SEQUENCE SETTING The following options are available when W ISO BKT is chosen for BKT SELECT. 13 Options Options 23 1 BKT SELECT AE BKT ISO BKT 128 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option Description Description SHOOTING SETTING FILM SIMULATION BKT Choose the three lm simulation types used for lm simu-

lation bracketing (P 100). The following options are available when V WHITE BALANCE BKT is chosen for BKT SELECT. WHITE BALANCE BKT 1 Options Options 2 3 The following options are available when Z FOCUS BKT is chosen for BKT SELECT. Option Option FRAMES STEP Description Description Choose the number of shots. Choose the amount focus changes with each shot. INTERVAL Choose the interval between shots. N Do not adjust zoom during shooting. The built-in ash will not re. FOCUS BKT Focus and FRAMES/STEP The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP is shown in the illustration. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s

:

Step Frames 1 2 3 4 5 Starting focus position Focus proceeds from the starting position toward in nity. Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger changes. Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reach-

es in nity. 129 SPORTS FINDER MODE Take pictures using the crop in the center of the display. Choose this option for pic-

tures of athletes, birds, and other moving subjects. Option Option ON OFF Description Description Pictures are taken using a 1.25 crop, reducing the picture angle by an amount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.25; the crop is shown by a frame in the display. The 1.25 crop is disabled. N The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-

ing menu is fi xed at P. The sports fi nder is not available in modes that off er an electronic shutter. PRE-SHOT sJ To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all the way down and the resulting picture being recorded to the memory card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic shutter when the shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a series shots starting just before the shutter button is pressed the rest of the way down. Options Options ON OFF N Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode. 130 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SHOOTING SETTING SELF-TIMER Choose a shutter release delay. Option Option R 2 SEC S 10 SEC OFF Description Description The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts down. The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken. Self-timer o . 9 If an option other than OFF is select-

ed, the timer will start when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The display shows the number of seconds re-

maining until the shutter is released. To stop the timer before the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK. O Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure. The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off . 131 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING Confi gure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset interval. 1 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab and press MENU/OK. INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES NUMBER OF TIMES INTERVAL 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the interval and number of shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed. 3 Use the focus stick to choose the starting time and then press MENU/OK. Shooting will start automatically. 6 END CANCEL START WAITING TIME LATER ESTIMATED START TIME 11 : 00 PM START CANCEL T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s CANCEL O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of B(bulb) or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released. N Use of a tripod is recommended. We recommend using an AC-5VG AC power adapter. The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before the next shot is taken. The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button. To continue shooting until the memory card is full, set the number of shots to . 132 SHOOTING SETTING PHOTOMETRY Choose how the camera meters exposure. O The selected option will only take eff ect when G AF/MF SETTING>

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is OFF. ModeMode o

(multi) p

(center-weighted) v

(spot) w

(average) Description Description The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recommend-

ed in most situations. The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the area at the center. The camera meters lighting conditions in an area at the center of the frame equivalent to 2% of the total. Recommended with backlit subjects and in other cases in which the background is much brighter or darker than the main subject. Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides con-

sistent exposure across multiple shots with the same lighting, and is particularly e ective for landscapes and portraits of sub-

jects dressed in black or white. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 133 SHUTTER TYPE Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute the shutter sound. Option Option Description Description t MECHANICAL SHUTTER s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Take pictures with the mechanical shutter. Take pictures with the electronic shutter. u MECHANICAL+ ELECTRONIC The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic shutter according to shooting conditions. If an option other than t MECHANICAL SHUTTER is selected, shutter speeds faster than 000s can be chosen by rotating the shutter speed dial to 4000 and then rotating the rear command dial. O When using the electronic shutter, note the following:

Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects. Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high shut-

ter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended. Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fl uorescent lights or other fl ickering or erratic illumination. When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 191), respect your subjects image rights and right to privacy. N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:

Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO12800160 Long exposure noise reduction has no eff ect The fl ash cannot be used 134 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s SHOOTING SETTING FLICKER REDUCTION Select ON to reduce fl icker in pictures and the display when shoot-

ing under fl uorescent lighting and other similar light sources. Options Options ON OFF O Enabling fl icker reduction disables the electronic shutter and increas-

es the time needed to record pictures. Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording. IS MODE Choose from the following image stabilization options:

Option Option L CONTINUOUS

+ MOTION l CONTINUOUS M SHOOTING

+ MOTION m SHOOTING ONLY OFF Description Description Image stabilization on. If + MOTION is selected, the cam-

era will adjust shutter speed to reduce motion blur when a moving objects are detected. As above, except that image stabilization is performed only when the shutter button is pressed halfway (focus mode C only) or the shutter is released. If + MOTION is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed to reduce motion blur when a moving objects are detected. Image stabilization o . Choose this option when using a tripod. N + MOTION has no eff ect when sensitivity is set to a fi xed value, and may also be unavailable at some other combinations of settings. The eff ect may vary with lighting conditions and the speed at which the object is moving. This option is available only with lenses that support image stabili-

zation. 135 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s ISO Adjust the cameras sensitivity to light. Option Option AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO3 Description Description Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting con-

ditions. 12800160 Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display. H (51200) H (25600) L (125) L (100) L (80) Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may appear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range. N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off . Adjusting Sensitivity High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 136 SHOOTING SETTING AUTO Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3. Defaults are shown below. Option Option DEFAULT SENSITIVITY MAX. SENSITIVITY MIN. SHUTTER SPEED AUTO1 AUTO1 800 Default Default AUTO2 AUTO2 160 1600 AUTO AUTO3 AUTO3 3200 The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-

fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED. N If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will au-

tomatically choose a minimum shutter speed approximately equal to the inverse of the lens focal length, in seconds (for example, if the lens has a focal length of 50mm, the camera will choose a minimum shutter speed in the neighborhood of 150s). The minimum shutter speed is not aff ected by the option selected for image stabilization. 137 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING Adjust settings for M-mount lenses connected using an optional FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER. Choosing a Focal Length Choose a lens number from LENS 1 through LENS 6 and enter the lens true focal length. LENS 5 INPUT FOCAL LENGTH Distortion Correction Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or WEAK options to correct BARREL or PINCUSHION distortion. SET CANCEL LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION BARREL STRONG BARREL MEDIUM BARREL WEAK OFF PINCUSHION WEAK PINCUSHION MEDIUM PINCUSHION STRONG 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 138 Color Shading Correction SHOOTING SETTING Color (shading) variations between the center and edges of the frame can be ad-

justed separately for each corner. To use color shading correction, follow the steps below. 1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The select-

NEXT SET ed corner is indicated by a triangle. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is no visible diff erence in color between the selected corner and the center of the image. Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the cyanred axis. Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the blueyellow axis. N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Peripheral Illumination Correction Choose from values between 5 and

+5. Choosing positive values increases peripheral illumination, while choosing negative values reduces peripheral il-

lumination. Positive values are recom-

mended for vintage lenses, negative val-

ues to create the eff ect of images taken with an antique lens or a pinhole camera. N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination cor-

rection while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. CANCEL SET 139 SHOOTING SETTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. The smartphone can then be used to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-

tures Upload location data to the camera N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 140 F FLASH SETTING Adjust fl ash-related settings. To display fl ash-related settings, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and se-

lect the F (FLASH SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Choose a fl ash control mode, fl ash mode, or sync mode or adjust the fl ash level. The options available vary with the fl ash. N For more information on fl ash settings, see External Flash Units (P 234) in Periph-

erals and Optional Accessories. RED EYE REMOVAL Remove red-eye eff ects caused by the fl ash. Option Option Description Description FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT MODE Built-In Flash ADJUST END 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s FLASH+REMOVAL A red-eye reduction pre- ash is combined with digital red-eye FLASH REMOVAL removal. Flash red-eye reduction only. Digital red-eye removal only. Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal o . N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL fl ash control mode. Digital red-eye removal is performed only when a face is detected. Digital red-eye removal is not available with RAW images. OFF 141 TTL-LOCK MODE Instead of adjusting fl ash level with each shot, TTL fl ash control can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-

graphs. Option Option Description Description LOCK WITH LAST FLASH Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most recent photo. LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre- ashes and locks ash output at the metered value. FLASH N To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 230). Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in eff ect. Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no previously metered value exists. LED LIGHT SETTING Choose whether to use the fl ash units LED video light (if avail-

able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. Option Option CATCHLIGHT AF ASSIST Role of LED video light in still photography Role of LED video light in still photography Catchlight AF-assist illuminator AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight OFF None N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. 142 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s FLASH SETTING MASTER SETTING Choose a fl ash group (A, B, or C) for the fl ash mounted on the camera hot shoe when it functions as a master fl ash controlling remote fl ash units via Fujifi lm wireless optical fl ash control, or choose OFF to limit master fl ash output to a level that does not aff ect the fi nal picture. Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF Options Options N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. CH SETTING Choose the channel used for communication between the mas-

ter fl ash and remote fl ash units when using Fujifi lm optical wire-

less fl ash control. Separate channels can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Options Options 143 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s B MOVIE SETTING Adjust movie-recording options. To display options for movie recording, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shoot-

ing mode selected. MOVIE MODE Before shooting movies, choose the frame rate, bit rate, and frame size and aspect ratio. MOVIE SETTING MOVIE MODE FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE

(Warm/Cool) EXIT MOVIE MODE 16:9 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-

light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the desired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stick right. Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ra-

tios of 16 or 17 to 9. Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9. 144 MOVIE SETTING 3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a frame rate (B) and press the stick right. Options Options 59.94P 50P 29.97P 25P 24P 23.98P 4 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight a bit rate (C) and press MENU/OK. Options Options 100Mbps 200Mbps 50Mbps N The choice of frame and bit rates varies with the movie mode. FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC Record high-frame-rate Full HD movies. High-frame-rate mov-

ies can be played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving subjects or details too fl eeting for the naked eye. Option Option 2x a59.94P F120P 2x a50P F100P 4x a29.97P F120P 4x a25P F100P 5x a24P F120P 5x a23.98P F120P Description Description Record Full HD footage at frame rates of 120 or 100fps. The movies play back at , , or speed. Maximum re-

cording length is 6 minutes. The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the goal of keeping the amount of data recorded to 200Mb per second. OFF High-speed recording off. N High-speed movies are recorded with no sound. 145 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s F FILM SIMULATION Choose a fi lm simulation eff ect for movie recording. Description Description See FILM SIMULATION (P 100). Option Option c PROVIA/STANDARD d Velvia/VIVID e ASTIA/SOFT i CLASSIC CHROME g PRO Neg. Hi h PRO Neg. Std X ETERNA/CINEMA a ACROS b MONOCHROME f SEPIA F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or cool color cast) to mono-

chrome pictures taken with the a ACROS or b MONOCHROME fi lm simulation. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option

+9 +1 0

-1 -9 Description Description Higher positive values equate to a redder color cast. Normal monochrome (grayscale). Lower negative values equate to a bluer color cast. 146 F WHITE BALANCE Adjust white balance for movie recording. MOVIE SETTING Description Description See WHITE BALANCE (P 102). Option Option AUTO k/l/m k i j k l m n g F DYNAMIC RANGE Choose a dynamic range for movie recording. Option Option V100%

W200%

X400%

Description Description See DYNAMIC RANGE (P 104). 6 N Auto dynamic range adjustment (AUTO) is not supported. W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800, X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 640 to 12800. The B MOVIE SETTING> F DYNAMIC RANGE option is available when OFF is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> F-Log RECORDING. 147 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s F HIGHLIGHT TONE Choose how the camera records highlights when shooting movies.

+4

+3

+2 Options Options

+1 0 1 2 F SHADOW TONE Choose how the camera records shadows when shooting movies.

+4

+3

+2 Options Options

+1 0 1 2 F COLOR Adjust color density for movie recording.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 148 MOVIE SETTING F SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines in movies.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 F NOISE REDUCTION Reduce noise in movies shot at high sensitivities.

+4

+3

+2

+1 Options Options 0 1 2 3 4 V INTERFRAME NR Select ON to enable interframe noise reduction. Options Options ON OFF N OFF is selected automatically at frames size other than V or when a frame size of V is combined with a frame rate of 59.94P or 50P. Ghosting may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved during shooting. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s F-Log RECORDING Select ON to record movies using a soft gamma curve with a wide gamut suitable for further processing post-production. Sensitivi-

ty is restricted to values between ISO640 and 12800. Options Options ON OFF 149 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF N If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera is attached using a FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER (available separately), peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the option selected for A SHOOTING SETTING > MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION in the shooting menu (P 139). Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this op-

tion. F FOCUS AREA Choose the focus area for movies shot using autofocus. You can also choose the focus area (and consequently also the focus zoom position) for movies shot using manual focus. MOVIE AF MODE Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording. Option Option MULTI AREA Description Description Automatic focus-point selection. The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area. 150 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s

 

 

Owners Manual BL00005003-200 EN Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents be-

fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be read by all who use the product. For the Latest Information The latest versions of the manuals are available from:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The site can be accessed not only from your computer but also from smartphones and tablets. It also contains information on the software license. For information on fi rmware updates, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software/

ii P Chapter Index Menu List 1 Before You Begin 2 First Steps 3 Basic Photography and Playback 4 Movie Recording and Playback 5 Taking Photographs 6 The Shooting Menus 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 8 The Setup Menus 9 Shortcuts 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 Connections 12 Technical Notes iv 1 25 41 47 53 97 161 185 221 233 249 261 iii Menu List Camera menu options are listed below. Shooting Menus Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies. N See page 97 for details. H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING G AF/MF SETTING M e n u L i s t IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION LONG EXPOSURE NR LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER COLOR SPACE PIXEL MAPPING SELECT CUSTOM SETTING EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING P 98 99 99 100 101 101 101 102 104 105 106 106 106 106 107 107 107 107 108 108 109 1313 2323 P FOCUS AREA 110 AF MODE 111 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 112 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 115 AF POINT DISPLAY yz 115 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 116 PRE-AF 116 AF ILLUMINATOR 116 FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 117 AF+MF 119 MF ASSIST 120 FOCUS CHECK 120 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 121 INSTANT AF SETTING 121 DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 122 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 122 123 3333 TOUCH SCREEN MODE 1313 2323 3333 iv A SHOOTING SETTING SCENE POSITION DRIVE SETTING SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT sJ SELF-TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION IS MODE ISO MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 1212 2222 F FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING P 126 127 130 130 131 132 133 134 135 135 136 138 140 P 141 141 142 142 143 143 M e n u L i s t Menu List B MOVIE SETTING P MOVIE MODE 144 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC 145 F FILM SIMULATION 146 F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) 146 F WHITE BALANCE 147 F DYNAMIC RANGE 147 F HIGHLIGHT TONE 148 F SHADOW TONE 148 F COLOR 148 F SHARPNESS 149 F NOISE REDUCTION 149 V INTERFRAME NR 149 F-Log RECORDING 149 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 150 F FOCUS AREA 150 MOVIE AF MODE 150 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING 151 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 152 F MF ASSIST 152 F FOCUS CHECK 153 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY 153 4K MOVIE OUTPUT 154 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT 154 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY 155 HDMI REC CONTROL 155 ZEBRA SETTING 155 ZEBRA LEVEL 155 AUDIO SETTING 156 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE 158 TIME CODE SETTING 158 TALLY LIGHT 160 MOVIE SILENT CONTROL 160 1144 2244 3344 4444 v C PLAY BACK MENU 2222 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SLIDE SHOW PHOTOBOOK ASSIST PC AUTO SAVE PRINT ORDER (DPOF) instax PRINTER PRINT DISP ASPECT P 178 179 179 180 181 182 183 184 The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. N See page 167 for details. C PLAY BACK MENU RAW CONVERSION ERASE CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING 1122 M e n u L i s t P 167 170 172 173 174 175 176 177 vi Setup Menus Adjust basic camera settings. N See page 185 for details. D USER SETTING P FORMAT 186 DATE/TIME 187 TIME DIFFERENCE 187 Qa 188 MY MENU SETTING 188 SENSOR CLEANING 189 SOUND & FLASH 189 RESET 189 D SOUND SETTING P AF BEEP VOL. 190 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 190 OPERATION VOL. 190 SHUTTER VOLUME 191 SHUTTER SOUND 191 PLAYBACK VOLUME 191 Menu List M e n u L i s t 1313 D SCREEN SETTING P EVF BRIGHTNESS 192 EVF COLOR 192 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 192 LCD BRIGHTNESS 193 LCD COLOR 193 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 193 IMAGE DISP. 194 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 194 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 195 NATURAL LIVE VIEW 195 FRAMING GUIDELINE 196 AUTOROTATE PB 196 FOCUS SCALE UNITS 197 APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS 197 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 198 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 199 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 200 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 201 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 201 2323 3333 vii M e n u L i s t 1122 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT CARD FOCUS RING FOCUS RING OPERATION AE/AF-LOCK MODE AWB-LOCK MODE APERTURE RING SETTING (A) APERTURE SETTING TOUCH SCREEN SETTING D POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE 2222 Menu List D SAVE DATA SETTING P FRAME NO. 213 SAVE ORG IMAGE 214 EDIT FILE NAME 214 SELECT FOLDER 214 COPYRIGHT INFO 215 D CONNECTION SETTING P Bluetooth SETTINGS 216 PC AUTO SAVE 217 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING 218 PC CONNECTION MODE 218 GENERAL SETTINGS 219 INFORMATION 219 RESET WIRELESS SETTING 219 P 202 203 204 207 208 208 208 209 209 209 209 210 210 210 211 P 212 212 viii P Table of Contents Introduction ........................................................................................................... ii For the Latest Information ............................................................................................ ii Menu List................................................................................................................iv Shooting Menus ................................................................................................................iv The Playback Menu .........................................................................................................vi Setup Menus .......................................................................................................................vii Supplied Accessories .......................................................................................xix About This Manual .............................................................................................xx Symbols and Conventions .........................................................................................xx Terminology ........................................................................................................................xx 1 Before You Begin Before You Begin 1 1 Parts of the Camera .............................................................................................2 The Serial Number Plate ................................................................................................4 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) .....................................................................................4 The Shutter Speed Dial...................................................................................................5 The Drive Dial .......................................................................................................................5 The Exposure Compensation Dial ...........................................................................5 The Auto Mode Selector Lever ..................................................................................6 The Command Dials ........................................................................................................7 The Indicator Lamp ..........................................................................................................8 Focusing the Viewfi nder ................................................................................................9 The LCD Monitor ................................................................................................................9 Camera Displays .................................................................................................10 The Electronic Viewfi nder ..........................................................................................10 The LCD Monitor .............................................................................................................12 Choosing a Display Mode .........................................................................................14 Adjusting Display Brightness ...................................................................................15 Display Rotation ...............................................................................................................15 The DISP/BACK Button ................................................................................................16 Customizing the Standard Display ......................................................................17 Using the Menus ................................................................................................20 Touch Screen Mode ...........................................................................................21 Shooting Touch Controls ...........................................................................................21 Playback Touch Controls ............................................................................................24 ix 2 First Steps First Steps 25 25 Attaching the Strap ...........................................................................................26 Attaching a Lens .................................................................................................28 Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card ................................................29 Compatible Memory Cards ......................................................................................32 Charging the Battery ........................................................................................33 Turning the Camera On and Off ...................................................................36 Checking the Battery Level.............................................................................37 Basic Setup ...........................................................................................................38 Choosing a Diff erent Language.............................................................................40 Changing the Time and Date ..................................................................................40 3 Basic Photography and Playback Basic Photography and Playback 41 41 Taking Photographs (Mode P) .......................................................................42 Viewing Pictures .................................................................................................45 Deleting Pictures ................................................................................................46 4 Movie Recording and Playback Movie Recording and Playback 47 47 Recording Movies ..............................................................................................48 Adjusting Movie Settings ...........................................................................................50 Viewing Movies ...................................................................................................51 5 Taking Photographs Taking Photographs 53 53 Choosing a Shooting Mode ...........................................................................54 Mode P: Program AE .....................................................................................................54 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE ......................................................................................56 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ..................................................................................59 Mode M: Manual Exposure .......................................................................................60 Auto Mode ..........................................................................................................................61 Autofocus ..............................................................................................................64 Focus Mode ........................................................................................................................65 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) ................................................................................67 Focus-Point Selection...................................................................................................69 Manual Focus.......................................................................................................73 Checking Focus ................................................................................................................75 x Table of Contents Exposure Compensation .................................................................................77 C (Custom) ..........................................................................................................................77 Focus/Exposure Lock ........................................................................................78 The AF-L and AE-L Buttons .......................................................................................79 Bracketing .............................................................................................................80 O AE BKT .............................................................................................................................81 W ISO BKT ..........................................................................................................................81 X FILM SIMULATION BKT ........................................................................................81 V WHITE BALANCE BKT ............................................................................................81 Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ..........................................................................................82 Z FOCUS BKT .................................................................................................................82 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) ............................................................83 Multiple Exposures ............................................................................................85 Advanced Filters .................................................................................................87 Advanced Filter Options .............................................................................................88 Panoramas ............................................................................................................89 Flash Photography.............................................................................................92 Flash Settings ....................................................................................................................94 6 The Shooting Menus The Shooting Menus 97 97 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING ................................................................................98 IMAGE SIZE ..........................................................................................................................98 IMAGE QUALITY ...............................................................................................................99 RAW RECORDING ............................................................................................................99 FILM SIMULATION ........................................................................................................ 100 B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) ............................................................................. 101 GRAIN EFFECT ................................................................................................................ 101 COLOR CHROME EFFECT......................................................................................... 101 WHITE BALANCE ........................................................................................................... 102 DYNAMIC RANGE ......................................................................................................... 104 D RANGE PRIORITY ...................................................................................................... 105 HIGHLIGHT TONE ......................................................................................................... 106 SHADOW TONE ............................................................................................................. 106 COLOR ................................................................................................................................. 106 SHARPNESS ...................................................................................................................... 106 xi NOISE REDUCTION ...................................................................................................... 107 LONG EXPOSURE NR .................................................................................................. 107 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ......................................................................... 107 COLOR SPACE ................................................................................................................. 107 PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................................. 108 SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................................................... 108 EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................... 109 AF/MF SETTING ................................................................................................ 110 FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................... 110 AF MODE ........................................................................................................................... 111 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ......................................................................................... 112 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................... 115 AF POINT DISPLAY yz ........................................................................................ 115 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS ................................................................................. 116 PRE-AF ................................................................................................................................. 116 AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................................... 116 FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 117 AF+MF ................................................................................................................................ 119 MF ASSIST ......................................................................................................................... 120 FOCUS CHECK ................................................................................................................ 120 INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA................................................................ 121 INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................................. 121 DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE ........................................................................................... 122 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ..................................................................................... 122 TOUCH SCREEN MODE ............................................................................................. 123 SHOOTING SETTING ....................................................................................... 126 SCENE POSITION ........................................................................................................... 126 DRIVE SETTING ............................................................................................................... 127 SPORTS FINDER MODE ............................................................................................. 130 PRE-SHOT sJ ............................................................................................................ 130 SELF-TIMER ....................................................................................................................... 131 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING .................................................................................. 132 PHOTOMETRY ................................................................................................................. 133 SHUTTER TYPE ............................................................................................................... 134 FLICKER REDUCTION .................................................................................................. 135 IS MODE ............................................................................................................................. 135 ISO ......................................................................................................................................... 136 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n xii 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING ................................................................................... 138 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 140 FLASH SETTING ................................................................................................ 141 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................... 141 RED EYE REMOVAL ...................................................................................................... 141 TTL-LOCK MODE ........................................................................................................... 142 LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................... 142 MASTER SETTING ......................................................................................................... 143 CH SETTING ..................................................................................................................... 143 MOVIE SETTING ............................................................................................... 144 MOVIE MODE .................................................................................................................. 144 FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC ...................................................................................... 145 F FILM SIMULATION ................................................................................................. 146 F B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool) ...................................................................... 146 F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................... 147 F DYNAMIC RANGE .................................................................................................. 147 F HIGHLIGHT TONE .................................................................................................. 148 F SHADOW TONE ...................................................................................................... 148 F COLOR ......................................................................................................................... 148 F SHARPNESS .............................................................................................................. 149 F NOISE REDUCTION .............................................................................................. 149 V INTERFRAME NR ................................................................................................... 149 F-Log RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 149 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................... 150 F FOCUS AREA ............................................................................................................ 150 MOVIE AF MODE .......................................................................................................... 150 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................... 151 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 152 F MF ASSIST .................................................................................................................. 152 F FOCUS CHECK ......................................................................................................... 153 HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY............................................................................... 153 4K MOVIE OUTPUT ...................................................................................................... 154 FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT ........................................................................................ 154 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY ................................................................................. 155 HDMI REC CONTROL .................................................................................................. 155 ZEBRA SETTING ............................................................................................................. 155 ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................... 155 xiii 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n AUDIO SETTING ............................................................................................................ 156 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE .............................................................................................. 158 TIME CODE SETTING .................................................................................................. 158 TALLY LIGHT ..................................................................................................................... 160 MOVIE SILENT CONTROL ......................................................................................... 160 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 161 Playback and the Playback Menu 161 The Playback Display ..................................................................................... 162 The DISP/BACK Button ............................................................................................. 163 Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................. 165 Playback Zoom .............................................................................................................. 166 Multi-Frame Playback ................................................................................................ 166 The Playback Menu ........................................................................................ 167 RAW CONVERSION ...................................................................................................... 167 ERASE ................................................................................................................................... 170 CROP .................................................................................................................................... 172 RESIZE .................................................................................................................................. 173 PROTECT ............................................................................................................................ 174 IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................... 175 RED EYE REMOVAL ...................................................................................................... 176 VOICE MEMO SETTING ............................................................................................. 177 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER ........................................................................................ 178 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 179 SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................... 179 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST .................................................................................................. 180 PC AUTO SAVE ................................................................................................................ 181 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ................................................................................................. 182 instax PRINTER PRINT ................................................................................................. 183 DISP ASPECT ................................................................................................................... 184 8 The Setup Menus The Setup Menus 185 185 USER SETTING .................................................................................................. 186 FORMAT ............................................................................................................................. 186 DATE/TIME ........................................................................................................................ 187 TIME DIFFERENCE ........................................................................................................ 187 Qa ................................................................................................................. 188 MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................................... 188 xiv 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents SENSOR CLEANING ..................................................................................................... 189 SOUND & FLASH ........................................................................................................... 189 RESET ................................................................................................................................... 189 SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................. 190 AF BEEP VOL. .................................................................................................................. 190 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. .............................................................................................. 190 OPERATION VOL. .......................................................................................................... 190 SHUTTER VOLUME ....................................................................................................... 191 SHUTTER SOUND ......................................................................................................... 191 PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................... 191 SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................. 192 EVF BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................... 192 EVF COLOR ....................................................................................................................... 192 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................... 192 LCD BRIGHTNESS .......................................................................................................... 193 LCD COLOR ...................................................................................................................... 193 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................... 193 IMAGE DISP. ..................................................................................................................... 194 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS ............................................................................................ 194 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ............................................................. 195 NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................... 195 FRAMING GUIDELINE ................................................................................................. 196 AUTOROTATE PB ........................................................................................................... 196 FOCUS SCALE UNITS .................................................................................................. 197 APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS ................................................................. 197 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................................ 198 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ......................................................................... 199 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ........................................................................ 200 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................... 201 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. ......................................................................... 201 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING ................................................................................ 202 FOCUS LEVER SETTING ............................................................................................. 202 EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.......................................................................................... 203 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ......................................................................................... 204 COMMAND DIAL SETTING ..................................................................................... 207 xv 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n SHUTTER AF..................................................................................................................... 208 SHUTTER AE..................................................................................................................... 208 SHOOT WITHOUT LENS ............................................................................................ 208 SHOOT WITHOUT CARD .......................................................................................... 209 FOCUS RING .................................................................................................................... 209 FOCUS RING OPERATION ........................................................................................ 209 AE/AF-LOCK MODE ..................................................................................................... 209 AWB-LOCK MODE ........................................................................................................ 210 APERTURE RING SETTING (A) ................................................................................ 210 APERTURE SETTING .................................................................................................... 210 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ........................................................................................ 211 POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................. 212 AUTO POWER OFF ....................................................................................................... 212 PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................................. 212 SAVE DATA SETTING ....................................................................................... 213 FRAME NO. ...................................................................................................................... 213 SAVE ORG IMAGE ......................................................................................................... 214 EDIT FILE NAME ............................................................................................................. 214 SELECT FOLDER ............................................................................................................ 214 COPYRIGHT INFO ......................................................................................................... 215 CONNECTION SETTING ................................................................................. 216 Bluetooth SETTINGS ................................................................................................... 216 PC AUTO SAVE ................................................................................................................ 217 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING ......................................................... 218 PC CONNECTION MODE.......................................................................................... 218 GENERAL SETTINGS .................................................................................................... 219 INFORMATION ................................................................................................................ 219 RESET WIRELESS SETTING ....................................................................................... 219 9 Shortcuts 221 Shortcuts 221 Shortcut Options ............................................................................................. 222 MY MENU ........................................................................................................... 223 MY MENU SETTING ..................................................................................................... 223 The Q (Quick Menu) Button ......................................................................... 225 The Quick Menu Display ......................................................................................... 225 Viewing and Changing Settings ......................................................................... 226 Editing the Quick Menu ........................................................................................... 227 xvi 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Table of Contents The Fn (Function) Buttons ........................................................................... 228 Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons ...................................................... 230 10 Peripherals and Optional Accessories Peripherals and Optional Accessories 233 233 External Flash Units ........................................................................................ 234 Using an External Flash ............................................................................................ 235 SYNC TERMINAL ............................................................................................................ 236 SHOE MOUNT FLASH ................................................................................................ 237 MASTER(OPTICAL) ....................................................................................................... 240 Lenses .................................................................................................................. 244 Lens Parts .......................................................................................................................... 244 Removing Lens Caps ................................................................................................. 245 Attaching Lens Hoods .............................................................................................. 245 Power Zoom ................................................................................................................... 246 Lenses with Aperture Rings................................................................................... 246 Lenses with No Aperture Rings ........................................................................... 247 Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ..................................................................................... 247 Manual Focus Lenses ................................................................................................. 248 Lens Care ........................................................................................................................... 248 11 Connections 249 Connections 249 HDMI Output .................................................................................................... 250 Connecting to HDMI Devices .............................................................................. 250 Shooting ............................................................................................................................ 251 Playback ............................................................................................................................. 251 Wireless Connections (Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) ................... 252 Smartphones and Tablets: FUJIFILM Camera Remote .......................... 252 Copying Pictures to a Computer: PC AutoSave ........................................ 254 Connecting to Computers via USB ........................................................... 255 Copying Pictures to a Computer ........................................................................ 257 Creating JPEG Copies of RAW Images:

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO....................................................................................... 258 Saving and Loading Camera Settings (FUJIFILM X Acquire) ............. 258 instax SHARE Printers .................................................................................... 259 Establishing a Connection ..................................................................................... 259 Printing Pictures ............................................................................................................ 260 xvii Table of Contents 12 Technical Notes Technical Notes 261 261 Accessories from Fujifi lm.............................................................................. 262 Software from Fujifi lm ................................................................................... 265 FUJIFILM Camera Remote ...................................................................................... 265 FUJIFILM PC AutoSave .............................................................................................. 265 MyFinePix Studio .......................................................................................................... 265 RAW FILE CONVERTER EX ........................................................................................ 265 FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ......................................................................................... 266 FUJIFILM X Acquire ..................................................................................................... 266 For Your Safety ................................................................................................. 267 Product Care ..................................................................................................... 276 Cleaning the Image Sensor ......................................................................... 277 Firmware Updates ........................................................................................... 278 Checking the Firmware Version .......................................................................... 278 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 279 Warning Messages and Displays ............................................................... 288 Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................. 291 Specifi cations ................................................................................................... 292 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n xviii Supplied Accessories The following are included with the camera:

NP-W126S rechargeable battery AC-5VG AC power adapter Plug adapter (Shape of adapter varies with region of sale) USB cable Body cap Metal strap clips ( 2) Clip attaching tool Protective covers ( 2) Shoulder strap Owners Manual (this manual) 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n N The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region. If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included. For information on compatible computer software, see Software from Fujifi lm (P 265). xix 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-T30 digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual:

O N Additional information that may be helpful when using the P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplifi ed, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. product. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as memory cards. The electronic viewfi nder may be referred to as the EVF and the LCD monitor as the LCD. xx MOVIE SETTING F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus mode C. TRACKING SENSITIVITY Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-

ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-

ject. See TRACKING SENSITIVITY (P 113). 0 1 AF SPEED Options Options 2 3 4 Adjust the autofocus response speed. Options Options 5 4 3 2 1 0

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 151 F FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording movies. Option Option FACE DETECTION ON OFF Description Description See FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING (P 117). Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority o . O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus using continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual focus mode. F MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode. Option Option Description Description STANDARD Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking is not available). FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 152 MOVIE SETTING F FOCUS CHECK If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-

cus mode. Options Options ON OFF HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected will mirror the information in the camera display. Options Options ON OFF 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 153 4K MOVIE OUTPUT Choose the destination for 4K movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI recorder or other device that supports 4K. Option Option b 4K Y 4K b 4K Y FHD b FHD Y 4K b Y 4K Description Description 4K movies are recorded to the camera memory card and out-

put to the HDMI device in 4K. 4K movies are recorded to a camera memory card in 4K and output to the HDMI device in Full HD. 4K movies are output to the HDMI device in 4K and recorded to the camera memory card in Full HD. 4K movies are output to the HDMI device in 4K. The camera does not record 4K movies to a memory card. N This option is only available when V 16 : 9 or d 17 : 9 is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE MODE in the shooting menu. FULL HD MOVIE OUTPUT Choose the destination for Full HD movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device. Option Option Description Description b FHD Y FHD Full HD movies are output to the HDMI device and recorded to the camera memory card. Full HD movies are not recorded to the camera memory card but are output to the HDMI device. b Y FHD N This option is only available when W 16 : 9 or W 17 : 9 is selected for B MOVIE SETTING> MOVIE MODE in the shooting menu. Movies are recorded to the memory card in 4:2:0 8-bit format. When OFF is selected for HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY, movies will be output to the HDMI device in 4:2:2 10-bit format. 154 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s MOVIE SETTING 4K HDMI STANDBY QUALITY Choose whether output to connected HDMI devices switches from 4K to Full HD during standby. Option Option V Output to HDMI devices continues at 4K during standby. Description Description W Output to HDMI devices switches to Full HD during standby, reducing the drain on the battery. HDMI REC CONTROL Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start and stop movie recording. Options Options ON OFF ZEBRA SETTING Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes in the movie mode display. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option ZEBRA RIGHT ZEBRA LEFT Right-slanting stripes. Left-slanting stripes. OFF Stripes o . Description Description ZEBRA LEVEL Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display. 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 Options Options 155 AUDIO SETTING Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording. INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Turn the built-in microphone o . EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for external microphones. Option Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels. Disable recording using external microphones. MIC LEVEL LIMITER Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the microphones audio circuits. Options Options ON OFF 156 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s MOVIE SETTING WIND FILTER Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie recording. ON LOW CUT FILTER Options Options OFF Choose whether to enable the low-cut fi lter, reducing low-fre-

quency noise during movie recording. Options Options ON OFF HEADPHONES VOLUME Adjust the headphone volume. Option Option 101 0 Description Description Choose a volume of from 1 to 10. Mute output to the headphones. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s 157 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/re-

mote release connector is a microphone or a remote release. Options Options m MIC n REMOTE TIME CODE SETTING Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) dis-

play settings for movie recording. TIME CODE DISPLAY Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and playback. Options Options ON OFF START TIME SETTING 6 Choose the time code starting time. T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Option Option Description Description MANUAL INPUT Highlight this option and press the focus stick (focus lever) CURRENT TIME right to choose a start time manually. Set the start time to the current time. Set the start time to 00:00:00. RESET 158 MOVIE SETTING COUNT UP SETTING Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during movie recording. Option Option REC RUN FREE RUN Description Description Time is clocked only during movie recording. Time is clocked continuously. DROP FRAME At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-

ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second). Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match the recording time to the time code. Option Option ON OFF Description Description The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict match between the time code and the actual recording time. Frames are not dropped. N The time code display varies with the option selected. 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s ON Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop. HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT OFF Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices. Options Options ON OFF 159 TALLY LIGHT Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. MOVIE SETTING Indicator lamp AF-assist illuminator Description Description The indicator lamp lights during movie recording. The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain o during movie recording. Option Option FRONT OFF REAR z FRONT OFF REAR y FRONT z REAR z FRONT z REAR OFF FRONT y REAR y FRONT y REAR OFF FRONT OFF REAR OFF MOVIE SILENT CONTROL Select ON to disable camera dials and adjust movie settings us-

ing touch-screen controls, preventing the sounds made by cam-

era controls being recorded with the movie (P 23). Options Options ON OFF 160 6 T h e S h o o t i n g M e n u s Playback and the Playback Menu 161 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 The Playback Display This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during playback. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. A BC D EF G H 01/01/2019 10:00 AM c b a Z Y X W V U I J T RS A Date and time .................................38, 40, 187 B Face detection indicator .............................117 C Bluetooth ON/OFF .......................................216 D Image transfer order....................................178 E Image transfer status .........................216, 252 F Number of frames selected for upload ...178 G Sound and ash indicator .........................189 H Frame number ..............................................213 I Protected image ...........................................174 J Location data .......................................219, 253 K Battery level .....................................................37 L Image quality ..................................................99 M Image size .........................................................98 N Film simulation .............................................100 O Dynamic range .............................................104 KLMNOPQ P White balance ...............................................102 Q Sensitivity........................................................136 R Exposure compensation ..............................77 S Aperture ...............................................55, 59, 60 T Shutter speed ......................................55, 56, 60 U Playback mode indicator .............................45 V Movie icon ........................................................51 W Time code .......................................................158 X Red-eye removal indicator ...............141, 176 Y Advanced lter ................................................87 Z Gift image .........................................................45 a Photobook assist indicator ........................180 b DPOF print indicator ...................................182 c Rating ..............................................................163 162 The Playback Display The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators during playback. Standard Information off 01/01/2019 10:00 AM FAVORITES Favorites Info display Favorites: Rating Pictures To rate the current picture, press DISP/BACK and press the focus stick (focus lever) up and down to select from zero to fi ve stars. 163 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Viewing Photo Information The photo information display changes each time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up. The Playback Display Basic data LENS FOCAL LENGTH COLOR SPACE LENS MODULATION OPT. 23.0mm F5.6 23.0mm sRGB ON 01/01/2019 10:00 AM S.S F ISO Info display 2 Info display 1 NEXT l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Zooming in on the Focus Point Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point. Press again to return to full-frame playback. 164 Viewing Pictures Read this section for information on playback zoom and multi-frame playback. Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Full-frame playback 100-0001 Multi-frame playback Playback zoom DISP/BACK MENU/OK Nine-frame view Medium zoom l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Hundred- frame view Maximum zoom 165 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Viewing Pictures Playback Zoom Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK, or the center of the rear command dial. N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE. Playback zoom is not available with cropped or resized copies saved at a size of a. Scroll When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick

(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the image not currently visible in the display. Navigation window Multi-Frame Playback To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-

mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame. N Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK to view the highlighted image full frame. In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or down to view more pictures. 166 C The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. The playback menu is displayed when you press MENU/OK in playback mode. PLAY BACK MENU RAW CONVERSION ERASE CROP RESIZE PROTECT IMAGE ROTATE RED EYE REMOVAL VOICE MEMO SETTING EXIT RAW CONVERSION Even if you dont have a computer, you can use the camera to modify RAW pictures and save them in JPEG format. Saving RAW Pictures in JPEG Format 1 Display a RAW picture. 2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu. 3 Press MENU/OK. RAW CONVERSION A list of settings will be displayed. REFLECT SHOOTING COND. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY PUSH/PULL PROCESSING DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a setting. CREATE CANCEL 5 Press the focus stick right to display options. RAW CONVERSION 100%

/

200%

400%

WB 167 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 6 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option. 7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to adjust additional settings. 8 Press the Q button. A preview of the JPEG copy will be displayed. 9 Press MENU/OK. The JPEG copy will be saved. N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-

ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 168 The Playback Menu The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from RAW to JPEG are:

Setting Setting REFLECT SHOOTING COND. REFLECT SHOOTING COND. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY IMAGE QUALITY PUSH/PULL PROCESSING PUSH/PULL PROCESSING DYNAMIC RANGE DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY D RANGE PRIORITY FILM SIMULATION FILM SIMULATION Description Description Create a JPEG copy using the settings in e ect at the time the photo was taken. Choose an image size. Adjust image quality. Adjust exposure. Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast. Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes. Simulate the e ects of di erent types of lm. B & W ADJ. B & W ADJ. aabb(Warm/Cool)

(Warm/Cool) Add a warm or cool cast to monochrome pictures. GRAIN EFFECT GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE WB SHIFT WB SHIFT HIGHLIGHT TONE HIGHLIGHT TONE SHADOW TONE SHADOW TONE COLOR COLOR SHARPNESS SHARPNESS NOISE REDUCTION NOISE REDUCTION Add a lm grain e ect. Deepen colors in shadows. Adjust white balance. Fine-tune white balance. Adjust highlights. Adjust shadows. Adjust color density. Sharpen or soften outlines. Process the copy to reduce mottling. LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER Improve de nition by adjusting for di raction and LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. Choose the color space used for color reproduction. COLOR SPACE COLOR SPACE 169 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 ERASE Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-

tures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. Option Option FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES Description Description Delete pictures one at a time. Delete multiple selected pictures. Delete all unprotected pictures. FRAME 1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. N A confi rmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK. Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the fo-

cus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 170 The Playback Menu SELECTED FRAMES 1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select. Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R). To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again. 3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a confi rmation dialog. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-

tures. N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S. ALL FRAMES 1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures. N Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted before the button was pressed cannot be recovered. If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures. 171 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 CROP Create a cropped copy of the current picture. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select CROP in the playback menu. 3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the picture until the desired portion is displayed. 4 Press MENU/OK to display a confi rmation dialog. 5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate fi le. N The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the cropped copy. If the size of the fi nal copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow. All copies have an aspect ratio of 32. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 172 The Playback Menu RESIZE Create a small copy of the current picture. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu. 3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confi rmation dialog. 4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate fi le. N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 173 PROTECT Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK. Option Option FRAME SET ALL RESET ALL Description Description Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete. Protect all pictures. Remove protection from all pictures. O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted. N Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smart-

phones or tablets removes upload marking. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 174 The Playback Menu IMAGE ROTATE Rotate pictures. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu. 3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture 90 clockwise, up to rotate it 90 counterclockwise. 4 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the camera. N Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-

tating pictures. The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when viewed on a computer or on other cameras. Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB are auto-

matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 175 RED EYE REMOVAL Remove red-eye from portraits. The camera will analyze the im-

age; if red-eye is detected, the image will be processed to create a copy with reduced red-eye. 1 Display the desired picture. 2 Select RED EYE REMOVAL in the playback menu. 3 Press MENU/OK. N Results vary depending on the scene and the cameras success in de-

tecting faces. The amount of time needed to process the image varies with the number of faces detected. Red eye cannot be removed from pictures that have already been processed using red-eye removal, which are indicated by a e icon during playback. Red eye removal cannot be performed on RAW images. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 176 The Playback Menu VOICE MEMO SETTING Add a voice memo to the current photograph. 1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu. 2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo. 3 Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-

cord the memo. Recording ends after 30s or when you re-

lease the dial. N The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos. Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures. Deleting the picture also deletes the memo. Playing Voice Memos Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback. To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front com-

mand dial. A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back. Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume. Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-

ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME. 177 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet. 1 Select IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER> SELECT FRAMES in the playback menu. 2 Highlight photos and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Re-

peat until all the desired photos have been selected. 3 Press DISP/BACK to exit to playback. N If ON is selected for both D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> Bluetooth ON/OFF and AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER, upload will begin shortly after you exit to playback or turn the camera off . N Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures. The following cannot be selected for upload:

- Protected pictures

- Movies

- RAW images

- Gift pictures (pictures taken with other cameras) If PAIRING/TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D CONNECTION SETTING > GENERAL SETTINGS > r BUTTON SETTING, photos can also be marked for upload using the Fn1 button. To remove upload marking from all pictures in the current order, se-

lect IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER> RESET ORDER. If ON is selected for D CONNECTION SETTING > Bluetooth SETTINGS> AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER, photos will automatically be marked for upload as they are taken. 178 The Playback Menu WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app. The smartphone can then be used to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-

tures Upload location data to the camera N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

SLIDE SHOW View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to start and press the focus stick (focus lever) right or left to skip ahead or back. Press DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view on-

screen help. The show can be ended at any time by pressing MENU/OK. N The camera will not turn off automatically while a slide show is in progress. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 179 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST Create books from your favorite photos. Creating a Photobook 1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU> PHOTOBOOK ASSIST. 2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-

ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the book is complete. N Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected for photobooks. The fi rst picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-

cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead. 3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-

lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu. N Books can contain up to 300 pictures. Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 Photobooks Photobooks can be copied to a computer using MyFinePix Studio software. 180 The Playback Menu Viewing Photobooks Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through the pictures. Editing and Deleting Photobooks Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-

screen instructions. EDIT: Edit the book as described in Creating a Photobook. ERASE: Delete the book. PC AUTO SAVE Upload pictures from the camera to a computer running the latest version of FUJIFILM PC AutoSave (note that you must fi rst install the software and confi gure the computer as a destination for images copied from the camera). N For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/pc_autosave/

l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 181 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) Create a digital print order for DPOF-compatible printers. 1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> PRINT ORDER (DPOF). 2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-

tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before proceeding. 3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the print order. 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to choose the number of copies (up to 99). N To remove a picture from the order, press the focus stick down until the number of copies is 0. PRINT ORDER (DPOF) DPOF: 00001 SHEETS 01 FRAME SET Total number of prints Number of copies l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 N Repeat steps 34 to complete the print order. 5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press MENU/OK to exit. N The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon during playback. Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures. If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-

other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as described above. 182 The Playback Menu instax PRINTER PRINT To print pictures to optional Fujifi lm instax SHARE printers, fi rst se-

lect D CONNECTION SETTING> instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and password, then follow the steps below. 1 Turn the printer on. 2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. instax-12345678 CONNECTING PRINTER PRINT 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 183 l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 The Playback Menu DISP ASPECT Choose how High Defi nition (HD) devices display pictures with an aspect ratio of 32 (this option is available only when an HDMI cable is connected). 3:2 16:9 Option Option 161699 3322 Display N Select 169 to display the image so that it fi lls the screen with its top and bottom cropped out, 32 to display the entire image with black bands at either side. l P a y b a c k a n d t h e P a y b a c k M e n u l 7 184 The Setup Menus 185 D USER SETTING Adjust basic camera settings. To access basic camera settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose USER SETTING. USER SETTING FORMAT DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE MY MENU SETTING SENSOR CLEANING SOUND & FLASH RESET EXIT FORMAT To format a memory card:

1 Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be dis-

played. To format the memory card, highlight OK and press MENU/OK. N To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK. FORMAT OK?

ERASE ALL DATA FORMAT CANCEL OK O All dataincluding protected pictureswill be deleted from the memory card. Be sure important fi les have been copied to a comput-

er or other storage device. Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding the b button. 186 USER SETTING DATE/TIME To set the camera clock:

1 Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. To change the order in which the year, month, and day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the focus stick up or down. 3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock. TIME DIFFERENCE Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the diff erence between your local and home time zone:

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the time diff erence between local time and your home time zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete. To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time zone, select h HOME. g LOCAL h HOME Options Options N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three seconds when the camera is turned on. 187 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Qa Choose a language. MY MENU SETTING Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-

tom menu of frequently-used options. 1 Highlight D USER SETTING > MY MENU SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab and press MENU/OK. MY MENU SETTING ADD ITEMS RANK ITEMS REMOVE ITEMS N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS. To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and press MENU/OK. Options that can be added to my menu are highlighted in blue. N MY MENU SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE

(Warm/Cool) SELECT CANCEL Items currently in my menu are indicated by check marks. 3 Choose a position for the item and press MENU/OK. The item will be added to my menu. SELECT ITEM LOCATION 1IMAGE SIZE 2IMAGE QUALITY 4 Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been added. N My menu can contain up to 16 items. MOVE SAVE 188 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 USER SETTING SENSOR CLEANING Remove dust from the camera image sensor. Option Option OK Clean the sensor immediately. Description Description WHEN SWITCHED ON Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is turned on. Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns o (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-

era turns o in playback mode). WHEN SWITCHED OFF N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed using a blower (P 277). SOUND & FLASH Select OFF to disable the speaker, fl ash, illuminator, and self-tim-

er lamp in situations in which camera sounds and lights may be unwelcome. Options Options ON OFF RESET Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values. 1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Option Option SHOOTING MENU RESET SET-UP RESET Description Description Reset all shooting menu settings other than custom white balance and custom settings banks created using EDIT/

SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values. Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME, TIME DIFFERENCE, and CONNECTION SETTING to default values. 2 A confi rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK. 189 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 D SOUND SETTING Make changes to camera sounds. To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SOUND SET-UP. SOUND SETTING AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. SHUTTER VOLUME SHUTTER SOUND PLAYBACK VOLUME EXIT AF BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options OPERATION VOL. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-

trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options 190 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SOUND SETTING SHUTTER VOLUME Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound. b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) Options Options SHUTTER SOUND Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter. i SOUND 1 Options Options j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3 PLAYBACK VOLUME Adjust the volume for movie playback. Options Options 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 191 D SCREEN SETTING Make changes to display settings. To access display settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SCREEN SET-UP. SCREEN SETTING EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF COLOR EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT LCD BRIGHTNESS LCD COLOR LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT IMAGE DISP. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS EXIT EVF BRIGHTNESS Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfi nder. Option Option AUTO MANUAL Description Description Automatic brightness adjustment. Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between +5 and 7. EVF COLOR Adjust the hue of the display in the electronic viewfi nder.

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Options Options EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfi nder. 1 Adjust colors using the focus stick EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT

(focus lever). SET CANCEL 2 Press MENU/OK. 192 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SCREEN SETTING LCD BRIGHTNESS Adjust monitor brightness.

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Options Options LCD COLOR Adjust monitor hue.

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Options Options LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor. 1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever). 2 Press MENU/OK. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 193 IMAGE DISP. Choose how long images are displayed after shooting. Option Option CONTINUOUS 1.5 SEC 0.5 SEC OFF Description Description Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus point, press the center of the rear command dial; press again to cancel zoom. Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter button is pressed halfway. Pictures are not displayed after shooting. N Colors may diff er slightly from those in the fi nal image. Noise mottling may be visible at high sensitivities. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS Choose whether the indicators in the viewfi nder and LCD monitor rotate to match camera orientation. Options Options ON OFF T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 194 SCREEN SETTING PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview in manual exposure mode. Option Option Description Description PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview. PREVIEW WB OFF Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in which exposure and white balance are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when you use a ash with an incandescent monitoring lamp. Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-

tion when using a ash or on other occasions on which expo-

sure may change when the picture is taken. NATURAL LIVE VIEW Choose whether the eff ects of fi lm simulation, white balance, and other settings are visible in the monitor. Option Option ON OFF Description Description The e ects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor, but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-

to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will di er from those in the nal picture. The display will however be adjusted to show the e ects of advanced lters and of monochrome and sepia settings. The e ects of lm simulation, white balance, and other settings can be previewed in the monitor. 195 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 FRAMING GUIDELINE Choose a framing grid for shooting mode. FF GRID 9 GRID 9 Option Option GG GRID 24 GRID 24 HH HD FRAMING HD FRAMING D i s p l a y For rule of thirds compo-

sition. A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the crop shown by the lines at the top and bottom of the display. N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed using D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 198). AUTOROTATE PB Choose ON to automatically rotate tall (portrait-orientation) pictures during playback. Options Options ON OFF T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 196 SCREEN SETTING FOCUS SCALE UNITS Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator. METERS FEET Options Options APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number

(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for still camera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the docu-

mentation provided with the lens. Option Option T NUMBER F NUMBER Description Description A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematogra-

phers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better cal-

culate exposure. A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers. Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that the same aperture may produce di erent exposures depending on the lens. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 197 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display. 1 In shooting mode, use the DISP/BACK button to display stan-

dard indicators. 2 Press MENU/OK and select D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab. 3 Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Default Default Default Default ItemItem FRAMING GUIDELINE ELECTRONIC LEVEL FOCUS FRAME AF DISTANCE INDICATOR MF DISTANCE INDICATOR HISTOGRAM LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT SHOOTING MODE APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO INFORMATION BACKGROUND Expo. Comp. (Digit) Expo. Comp. (Scale) FOCUS MODE PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLASH ItemItem CONTINUOUS MODE DUAL IS MODE TOUCH SCREEN MODE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION DYNAMIC RANGE BOOST MODE FRAMES REMAINING IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER MIC LEVEL GUIDANCE MESSAGE BATTERY LEVEL FRAMING OUTLINE R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes. 5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 198 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SCREEN SETTING LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfi nd-

er. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SETTING> LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 11). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 204, 230). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 199 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-

dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SETTING>

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 13). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 204, 230). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 200 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Choose the indicators displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SETTING>

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). SCREEN SETTING LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Expo. DISP. Scale Option Option AExpo. DISP. Bd Scale CL1, L2, L3, L4 DR1, R2, R3, R4 Description Description Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display. Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK. Select ON to display the exposure indicator. Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side of the screen. Choose up to four large icons for display on the right side of the screen. INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. Adjust display contrast. Option Option HIGH CONTRAST STANDARD LOW CONTRAST High contrast. Normal contrast. Low contrast. Description Description DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 201 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING Access options for camera controls. To access control options, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT CARD EXIT FOCUS LEVER SETTING Choose the functions performed by the focus stick (focus lever). Option Option LOCK (OFF) The focus stick cannot be used during shooting. Description Description PUSH n TO UNLOCK Press the stick to view the focus-point display and tilt the stick to select a focus point. Tilt the stick to view the focus-point display and select a focus point. ON T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 202 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU Choose the items displayed in the quick menu. 1 Select D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick

(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected position. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY FILM SIMULATION*

B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool)*

GRAIN EFFECT*

COLOR CHROME EFFECT*

DYNAMIC RANGE*

D RANGE PRIORITY*

WHITE BALANCE*

HIGHLIGHT TONE*

SHADOW TONE*

COLOR*

SHARPNESS*

NOISE REDUCTION*

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING*

AF MODE (MOVIE AF MODE) AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

* Stored in custom settings bank. N Select NONE to assign no option to the selected position. MF ASSIST TOUCH SCREEN MODE SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO*

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING FLASH COMPENSATION MOVIE MODE FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT SOUND & FLASH EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS EVF/LCD COLOR NONE When SELECT CUSTOM SETTING is selected, current settings are shown in the quick menu by the label BASE. N The quick menu can also be accessed in shooting mode by holding the Q button. 203 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the function buttons. 1 Select D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab. 2 Highlight the desired control and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected control. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE SELECT CUSTOM SETTING FOCUS AREA FOCUS CHECK AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS n FACE SELECT op FACE DETECTION ON/OFF DRIVE SETTING SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT sJ SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO IS MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FLASH FUNCTION SETTING TTL-LOCK MODELING FLASH FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC ZEBRA SETTING INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MOVIE SILENT CONTROL PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW HISTOGRAM ELECTRONIC LEVEL LARGE INDICATORS MODE AE LOCK ONLY AF LOCK ONLY AE/AF LOCK AF-ON AWB LOCK ONLY APERTURE SETTING PERFORMANCE AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION Bluetooth ON/OFF PLAYBACK NONE (control disabled) T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 204 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING N AE LOCK ONLY, AF LOCK ONLY, AE/AF LOCK, AF-ON, and AWB LOCK ONLY cannot be assigned to the touch function buttons (T-Fn1 through T-Fn4). Function button assignment options can also be accessed by hold-

ing the DISP/BACK button. AF-ON If AF-ON is selected, you can press the control instead of keeping the shutter button pressed halfway. MODELING FLASH If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-

ed fl ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fi re the fl ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling fl ash). TTL-LOCK If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock fl ash output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>

TTL-LOCK MODE (P 142). T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 205 n FACE SELECT op FACE SELECT ON n FACE SELECT op can be enabled or disabled by pressing the button to which n FACE SELECT op is assigned. Enabling n FACE SELECT op allows the focus stick (focus lever) or (during viewfi nder photography) touch controls

(P 21) to be used to select the face that will be used for focus. The following features can be accessed using the focus stick or during viewfi nder photography when n FACE SELECT op is enabled:

The face used to set focus can be selected using the focus stick. Press the center of the stick to temporarily enable focus-area selection (P 69). The touch screen (monitor) can be used to select the face used to set focus during viewfi nder photography. N n FACE SELECT op is automatically enabled in S ADVANCED SR AUTO mode. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 206 COMMAND DIAL SETTING Choose the roles played by the command dials. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING Option Option FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1 FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3 REAR COMMAND DIAL Description Description

(APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aper-

ture (APERTURE) 1 to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-

(EXP. erture COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-

(EXP. erture COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to the rear command dial.

(APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation 1 Aperture set to A (auto) and lens equipped with aperture ring or COMMAND selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> APERTURE RING SETTING (A). 2 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C. N COMMAND DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and holding the center of the front command dial. You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 207 SHUTTER AF Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Option Option AF-S AF-C Description Description ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway. OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed half-

way. OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. SHUTTER AE If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Option Option AF-S/MF AF-C Description Description ON: Exposure locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway. OFF: Exposure does not lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ON: Exposure locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. OFF: Exposure does not lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot taken in burst mode. SHOOT WITHOUT LENS Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is at-

tached. Options Options ON OFF 208 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING SHOOT WITHOUT CARD Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory card inserted in the camera. Option Option ON OFF Description Description When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be displayed. The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card. FOCUS RING Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-

crease the focus distance. X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise) Options Options FOCUS RING OPERATION Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-

ment of the focus ring. Option Option NONLINEAR LINEAR Description Description Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated. Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is ro-

tated, but the focusing speed is una ected by the speed the ring is rotated. AE/AF-LOCK MODE This option determines the behavior of the button to which exposure and/or focus lock is assigned. Option Option AE&AF ON WHEN PRESSING AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH Description Description Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed. Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and re-

main locked until it is pressed again. 209 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 AWB-LOCK MODE Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance (AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at the value metered by the camera when AUTO is se-

lected for white balance. Option Option Description Description AWB ON WHEN PRESSING AWB ON/OFF SWITCH Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed. Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end the lock. APERTURE RING SETTING (A) Choose whether the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture when aperture is set to A (auto). Option Option AUTO COMMAND Description Description The camera adjusts aperture automatically. Aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial. APERTURE SETTING Choose the method used to adjust aperture when using lenses with no aperture rings. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Option Option AUTO +

o MANUAL AUTO MANUAL Description Description Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture. Rotate past minimum aperture to choose A (auto). Aperture is selected automatically; camera functions in exposure mode P (program AE) or S (shutter-priority AE). Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture; camera functions in exposure mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (man-

ual). 210 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Enable or disable touch-screen controls. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING c TOUCH FUNCTION Enable or disable touch function gestures. Option Option x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING x DOUBLE TAP SETTING a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS Description Description ON: The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting. OFF: Touch controls disabled. ON: Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your sub-

ject during shooting. OFF: Touch zoom disabled. ON: The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback. OFF: Touch controls disabled. Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while the view nder is active. The area used for touch controls can be selected from:

6 (all) 0 (right half) 2 (top right quarter) 4 (bottom right quarter) Choose OFF to disable touch controls while the view-

nder is active. 1 (left half) 3 (top left quarter) 5 (bottom left quarter) T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 211 D POWER MANAGEMENT Adjust power management settings. To access power management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE EXIT AUTO POWER OFF Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automati-

cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off manually. 5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF Options Options PERFORMANCE Select BOOST to improve focus and viewfi nder display perfor-

mance. Option Option BOOST NORMAL AF performance AF performance

(speed)

(speed) Fast Normal Viewfi nder frame rate Viewfi nder frame rate

(approx.)

(approx.) Fast Normal Battery Battery endurance endurance Low Normal N When NORMAL is selected, the frame rate will drop when no oper-

ations are being performed. Operating camera controls returns the frame rate to normal. 212 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 D SAVE DATA SETTING Make changes to fi le management settings. To access fi le management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. SAVE DATA SETTING FRAME NO. SAVE ORG IMAGE EDIT FILE NAME SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO EXIT FRAME NO. New pictures are stored in image fi les named using a four-digit fi le number assigned by adding one to the last fi le number used. The File fi le number is displayed during playback as number shown. FRAME NO. controls whether fi le num-

bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or the current memory card is formatted. Directory number Frame number Option Option CONTINUOUS RENEW Description Description Numbering continues from the last le number used or the rst available le number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to reduce the number of pictures with duplicate le names. Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new memory card is inserted. N If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be dis-

abled. Format the memory card after transferring to a computer any pictures you wish to keep. Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. CONTINUOUS but does not reset the fi le number. Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may diff er. to 213 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 SAVE ORG IMAGE Choose ON to save unprocessed copies of pictures taken using RED EYE REMOVAL. Options Options ON OFF EDIT FILE NAME Change the fi le name prefi x. sRGB images use a four-letter prefi x

(default DSCF), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefi x (DSF) preceded by an underscore. Option Option sRGB AdobeRGB Default prefi x Default prefi x DSCF _DSF Sample fi le name Sample fi le name ABCD0001 _ABC0001 SELECT FOLDER Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent pictures. Description Description To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight an ex-

isting folder and press MENU/OK. Enter a ve-character folder name to create a new folder in which to store subsequent pictures. The new folder will be cre-

ated with the next picture you take and subsequent pictures will be stored in that folder. T h e S e t u p M e n u s Option Option SELECT FOLDER 8 CREATE FOLDER 214 SAVE DATA SETTING COPYRIGHT INFO Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information are refl ected only in images taken after the changes are made. Option Option Description Description DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information. ENTER AUTHORS INFO Enter the creators name. ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder. DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO Delete the current copyright information. This change applies only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright information recorded with existing images is not a ected. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 215 D CONNECTION SETTING Adjust settings for connection to other devices. To access connection settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose CONNECTION SETTING. CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING PC CONNECTION MODE GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING N For more information on wireless connections, visit:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/wifi/

EXIT Bluetooth SETTINGS Adjust Bluetooth settings. Option Option PAIRING REGISTRATION SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION DELETE PAIRING REG. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 Bluetooth ON/OFF AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SMARTPHONE SYNC. SETTING 216 Description Description To pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet, select this op-

tion, then launch FUJIFILM Camera Remote on the smart device and tap PAIRING REGISTRATION. Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the camera has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO CONNECTION to exit without connecting. Delete pairing information for selected devices. Choose the de-

vice in the device list. The selected device will also be removed from the devices listed in SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION. ON: The camera automatically establishes a Bluetooth con-

nection with paired devices when turned on. OFF: The camera does not connect via Bluetooth. ON: Mark photos for upload as they are taken. Mark JPEG photos for upload as they are taken. OFF: Photos are not marked for upload as they are taken. Choose whether to synchronize the camera to the time and/or location provided by a paired smartphone. LOCATION&TIME: Synchronize the time and location. LOCATION: Synchronize the location. TIME: Synchronize the time. OFF: Synchronization o . CONNECTION SETTING N Install the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app on your smartphone or tablet before pairing the device with your camera or uploading images. When ON is selected for both Bluetooth ON/OFF and AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER or images are currently selected for upload using the IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER option in the C(playback) menu, upload to paired devices will begin shortly after you exit to playback or turn the camera off . IMAGE TRANSER ORDER can also be used to select pictures for up-

load when AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER is off . PC AUTO SAVE Adjust settings for connection to computers via wireless LAN. Option Option Description Description Choose the method used for connection to computers via a wireless LAN. SIMPLE SETUP: Connect using WPS. MANUAL SETUP: Choose the network from a list (SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manually

(ENTER SSID). Remove selected destinations. View computers to which the camera has recently connected. PC AUTO SAVE SETTING DELETE REGISTERED DESTINATION PC DETAILS OF PREVIOUS CONNECTION T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 217 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifi lm instax SHARE printers. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. PC CONNECTION MODE Adjust settings for connection to a computer. Option Option Description Description USB CARD READER USB RAW CONV./

BACKUP RESTORE Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically enables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to the computer. The camera functions normally when not con-

nected. Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatical-

ly enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The camera functions normally when not connected. USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the cameras image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW les to high-quality JPEG images. BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and load camera settings. Recon gure the camera in an instant or share settings with other cameras of the same type. O D POWER MANAGEMENT> AUTO POWER OFF settings also apply during tethered shooting. Select OFF to prevent the camera turning off automatically. 218 T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 CONNECTION SETTING GENERAL SETTINGS Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Option Option NAME RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE H GEOTAGGING Description Description Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default). Choose whether to resize images for upload to smartphones. Resizing applies only to the copy uploaded to the smartphone;

the original is not a ected. ON: Larger images are resized to H for upload. This setting is recommended. OFF: Images are uploaded at their original size. Choose whether location data downloaded from a smartphone are embedded in pictures as they are taken. LOCATION INFO Display the location data last downloaded from a smartphone. r BUTTON SETTING Choose the role played by function buttons assigned the WIRELESS COMMUNICATION function. s PAIRING/TRANSFER ORDER: The buttons can be used for pairing and selecting images for transfer. r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION: The buttons can be used for wireless connections. INFORMATION View the cameras MAC and Bluetooth address. RESET WIRELESS SETTING Restore wireless settings to their default values. T h e S e t u p M e n u s 8 219 MEMO 220 Shortcuts 221 Shortcut Options Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation. Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-

tom my menu or assigned to an Fn (function) button for direct access:

Shortcut Option Shortcut Option My menu The Q menu Description Description Add frequently-used options to this custom menu, which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and se-

lecting the E (MY MENU) tab. The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button. Use the Q menu to view or change the options se-

lected for frequently-used menu items. The function buttons Use the function buttons for direct access to select-

ed features. PP 223 225 228 S h o r t c u t s 9 222 E MY MENU Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options. To display my menu, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the E (MY MENU) tab. MY MENU SELF-TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT SHUTTER TYPE IS MODE FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ISO EXIT N The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to MY MENU. MY MENU SETTING ADD ITEMS RANK ITEMS REMOVE ITEMS MY MENU SETTING To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 Highlight D USER SETTING > MY MENU SETTING in the D (SET UP) tab and press MENU/OK. N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS. To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and press MENU/OK. Options that can be added to my menu are highlighted in blue. N Items currently in my menu are indicated by check marks. MY MENU SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING FILM SIMULATION B & W ADJ. GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT WHITE BALANCE

(Warm/Cool) SELECT CANCEL S h o r t c u t s 9 223 3 Choose a position for the item and press MENU/OK. The item will be added to my menu. SELECT ITEM LOCATION 1IMAGE SIZE 2IMAGE QUALITY MY MENU 4 Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been added. MOVE SAVE N My menu can contain up to 16 items. S h o r t c u t s 9 224 The Q (Quick Menu) Button Press Q for quick access to selected options. The Quick Menu Display At default settings, the quick menu contains the following items:

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING BASE 400 SET END I HIGHLIGHT TONE J SHADOW TONE K COLOR L SHARPNESS M SELF-TIMER N AF MODE O FLASH FUNCTION SETTING P EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS A SELECT CUSTOM SETTING B ISO C DYNAMIC RANGE D WHITE BALANCE E NOISE REDUCTION F IMAGE SIZE G IMAGE QUALITY H FILM SIMULATION The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items BP, which can be changed as described on page 227. SELECT CUSTOM SETTING The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> SELECT CUSTOM SETTING item (item A) shows the current custom settings bank:

q: No custom settings bank selected. tu: Select a bank to view the settings saved using the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING option. rs: The current custom settings bank. S h o r t c u t s 9 225 Viewing and Changing Settings 1 Press Q to display the quick menu during shooting. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight items and rotate the rear command dial to change. Changes are not saved to the cur-

rent settings bank. Settings that diff er from those in the current settings bank (tu) are shown in red. SELECT CUSTOM SETTING BASE 400 SET END 3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete. N The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls. S h o r t c u t s 9 226 The Q (Quick Menu) Button Editing the Quick Menu To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during shooting. 2 The current quick menu will be dis-

played; use the focus stick (focus le-

ver) to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected position. IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY FILM SIMULATION*

B & W ADJ. ab(Warm/Cool)*

GRAIN EFFECT*

COLOR CHROME EFFECT*

DYNAMIC RANGE*

D RANGE PRIORITY*

WHITE BALANCE*

HIGHLIGHT TONE*

SHADOW TONE*

COLOR*

SHARPNESS*

NOISE REDUCTION*

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING*

AF MODE (MOVIE AF MODE) AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

* Stored in custom settings bank. N Select NONE to assign no option to the selected position. MF ASSIST TOUCH SCREEN MODE SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO*

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING FLASH COMPENSATION MOVIE MODE FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT SOUND & FLASH EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS EVF/LCD COLOR NONE When SELECT CUSTOM SETTING is selected, current settings are shown in the quick menu by the label BASE. N The quick menu can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU. 227 S h o r t c u t s 9 The Fn (Function) Buttons Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature. N The functions assigned to T-Fn1 through T-Fn4 can be accessed by fl icking the monitor. Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION. The default assignments are:

Fn1 button Fn1 button AE-L button AE-L button Performance AF-L button AF-L button AE lock only Center of rear command dial Center of rear command dial AF lock only Focus check S h o r t c u t s 9 228 T-Fn1 (fl ick up) T-Fn1 (fl ick up) T-Fn2 (fl ick left) T-Fn2 (fl ick left) The Fn (Function) Buttons Drive setting T-Fn3 (fl ick right) T-Fn3 (fl ick right) Film simulation T-Fn4 (fl ick down) T-Fn4 (fl ick down) White balance AF mode S h o r t c u t s 9 229 Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons To assign roles to the buttons:

1 Press and hold the DISP/BACK button until a control selection menu is dis-

played. 2 Highlight a control and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight the desired role and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected control. Choose from:

IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY WHITE BALANCE SELECT CUSTOM SETTING FOCUS AREA FOCUS CHECK AF MODE AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS n FACE SELECT op FACE DETECTION ON/OFF DRIVE SETTING SPORTS FINDER MODE PRE-SHOT sJ SELF-TIMER PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE FLICKER REDUCTION ISO IS MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FLASH FUNCTION SETTING TTL-LOCK MODELING FLASH FULL HD HIGH SPEED REC ZEBRA SETTING INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MOVIE SILENT CONTROL PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE NATURAL LIVE VIEW HISTOGRAM ELECTRONIC LEVEL LARGE INDICATORS MODE AE LOCK ONLY AF LOCK ONLY AE/AF LOCK AF-ON AWB LOCK ONLY APERTURE SETTING PERFORMANCE AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION Bluetooth ON/OFF PLAYBACK NONE (control disabled) 230 S h o r t c u t s 9 The Fn (Function) Buttons N AE LOCK ONLY, AF LOCK ONLY, AE/AF LOCK, AF-ON, and AWB LOCK ONLY cannot be assigned to the touch function buttons (T-Fn1 through T-Fn4). Button assignments can also be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. AF-ON If AF-ON is selected, you can press the control instead of keeping the shutter button pressed halfway. MODELING FLASH If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-

ed fl ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fi re the fl ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling fl ash). TTL-LOCK If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock fl ash output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>

TTL-LOCK MODE (P 142). S h o r t c u t s 9 231 n FACE SELECT op The Fn (Function) Buttons FACE SELECT ON n FACE SELECT op can be enabled or disabled by pressing the button to which n FACE SELECT op is assigned. Enabling n FACE SELECT op allows the focus stick (focus lever) or (during viewfi nder photography) touch controls

(P 21) to be used to select the face that will be used for focus. The following features can be accessed using the focus stick or during viewfi nder photography when n FACE SELECT op is enabled:

The face used to set focus can be selected using the focus stick. Press the center of the stick to temporarily enable focus-area selection (P 69). The touch screen (monitor) can be used to select the face used to set focus during viewfi nder photography. N n FACE SELECT op is automatically enabled in S ADVANCED SR AUTO mode. S h o r t c u t s 9 232 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 233 External Flash Units The camera can be used with external fl ash units, which are more powerful than their built-in counterparts. Some support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used at shutter speeds faster than the sync speed, while others can func-

tion as master fl ash units controlling remote units via opti-

cal wireless fl ash control. O You may be unable to test-fi re the fl ash in some circumstances, for ex-

ample when a setup menu is displayed on the camera. Red-Eye Removal Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected for F FLASH SETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL and a FACE DETECTION ON option is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING. Red-eye removal minimizes red-eye caused when light from the fl ash is refl ected from the subjects retinas. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 234 Using an External Flash 1 Connect the unit to the camera. 2 In shooting mode, select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH SETTING) menu tab. The options available vary with the fl ash unit. External Flash Units FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING MASTER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT MenuMenu Description Description Built-In Flash Displayed when the built-in ash is raised. SYNC TERMINAL SHOE MOUNT FLASH MASTER

(OPTICAL) Sync terminal options will be displayed if the built-in ash is lowered and either no ash unit, or an incompatible ash unit, is mounted on the hot shoe. Displayed when an optional ash unit is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on. Displayed if an optional ash unit functioning as a master ash for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control is connected and turned on. PP 92 236 237 240 3 Highlight items using the focus stick

(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-

mand dial to change the highlighted setting. MODE Built-In Flash 4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into eff ect. ADJUST END P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 235 SYNC TERMINAL SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the built-in fl ash is lowered and either no fl ash unit, or an incompatible fl ash unit, is mounted on the hot shoe. MODE SYNC TERMINAL Setting Setting A Flash control mode B Sync ADJUST END Description Description Choose from the following options:

M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the unit uses long ashes or has a slow response time. D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled. Choose whether the ash is timed to re immediately after the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 236 SHOE MOUNT FLASH The shoe-mounted fl ash unit is attached and turned on. following options are available when an optional External Flash Units MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH Setting Setting ADJUST END Description Description A Flash control mode The ash control mode selected with the ash unit. This can in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-

able vary with the ash. TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ash compensation (B). M: The ash res at the selected output regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be adjusted from the camera (B). MULTI: Repeating ash. Compatible shoe-mounted ash units will re multiple times with each shot. D (OFF): The ash does not re. Some ash units can be turned o from the camera. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 237 Setting Setting Description Description The options available vary with ash control mode. TTL: Adjust ash compensation (the full value may not be applied if the limits of the ash control system are exceed-

ed). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the select-

ed value is added to the value selected with the ash unit. M/MULTI: Adjust ash output (compatible units only). Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power, from (mode M) or (MULTI) down to in increments equivalent to EV. The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the ash control system; take a test shot and check the results. Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options avail-

able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash lev-

el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-

cates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possible;

ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Control ash timing. H (1ST CURTAIN): The ash res immediately after the shut-

ter opens (generally the best choice). I (2ND CURTAIN): The ash res immediately before the shutter closes. R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-

speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for ash control mode. B Flash compensation/

output C Flash mode (TTL) D Sync 238 P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 Setting Setting Description Description External Flash Units E Zoom F Lighting G LED light The angle of illumination ( ash coverage) for units that sup-

port ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-

matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage. K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-

raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT), as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-

light and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT). Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography. G Number of fl ashes * Choose the number of times the ash res each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the frequency at which the ash res in MULTI mode. H Frequency *

* Full value may not be applied if limits of ash control system are exceeded. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 239 MASTER(OPTICAL) The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning as master fl ash for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control. MODE MASTER(OPTICAL) ADJUST END The master and remote units can be placed in up to three groups (A, B, and C) and fl ash mode and fl ash level adjusted separately for each group. Four chan-

nels are available for communication be-

tween the units; separate channels can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent interference when multiple sys-

tems are operating in close proximity. C A BB P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 240 Setting Setting Description Description External Flash Units A Flash control mode

(group A) B Flash control mode

(group B) C Flash control mode

(group C) D Flash compensation/

output (group A) E Flash compensation/

output (group B) F Flash compensation/

output (group C) Choose ash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%

is available for groups A and B only. TTL: The units in the group re in TTL mode. Flash com-

pensation can be adjusted separately for each group. TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can specify the output of the selected group as a percent-

age of the other and adjust overall ash compensation for both groups. M: In mode M, the units in the group re at the selected output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units in all groups to repeating ash mode. All units will re multiple times with each shot. D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will not re. Adjust ash level for the selected group according to option selected for ash control mode. Note that the full value may not be applied if the limits of the ash control system are exceeded. TTL: Adjust ash compensation. M/MULTI: Adjust ash output. TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and adjust overall ash compensation. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 241 Setting Setting Description Description Choose a ash mode for TTL ash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-

lected. E (FLASH AUTO): The ash res only as required; ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A picon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ash will re when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The ash res with every shot if possi-

ble; ash level is adjusted according to subject bright-

ness. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The ash will not re if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Control ash timing. H (1ST CURTAIN): The ash res immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice). I (2ND CURTAIN): The ash res immediately before the shutter closes. R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-

speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for ash control mode. The angle of illumination ( ash coverage) for units that support ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. G Flash mode (TTL) P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 H Sync I Zoom 242 Setting Setting Description Description External Flash Units J Lighting K Master K Number of fl ashes L Channel L Frequency If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-

ducing coverage. K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. Assign the master ash to group A (Gr A), B (Gr B), or C(Gr C). If OFF is selected, output from the master ash will be held to a level that does not a ect the nal picture. Available only if the unit is mounted on the camera hot shoe as a master ash for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control in TTL, TTL%, or M mode. Choose the number of times the ash res each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the channel used by the master ash for commu-

nication with the remote ash units. Separate channels can be used for di erent ash systems or to prevent in-

terference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. Choose the frequency at which the ash res in MULTI mode. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 243 Lenses The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Lens Parts P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 A Lens hood B Mounting marks C Focus ring D Zoom ring E Aperture ring F O.I.S. switch G Aperture mode switch H Lens signal contacts I Front lens cap J Rear lens cap 244 Removing Lens Caps Remove lens caps as shown. N Lens caps may diff er from those shown. Lenses Attaching Lens Hoods When attached, lens hoods reduce glare and protect the front lens element. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 245 Power Zoom The focus ring can be used to adjust zoom when autofocus is enabled. Lenses with Aperture Rings At settings other than A, you can adjust aperture by rotating the lens aperture ring (exposure modes A and M). N When the aperture ring is set to A, rotate the command dials to adjust aperture

(P 207). The Aperture Mode Switch If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aper-

ture can be adjusted manually by sliding the switch to Z and rotating the aperture ring. A 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8 A 16 11 8 5.6 4 Aperture ring Aperture ring Aperture mode switch P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 246 Lenses Lenses with No Aperture Rings The method used to adjust aperture can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING. When an option other than AUTO is selected, aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial. N Aperture control defaults to the front command dial, but can be reas-

signed to the rear command dial using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>

COMMAND DIAL SETTING. Lenses with O.I.S. Switches If the lens supports optical image sta-

bilization (O.I.S.), the image stabiliza-

tion mode can be chosen in the camera menus. To activate image stabilization, slide the O.I.S. switch to ON. O.I.S. switch P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 247 Manual Focus Lenses Slide the focus ring to the front for aut-

ofocus. Lenses For manual focus, slide the focus ring to the back and rotate it while checking the results in the camera display. The focus distance and depth-of-fi eld indicators can be used to assist manual focus. O Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes. The Depth-of-Field Indicator The depth-of-fi eld indicator shows the approxi-

mate depth of fi eld (the distance in front of and behind the focus point that appears to be in focus). The indicator is displayed in fi lm format. Lens Care Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifi lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fl uid has been applied. Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use. P e r i p h e r a l s a n d O p t i o n a l A c c e s s o r i e s 10 248 Connections 249 HDMI Output Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI devices. Connecting to HDMI Devices Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a third-party HDMI cable. 1 Turn the camera off . 2 Connect the cable as shown below. Insert into HDMI connector Insert into HDMI Micro connector (Type D) 3 Confi gure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-

umentation supplied with the device. 4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off in playback mode (P 251). O Making sure the connectors are fully inserted. The USB cable cannot be used while an HDMI cable is connected. Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 250 HDMI Output Shooting Shoot photos and record movies while viewing the scene through the camera lens on or saving footage to the HDMI device. N This feature can be used to save 4K and Full HD movies to an HDMI recorder. Playback To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera mon-

itor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI device. Note that the camera volume controls have no eff ect on sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to adjust the volume. N Some televisions may briefl y display a black screen when movie play-

back begins. An adapter cable (sold separately; P 295) is required when using headphones. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 251 Wireless Connections

(Bluetooth, Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi) Access wireless networks and connect to computers, smartphones, or tablets. For more information, visit:

http://fujifilm-dsc.com/wifi/

Smartphones and Tablets: FUJIFILM Camera Remote Connect to the camera via Bluetooth or wireless LAN. N To establish a wireless connection to the camera, you will need to in-

stall the latest version of the FUJIFILM Camera Remote app on your smartphone or tablet. FUJIFILM Camera Remote Once a connection has been established, you can use FUJIFILM Camera Remote to:

Control the camera and take pictures remotely Receive pictures uploaded from the camera Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures Upload location data to the camera Release the camera shutter Update camera fi rmware For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

C o n n e c t i o n s 11 252 Wireless Connections SmartPhones and Tablets: Bluetooth Pairing Use D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> PAIRING REGISTRATION to pair the camera with smartphones or tablets. Pairing off ers a simple method for downloading photos from the camera. N Photos are downloaded via a wireless connection. Once pairing is complete, you will be able to synchronize the camera clock and location data with the smartphone or tablet (P 216). You can choose a connection from up to 7 paired smartphones or tablets. Smartphones and Tablets: Wireless LAN Use the WIRELESS COMMUNICATION options in A SHOOTING SETTING or the playback menu to connect to a smartphone or tab-

let via a Wireless LAN. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 253 Wireless Connections Copying Pictures to a Computer: PC AutoSave Install the latest version of FUJIFILM PC Autosave to your com-

puter to upload pictures from the camera over wireless networks

(Wi-Fi). FUJIFILM PC AutoSave For downloads and other information, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/pc_autosave/

Computers: Wireless Connections You can upload pictures from the camera using the PC AUTO SAVE option in the playback menu. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 254 Connecting to Computers via USB Connect the camera to a computer to download pictures or take pictures remotely. N Before downloading pictures or taking pictures remotely, connect the camera to a computer and check that it functions normally. 1 Turn the computer on. 2 Adjust settings according to whether you will be copying pictures to a computer (P 257), save RAW pictures in other formats (P 258), or Saving and Loading Camera Settings

(P 258). 3 Turn the camera off . 4 Connect a USB cable. USB connector (Type-C) O The USB cable must be no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long and be suitable for data transfer. 5 Turn the camera on. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 255 6 Copy pictures to your computer. Image transfer: Use MyFinePix Studio or applications provid-

ed with your operating system. RAW conversion: Process RAW images using FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO. The power of the cameras image processing en-

gine is used for rapid processing. Saving and loading camera settings: Use FUJIFILM X Acquire to save or load camera settings. Save your preferred settings to a fi le in a single operation and copy them to multiple cameras. O Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable. When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-

serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-

necting the camera. If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted, there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be unable to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer pictures. Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning the camera off . Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-

alone computer. Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-

connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has ceased to be displayed. The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet connection. 256 C o n n e c t i o n s 11 Connecting to Computers via USB Copying Pictures to a Computer Before copying pictures to a computer, select USB CARD READER for D CON-

NECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE. The software that can be used to copy pictures varies with your computer op-

erating system. Mac OS X/macOS CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE SETTINGS PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING USB CARD READER USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE PC CONNECTION MODE GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING Pictures can be copied to your computer using Image Capture

(supplied with your computer) or other software. O Use a card reader to copy fi les over 4GB in size. Windows Use MyFinePix Studio to copy pictures to your computer, where they can be stored, viewed, organized, and printed. N For more information on MyFinePix Studio, see Software from Fujifi lm

(P 265). C o n n e c t i o n s 11 257 Connecting to Computers via USB Creating JPEG Copies of RAW Images:

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO Before proceeding, select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for D CON-

NECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO can be used to create JPEG copies of RAW images. N For more information on FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO, see Software from PC CONNECTION MODE GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE SETTINGS USB CARD READER USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Fujifi lm (P 265). Saving and Loading Camera Settings (FUJIFILM X Acquire) Before proceeding, select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for D CON-

NECTION SETTING> PC CONNECTION MODE in the camera menus. FUJIFILM X Acquire can be used to save and load camera settings. N For more information on FUJIFILM X Acquire, see Software from PC CONNECTION MODE GENERAL SETTINGS INFORMATION RESET WIRELESS SETTING CONNECTION SETTING Bluetooth SETTINGS PC AUTO SAVE SETTINGS USB CARD READER USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Fujifi lm (P 265). C o n n e c t i o n s 11 258 instax SHARE Printers Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE printers. Establishing a Connection Select D CONNECTION SETTING> instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and pass-

word. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is 1111. If you have already chosen a diff erent password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 259 Printing Pictures 1 Turn the printer on. 2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-

nect to the printer. instax SHARE Printers PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 4 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. C o n n e c t i o n s 11 260 Technical Notes 261 Accessories from Fujifi lm The following optional accessories are available from Fujifi lm. For the latest information on the accessories available in your region, check with your local Fujifi lm representative or visit http://www.fujifilm.com/products/digital_cameras/index.html. Rechargeable Li-ion batteries Rechargeable Li-ion batteries NP-W126/NP-W126S: Additional high-capacity NP-W126/NP-W126S rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required. Battery chargers Battery chargers BC-W126/BC-W126S: Replacement battery chargers can be purchased as required. At +20 C/+68 F, the BC-W126/BC-W126S charges an NP-W126/NP-W126S in about 150 minutes. DC couplers DC couplers CP-W126: For extended shooting or playback or when using the camera with a computer, use the CP-W126 to connect the camera to the AC-9V power adapter. AC power adapters AC power adapters AC-9V (requires CP-W126 DC coupler): Use this 100240V, 50/60Hz AC power adapter for extended shooting and playback or when copying pictures to a computer. Remote releases Remote releases RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time ex-

posure (2.5mm). Stereo microphones Stereo microphones MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording. FUJINON lenses FUJINON lenses XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM X-mount. FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount. Macro extension tubes Macro extension tubes MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduc-

tion ratios. 262 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Accessories from Fujifi lm Teleconverters Teleconverters XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4. XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0. Mount adapters Mount adapters FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selection of M-mount lenses. Body caps Body caps BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached. SShoe-mounted fl ash units hoe-mounted fl ash units EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL ash control, this clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-

lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ash sync speed. Featuring support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fuji lm optical wireless ash control, it can be used as a master or remote ash unit for remote wireless ash photography. EF-BP1: A battery pack for shoe-mounted ash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries. EF-42: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports manual and TTL ash control. EF-X20: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports manual and TTL ash control. EF-20: This clip-on ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports TTL ash control (manual ash control is not supported). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 263 Accessories from Fujifi lm HHand grips and grips MHG-XT10: Features an improved grip. Batteries and memory cards can be re-

moved with the grip in place, and the grip is equipped with a rail for quick-shoe camera mounts. Leather cases Leather cases BLC-XT10: This case combines practicality with the luxury of leather and comes with a shoulder strap made of the same material, as well as a cloth that can be used to wrap the camera before putting it in the case and on other occasions. Pictures can be taken and batteries inserted or removed with the camera still in its case. Grip belts Grip belts GB-001: Improves grip. Combine with a hand grip for more secure handling. iinstax SHARE printers nstax SHARE printers SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax lm. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 264 Software from Fujifi lm The camera can be used with the following Fujifi lm software. FUJIFILM Camera Remote Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a smartphone or tablet (P 252). http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

FUJIFILM PC AutoSave Download pictures from your camera over wireless networks

(P 254). http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/pc_autosave/

MyFinePix Studio Manage, view, print, and edit the many images downloaded from your digital camera (P 257). http://fujifilm-dsc.com/mfs/

Once download is complete, double-click the downloaded fi le

(MFPS_Setup.EXE) and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation. RAW FILE CONVERTER EX View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into oth-

er formats. http://fujifilm-dsc.com/rfc/

T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 265 Software from Fujifi lm FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILMX RAW STUDIO can use the cameras unique image processing en-

gine to rapidly convert RAW fi les to high-quality JPEG images. http://fujifilm-x.com/x-stories/fujifilm-x-raw-studio-features-

users-guide/

FUJIFILM X Acquire Save and load camera settings. Reconfi gure the camera in an in-

stant or share settings with other cameras of the same type. http://fujifilm-x.com/x-stories/fujifilm-x-acquire-features-users-guide/

O The camera does not support tethered photography. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 266 For Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read Instructions Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. Retain Instructions Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions Follow Instructions: All operating and use should be followed. instructions Installation Installation Power Sources: This video product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-

bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-

pany. For video products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will t into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to t, contact your electri-

cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third

(grounding) pin. This plug will only t into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-

place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of re or electric shock. Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-

uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been ad-

hered to. This video product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-

terfor example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-

tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Antennas Antennas Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-

tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-

ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Ground Clamp t Electric Service Equipment e Equipment Ground Clamps Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC ART 250. PART H) AAntenna Lead in Wire AAAntenna An Discharge Unit D

(NEC SECTION N 810-20) 8 Grounding Conductors (NEC SECTION 810-21) 267 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-

ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. UseUse Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-

fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into this video product through openings as they may touch dan-

gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the video product. Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-

ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and power-line surges. Service Service Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali ed service personnel. Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to quali ed service person-

nel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the video product. If the video product has been exposed to rain or water. If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. If the video product does not operate normally follow the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-

ment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali ed technician to restore the video product to its normal operation. When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-

i ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards. Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to this video product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-

er operating condition. Be sure to read these notes before use Safety Notes Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these safety notes and your Owners Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious in-

WARNING jury can result if the information is ignored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION Unplug from power socket The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 268 The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-

resent the following:

AC DC Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.) WARNING WARNING If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the If a problem arises, turn the camera off , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC unplug the AC power adapter. power adapter. Continued use of the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-

era or connecting cables. era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids. Should liquid nd its way into the camera or con-

necting cables, turn the camera o , remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not use in the bathroom or shower Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts WARNING WARNING Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This can cause a re or electric shock. Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-

tion cord. tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and cause a re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, contact your Fuji lm dealer. Do not use cables with bent connectors. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause injury. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not use the camera while walking or driving. This can result in you falling down or being involved in a tra c accident. Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a thunderstorm. thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due to induced current from the lightning discharge. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Do not use the battery except as specifi ed. Load the battery as shown by the indicator. Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Fail-

ure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking, causing re, burns, or other injury. Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for Use only batteries or AC power adapters specifi ed for use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the power supply voltage shown. power supply voltage shown. The use of other power sources can cause a re. If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your If the battery leaks and fl uid gets in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean eyes, skin or clothing, fl ush the aff ected area with clean water and seek medical attention or call an emergency water and seek medical attention or call an emergency number right away. number right away. For Your Safety WARNING WARNING Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than those specifi ed here. those specifi ed here. The supplied charger is for use only with batteries of the type supplied with the camera. Using the charger to charge conventional batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst. Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual Using a fl ash too close to a persons eyes may cause visual impairment. impairment. Take particular care when photograph-

ing infants and young children. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly at high ambient temperatures or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the product for prolonged periods while the product is on. product for prolonged periods while the product is on. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-

longed use, at high ambient temperatures, or with users who su er from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

Do not use in the presence of fl ammable objects, explo-

sive gases, or dust. sive gases, or dust. When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the battery terminals with insulation tape. battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with other metallic objects or batteries could cause the battery to ignite or burst. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out of the reach of small children. of the reach of small children. Children may swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical attention or call emergency. Keep out of reach of small children. Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-

ments that could cause injury are the strap, which could become entangled about a childs neck, caus-

ing strangulation, and the ash, which could cause visual impairment. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. This product generates radio-frequency emissions that could interfere with navigational or medical equipment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, Do not use this camera in locations aff ected by oil fumes, steam, humidity or dust. steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a re or elec-

tric shock. Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely high temperatures. high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-

tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight. This can cause a re. 269 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 CAUTION CAUTION Do not place heavy objects on the camera. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause injury. Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still connected. connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to dis-

connect the AC power adapter. This can damage the power cord or cables and cause a re or electric shock. Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build up and distort the casing or cause a re. Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fi t securely into the outlet. securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precau-

tion could result in re or electric shock. When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-

tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Failure to do so can cause a re or electric shock. CAUTION CAUTION When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power socket. socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the power socket can cause a re. When a memory card is removed, the card could come When a memory card is removed, the card could come out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and out of the slot too quickly. Use your fi nger to hold it and gently release the card. gently release the card. Injury could result to those struck by the ejected card. Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your camera. camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause a re or electric shock. Contact your Fuji lm dealer to request internal cleaning every two years. Please note that this service is not free of charge. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fi re or the like. The Battery and Power Supply Battery Life Battery Life At normal temperatures, the battery can be recharged about 300 times. A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced. Storage Storage Performance may be impaired if the battery is left unused for extended periods when fully charged. Run the battery at before storing it. If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-

move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient temperature of from +15 C to +25 C (+59 F to +77 F). Do not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature. Cautions: Handling the Battery Cautions: Handling the Battery Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-

laces or hairpins. Do not expose to ame or heat. Do not disassemble or modify. Use with designated chargers only. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks. Do not expose to water. Keep the terminals clean. The battery and camera body may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal. Caution: Disposal Disposal Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate. Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read the appropriate sections. WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. The following describes the proper use of batteries and how to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or cause leakage, overheating, re, or explosion. Li-ion Batteries Li-ion Batteries Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. Notes on the Battery Notes on the Battery The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. Battery life can be extended by turning the camera o when not in use. Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating devices. Charging the Battery Charging the Battery Charge the battery in the supplied battery charger. Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below +10 C

(+50 F) or above +35 C (+95 F). Do not attempt to charge the battery at temperatures above 40 C (+104 F); at temperatures below 0 C (+32 F), the battery will not charge. Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery does not however need to be fully discharged before charging. The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after charging or use. This is normal. 270 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 For Your Safety AC Power Adapters AC Power Adapters Use only Fuji lm AC power adapters designated for use with this camera. Other adapters could damage the camera. The AC power adapter is for indoor use only. Be sure the DC plug is securely connected to the camera. Turn the camera o before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-

connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable. Do not use with other devices. Do not disassemble. Do not expose to high heat and humidity. Do not subject to strong physical shocks. The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during use. This is normal. If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Using the Camera Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera image sensor. Strong sunlight focused through the view nder may dam-

age the panel of electronic view nder (EVF). Do not aim the electronic view nder at the sun. Take Test Shots Take Test Shots Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept liability for damages or lost pro ts incurred as a result of product malfunction. Notes on Copyright Notes on Copyright Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-

er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. Handling Handling To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are being recorded. Liquid Crystal Liquid Crystal In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-

en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action indicated should any of the following situations arise:

If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and running water. If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ush the a ected eye with clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-

iting, then seek medical assistance. Although the display is manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and images recorded with the product are una ected. Trademark Information Trademark Information Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiwan Inc. Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a regis-

tered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Fuji lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. The HDMI logo is a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Electrical Interference Electrical Interference This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-

ment. Consult with hospital or airline sta before using the camera in a hospital or on an aircraft. Color Television Systems Color Television Systems NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-

vision telecasting speci cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A., Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color television system adopted mainly in European countries and China. Exif Print (Exif Version 2.3) Exif Print (Exif Version 2.3) Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera le format in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-

or reproduction during printing. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-

ware without the permission of the applicable governing bodies is prohibited. 271 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 FCC Caution: Any changes or modi cations not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-

ernments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci c Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certi ed power level in all tested frequency bands. Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this product must be used with a Fuji lm-speci ed fer-

rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord. A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. NOTICES To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Please read the Safety Notes and make sure you understand them before using the camera. Perchlorate Materialspecial handling may apply. See:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate For Customers in the U. S. A. For Customers in the U. S. A. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Contains IC : 10293A-WMBNBM26A Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBNBM26A FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-

vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-

lowing measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and re-

ceiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di erent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 272 For Your Safety For Customers in Canada For Customers in Canada CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-

dian ICES-003. Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-

try Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-

terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-

erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scienti c evi-

dence does not show that any health problems are asso-

ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health e ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating e ects causes no known adverse health e ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological e ects. Some studies have suggested that some biological e ects might occur, but such ndings have not been con rmed by additional research. X-T30 has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-

vironment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. This symbol on the batteries or accumulators indicates that those batteries shall not be treated as household waste. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-

mulators please dispose these separately according to your local requirements. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-

sources. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city o ce, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-

thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal. In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates that they are to be disposed of separately. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 273 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires great-

er attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks.

- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed on your device, as such access may be consid-

ered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access rights. to interception by third parties.

- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable The following may be punishable by law:

The following may be punishable by law:

- Disassembly or modi cation or this device

- Removal of device certi cation labels This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, edu-

This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, edu-

cational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. cational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking systems for assembly lines and in other sim-

ilar applications. To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the fol-

To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the fol-

lowing precautions. lowing precautions. Con rm that the RFID transmitter is not in operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the a ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fuji lm representative. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Do not use this device on board an aircraft. Note that Bluetooth may remain on even when the camera is o . Bluetooth can be disabled by selecting OFF for D CONNECTION SETTING> Bluetooth SETTINGS> Bluetooth ON/

OFF. This product complies with the following EU Directives:

RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU RE Directive 2014/53/EU Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF180006 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.fujifilm.com/

products/digital_cameras/x/fujifilm_x_t30/pdf/index/

fujifilm_x_t30_cod.pdf This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmo-

nized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth). IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the cam-

eras built-in wireless transmitter. Q This product, which contains encryption function de-

veloped in the United States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.. Fuji lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unautho-

rized use. Do not use in applications requiring a high de-

gree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater degree of reliability than o ered by wire-

less network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all neces-

sary precautions to ensure safety and prevent malfunction. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was pur-

chased. Observe all location regulations when using the device. Fuji lm does not accept liability for problems aris-

ing from use in other jurisdictions. Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference. static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the trans-

mitter in the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other loca-

tions subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference that may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band. The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz band using The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz band using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. 274 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Be sure to read these notes before using the lens For Your Safety Do not immerse Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Safety Notes Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety notes and the camera Owners Manual carefully before use. After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-

formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious in-

WARNING jury can result if the information is ignored. This icon indicates that personal injury or material damage can result if the informa-

tion is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information re-

quires attention (Important). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (Prohibited). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (Required). WARNING WARNING Do not immerse in or expose to water. Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution can cause a re or electric shock. Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause re, electric shock, or injury due to product malfunction. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not place on unstable surfaces. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may fall, causing injury. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-

fi nders. fi nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause permanent visual impairment. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re or electric shock. Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution can cause re. Keep out of the reach of small children. Keep out of the reach of small children. This product could cause injury in the hands of a child. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution can cause electric shock. Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit sub-

Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit sub-

jects. jects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame can cause re or burns. When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and store out of direct sunlight. store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the lens can cause re or burns. Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached to a tripod. to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-

jects, causing injury. 275 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Product Care To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals, which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body. Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor, taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-

tly with a piece of Fujifi lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fl uid has been applied. To prevent dust entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in place. Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-

age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING> SENSOR CLEANING. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 276 Cleaning the Image Sensor Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >

SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as de-

scribed below. O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if it is damaged during cleaning. 1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove dust from the sensor. O Do not use a brush or blower brush. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the sensor. 2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Re-

peat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary. 3 Replace the body cap or lens. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 277 Firmware Updates Updates to product fi rmware may result in changes not described in the manual. For more information, visit:

http://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software Checking the Firmware Version O The camera will only display the fi rmware version if a memory card is inserted. 1 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted. 2 Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The current fi rmware version will be displayed; check the fi rm-

ware version. 3 Turn the camera off . N To view the fi rmware version or update fi rmware for optional acces-

sories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted fl ash units, and mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 278 Troubleshooting Consult the table below should you encounter problems using your camera. If you dont fi nd the solution here, con-

tact your local Fujifi lm distributor. Power and Battery Problem Problem The camera does not turn on. The monitor does not turn on. The battery runs down quickly. The camera turns off suddenly. Solution Solution The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 33). The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-

entation (P 29). The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-

tery-chamber cover (P 29). The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned o and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button pressed halfway until the monitor activates. The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-

et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-

mediately before taking a picture. There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals with a soft, dry cloth. ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF: Turn PRE-AF o (P 116). The battery has been charged many times: The battery has reached the end of its charging life. Purchase a new bat-

tery. The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 33). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 279 Problem Problem Charging does not start. Charging is slow. The indicator lamp blinks, but the battery does not charge. Solution Solution Insert the battery (P 29). Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation (P 29). Make sure that the charger is correctly plugged in

(P 33). Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the charger (P 33). Charge the battery at room temperature. There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals with a soft, dry cloth (P 29). The battery has been charged many times: The battery has reached the end of its charging life. Purchase a new bat-

tery. If the battery still fails to charge, contact your Fuji lm dealer (P 262). Menus and Displays Problem Problem Solution Solution Display is not in English. Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING> Qa

(P 40, 188). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 280 Troubleshooting Shooting Problem Problem No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed. Solution Solution The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete pictures (P 29, 170). The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card in the camera (P 186). There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card

(P 29). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 33). The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on

(P 36). You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 208). Mottling (noise) appears in the monitor or viewfi nder when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The camera does not focus. No panorama is recorded when the shutter button is pressed. Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the displays. Images taken with the camera are una ected. The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manual focus (P 78). The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns o (P 8). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 281 Problem Problem No face is detected. The fl ash does not fi re. Some fl ash modes are not available. Solution Solution The subjects face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 117). The subjects face occupies only a small area of the frame:

Change the composition so that the subjects face occu-

pies a larger area of the frame (P 117). The subjects face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-

ject to face the camera (P 117). The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level. The subjects face is poorly lit: Shoot in bright light. The fl ash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 94). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery (P 33). The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single frame mode (P 5). The fl ash is lowered: Raise the ash (P 92). OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON (P 189). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 282 Problem Problem The fl ash does not fully light the subject. Pictures are blurred. Pictures are mottled. Troubleshooting Solution Solution The subject is not in range of the fl ash: Position the subject in range of the ash. The fl ash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly. Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower shutter speed (P 56, 60, 294). The lens is dirty: Clean the lens. The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens

(P 43). s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-

played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 44). Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is high: This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel mapping (P 108). The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:

Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool down (P 36, 290). A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool down (P 36, 290). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 283 Playback Problem Problem Pictures are grainy. Playback zoom is unavailable. No sound in movie playback. Selected pictures are not deleted. Pictures remain after ERASE> ALL FRAMES is selected. File numbering is unexpectedly reset. Solution Solution The pictures were taken with a di erent make or model of camera. The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a di erent make or model of camera. Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume

(P 191). The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during recording. The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during playback. OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON

(P 189). Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected. Remove protection using the device with which it was originally applied (P 174). The battery-chamber cover was opened while the cam-

era was on. Turn the camera o before opening the bat-

tery-chamber cover (P 213). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 284 Troubleshooting Connections Problem Problem The monitor is blank. Both the TV and camera monitor are blank. No picture or sound on TV. The computer does not recognize the camera. Cannot transfer RAW or JPEG fi les to computer. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO or FUJIFILM X Acquire fails to correctly detect the camera. Solution Solution The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 250). The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the view nder. Use the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode

(P 14). The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera properly (P 250). Input on the television is set to TV: Set input to HDMI

(P 250). The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-

vision to adjust the volume (P 250). Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected

(P 255). Use MyFinePix Studio to transfer pictures (Windows only;

P 255). Check the option selected for PC CONNECTION MODE on the camera. Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE before connecting the USB cable (P 258). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 285 Wireless Transfer For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connec-

tions, visit:

http://digital-cameras.support.fujifilm.com/app?pid=x Solution Solution The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer

(P 252). Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-

era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cord-

less phones (P 252). The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-

phone and camera can connect to only one device at a time. End the connection and try again (P 252). There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make connection di cult (P 252). The image was created on another device: The camera may not be able to upload images created on other devices. The image is a movie: Although you can select movies for upload when viewing the contents of camera memory on your smartphone, upload will take some time. Movies intended for display on a smartphone or tablet should be recorded at a frame size of 1280720 (HD) or smaller. For information on viewing the pictures on the camera, visit:

http://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/camera_remote/

Select ON for GENERAL SETTINGS> RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE H. Selecting OFF increases up-

load times for larger images; in addition, some phones may not display images over a certain size (P 219). Problem Problem Cannot connect to smartphone. The camera is slow to connect or upload pictures to the smartphone. Upload fails or is interrupted. Cannot upload images. Smartphone will not display pictures. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 286 Troubleshooting Miscellaneous Problem Problem The camera is unresponsive. The camera does not function as expected. Motion in the viewfi nder or monitor appears jerky rather than smooth. No sound. Solution Solution Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the battery (P 29). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 33). The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the con-

nection. Remove and reinsert the battery (P 29). If the prob-

lem persists, contact your Fuji lm dealer. When NORMAL is selected for PERFORMANCE, the frame rate will drop if no operations are performed for a set period. The normal frame rate will be restored after you operate camera controls (P 212). Adjust the volume (P 190). OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH: Select ON

(P 189). Pressing the Qbutton does not display the quick menu. TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 142). T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 287 Warning Messages and Displays The following warnings appear in the display. Description Description Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery. Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-

ly-charged spare battery. The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-

other subject at the same distance, then recompose the picture. The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be over- or under-exposed. Use the ash for additional light-

ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject. Camera malfunction. Turn the camera o and then on again. If the message persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. The shutter can only be released when a memory card is inserted. Insert a memory card. The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory card using D USER SETTING> FORMAT. The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-

tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. Turn the camera o , remove the lens, and clean the mount-

ing surfaces, then replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. Warning Warning i (red) j (blinks red) s (displayed in red with red focus frame) Aperture or shutter speed displayed in red FOCUS ERROR LENS CONTROL ERROR TURN OFF THE CAMERA AND TURN ON AGAIN NO CARD CARD NOT INITIALIZED LENS ERROR T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 288 Warning Warning CARD ERROR PROTECTED CARD BUSY b MEMORY FULL WRITE ERROR FRAME NO. FULL Warning Messages and Displays Description Description The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-

mat the card. The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-

sists, replace the card. Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera to format the card. The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded. Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or turn the camera o and then on again. If the message persists, contact a Fuji lm dealer. Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:

Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card. The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> FRAME NO.. Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO.. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 289 Warning Warning READ ERROR PROTECTED FRAME CAN NOT CROP DPOF FILE ERROR Warning Messages and Displays Description Description The fi le is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The le cannot be viewed. The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-

tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. Camera malfunction: Contact a Fuji lm dealer. An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected pic-

ture. Remove protection and try again. The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera. Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-

ry card and create a second print order. The picture cannot be printed using DPOF. CAN NOT SET DPOF F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF. The selected picture cannot be rotated. CAN NOT ROTATE F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated. F CANNOT EXECUTE Red-eye removal cannot be applied to movies. Red-eye removal cannot be applied to pictures created with other devices. The movie mode selected with the camera is not compat-

ible with the device to which the camera is connected via HDMI. Try selecting a di erent movie mode (P 144). Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when this warning is displayed. Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool. While this warn-

ing is displayed, movie recording may not be available, mottling may increase, and performance, including frame advance rate and display quality, may drop. m CANNOT EXECUTE MISMATCH: 4K MODE AND EXTERNAL MONITOR CHANGE MOVIE MODE p (yellow) p (red) T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 290 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the recording time or number of pictures available at diff erent image sizes. All fi gures are approximate; fi le size varies with the scene recorded, pro-

ducing wide variations in the number of fi les that can be stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may not diminish at an even rate. Capacity Capacity TT OO 3 322 RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) VV2160 2160 WW1080 1080 P P h h o o t t o o s s M M o o v v i i e e s s 1 1

,

, 2 2 FINEFINE 490 8GB8GB 130 240 9 minutes 9 minutes 16GB 16GB NORMAL NORMAL 740 FINEFINE 1030 NORMAL NORMAL 1540 270 500 20 minutes 20 minutes 1 Use a UHS speed class 3 card or better. 2 Assumes default bit rate. O Although movie recording will continue without interruption when the fi le size reaches 4GB, subsequent footage will be recorded to a separate fi le which must be viewed separately. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 291 Specifi cations System Model Product Number Eff ective pixels Image sensor Storage media Memory card slot File system File format Image size Lens mount Sensitivity Metering Exposure control FUJIFILM X-T30 FF180006 Approx. 26.1 million 23.5 mm 15.6 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS sensor with primary color lter Fuji lm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards SD memory card slot (UHS-I compliant) Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF), Exif 2.3, and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Still pictures: Exif 2.3 JPEG (compressed); RAW (original RAF for-

mat, uncompressed or compressed using a lossless algorithm;

special purpose software required); RAW+JPEG available Movies: H.264 standard with stereo sound (MOV) Audio (voice memos): Stereo sound (WAV) O 32 (6240 4160) O 169 (6240 3512) O 11 (4160 4160) P 32 (4416 2944) P 169 (4416 2488) P 11 (2944 2944) Q 32 (3120 2080) Q 169 (3120 1760) Q 11 (2080 2080) RAW (6240 4160) O panorama: vertical (2160 9600)/horizontal (9600 1440) P panorama: vertical (2160 6400)/horizontal (6400 1440) FUJIFILM X mount Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO160 12800 in increments of EV; AUTO; extended out-

put sensitivity equivalent to ISO 80, 100, 125, 25600, or 51200 Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO160 12800 in increments of EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-

alent to ISO 25600 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering; MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE; aper-

ture-priority AE; manual exposure Exposure compensation Still pictures: 5EV +5EV in increments of EV Movies: 2EV +2EV in increments of EV T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 292 Specifi cations System Shutter speed MECHANICAL SHUTTER Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 15min. to s Bulb: Max. 60min. ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 15min. to s Bulb: Fixed at 1s MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC Mode P: 4s to s Mode A: 30s to s Modes S and M: 15min. to s Bulb: Max. 60 min. Continuous 30fps(1.25X CROP) 30fps(1.25X CROP)RR 1 1 20fps(1.25X CROP) 20fps(1.25X CROP)RR 1 1 10fps(1.25X CROP) 10fps(1.25X CROP)RR 1 1 20fps 20fpsRR 1 1 1010fpsfpsRR 1 1 8.0fps 8.0fps 55.0fps

.0fps 4.0fps 4.0fps 3.0fps 3.0fps CHCH CLCL Frame rate Frame rate 30 2 20 10 20 10 8.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 1 Available with electronic shutter only. 2 During burst photography, the frame advance may drop below the value shown if:

- AF-C is selected for focus mode,

- ON is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION, or

- the burst exceeds a set length. O The frame rate and number of frames per burst varies with shooting conditions and type of memory card used. T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 293 Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/

phase-detection AF) with AF-assist illuminator Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL Auto, Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight uorescent, warm white uorescent, cool white uorescent, incandescent, underwater O , 2 sec., 10 sec. Type: Manual pop-up ash unit Guide number: Approx. 7/22 (ISO200, m/ft.) MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.), MANUAL, COMMANDER, OFF SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (high-

speed sync) RED EYE REMOVAL: e FLASH+REMOVAL, L FLASH, d REMOVAL, OFF Accessory shoe with TTL contacts; supports sync speeds as fast as s X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as s 0.39-in., 2360k-dot OLED view nder; magni cation 0.62 with 50mm lens (35mm format equivalent) at in nity and diopter set to 1.0 m1; diagonal angle of view approximately 31

(horizontal angle of view approximately 26) Diopter adjustment: 4 to +2m1 Eyepoint: Approximately 17.5mm 3.0-in/7.6cm, 1040k-dot color touchscreen LCD monitor, tilting System Focus White balance Self-timer Flash Flash mode Hot shoe Sync contact Sync terminal Viewfi nder LCD monitor 294 T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 Specifi cations System Movies

(with stereo sound) High-speed movies Movie size: V 169, d 179, W 169, W 179 Frame rate: 59.94P *, 50P *, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P

* W only Bit rate: 200Mbps, 100Mbps, 50Mbps Recording/output format H.264: SD card, 420, 8-bit/HDMI output, 422, 10-bit Movie size: FULL HD 169 Frame advance rate: 120P, 100P Input/output terminals Microphone connector 2.5mm mini-stereo jack Headphone jack socket Requires a USB Type-C to 3.5mm stereo mini-pin jack adapter cable compatible with analog audio I/O (USB Type-C Audio Adapter Accessory Mode) Remote release connector 2.5mm 3-pole mini jack Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.1Gen1 HDMI output HDMI Micro connector (type D) T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 295 Power supply/other Power supply Battery life NP-W126S rechargeable battery (supplied with camera) Battery type: NP-W126S Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R Flash: Disabled Shooting mode: Mode P Number of shots Number of shots PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCE LCDLCD EVFEVF BOOST Approx. 260 NORMAL Approx. 370 TTotal length of footage that can be recorded on otal length of footage that can be recorded on Approx. 310 Approx. 390 a single charge a single charge ModeMode V11 W22 High-speed movies33 Actual battery life Actual battery life of movie capture of movie capture Approx. 40minutes Approx. 45minutes Approx. 35minutes Continuance Continuance battery life of battery life of movie capture movie capture Approx. 55minutes Approx. 75minutes 1 At a frame rate of 29.97fps. 2 At a frame rate of 59.94fps. 3 At a frame rate of 120fps. CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera and SD memory card. Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and the gures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-

ance will decline at low temperatures. 118.4mm 82.8mm 46.8mm (31.9mm excluding projections, measured at thinnest part)/4.66in. 3.26in. 1.84in. (1.26in.) Approx. 338g/11.9oz., excluding battery, accessories, and memory card Approx. 388g/13.6oz., including battery and memory card Shooting weight Operating conditions Temperature: 0C to +40C/+32F to +104F Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation) Camera size

(W H D) Camera weight T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 296 Specifi cations Wireless transmitter Wireless LAN Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) Access protocols Bluetooth Standards Operating frequency

(center frequency) IEEE 802.11b/g/n (standard wireless protocol) Japan, China: 2,412MHz2,472MHz (13 channels) Other countries: 2,412MHz2,462MHz (11 channels) Infrastructure Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) 2,402MHz2,480MHz 7.2V 1260mAh 0C to +40C/+32F to +104F NP-W126S rechargeable battery Nominal voltage Nominal capacity Operating temperature Dimensions

(W H D) Weight Approx. 47g/1.7oz. 36.4mm 47.1mm 15.7mm/1.4in. 1.9in. 0.6in. 100V 240V AC, 50/60Hz 10.5VA (100V), 11.9VA (240V) 5.0V DC, 1000mA 0C to +40C/+32F to +104F AC-5VG AC power adapter Rated input Input capacity Rated output Operating temperature Weight N Weight and dimensions vary with the country or region of sale. O Specifi cations and performance are subject to change without notice. Fujifi lm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain. The appearance of the product may diff er from that described in this manual. Approx. 26g 15%/0.9oz. 15% (AC power adapter only) T e c h n i c a l N o t e s 12 297 MEMO 298 MEMO 299 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN http://www.fujifilm.com/products/digital_cameras/index.html

 

 

WM-BN-BM-26_A WiFi+BT Module User Manual PWN: 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module FVIN: 7.10.324.2 Applicable Model No.: WM-BN-BM-26_A, WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF, WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF2, WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF3, WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF4 WiFi User Guide User SIDO interface in PC/NB to control WM-BN-BM-26_A

 

 

Bluetooth User Guide Install Bluetool on PC firstly. User UART in PC to control Bluetooth. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement including interference received, This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:

1) The antenna must be installed with 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users in mobile or fixed applications. 2) The Antenna for Module (COF-WMBNBM26A ) is Non-detachable and the maximum antenna gain allowed for use with this device is 3.68 dBi. 3) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. 4) OEM integrators Must demonstrate SAR test and meet compliance before end-product with module ( COF-WMBNBM26A) marketed in portable application. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. OEM integrators Must demonstrate Part 15B test and meet compliance before end-product with module ( COF-WMBNBM26A) marketed. Industry Canada statement:

This device complies with ISEDs licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d ISED applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions: (For module device use) 1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and 2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. Cet appareil est conu uniquement pour les intgrateurs OEM dans les conditions suivantes: (Pour utilisation de dispositif module) 1) L'antenne doit tre installe de telle sorte qu'une distance de 20 cm est respecte entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs, et 2) Le module metteur peut ne pas tre complant avec un autre metteur ou antenne. Tant que les 2 conditions ci-dessus sont remplies, des essais supplmentaires sur l'metteur ne seront pas ncessaires. Toutefois, l'intgrateur OEM est toujours responsable des essais sur son produit final pour toutes exigences de conformit supplmentaires requis pour ce module install. IMPORTANT NOTE:

In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the Canada authorization is no longer considered valid and the IC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate Canada authorization. NOTE IMPORTANTE:

Dans le cas o ces conditions ne peuvent tre satisfaites (par exemple pour certaines configurations d'ordinateur portable ou de certaines co-localisation avec un autre metteur), l'autorisation du Canada n'est plus considr comme valide et l'ID IC ne peut pas tre utilis sur le produit final. Dans ces circonstances, l'intgrateur OEM sera charg de rvaluer le produit final (y compris l'metteur) et l'obtention d'une autorisation distincte au Canada. End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains IC:10293A-WMBNBM26A. Plaque signaltique du produit final Ce module metteur est autoris uniquement pour une utilisation dans un dispositif o l'antenne peut tre installe de telle sorte qu'une distance de 20cm peut tre maintenue entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs. Le produit final doit tre tiquet dans un endroit visible avec l'inscription suivante:

"Contient des IC: 10293A-WMBNBM26A ". Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Manuel d'information l'utilisateur final L'intgrateur OEM doit tre conscient de ne pas fournir des informations l'utilisateur final quant la faon d'installer ou de supprimer ce module RF dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit final qui intgre ce module. Le manuel de l'utilisateur final doit inclure toutes les informations rglementaires requises et avertissements comme indiqu dans ce manuel. Caution :

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and

(iii) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5725 5 850 MHz) doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. spcifie pour l'exploitation point point et lexploitation non point point, selon le cas;

(iii) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Brand Name : FUJIFILM Model Name: FF170001 REAR PCB Brand Name : FUJIFILM Model Name: FF170001 TOP PCB Brand Name : FUJIFILM Model Name: FF170001 WIRELESS MODULE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Page: 1 of 3 EXTERNAL PHOTOGRAPHS OF EUT Front View of EUT Back View of EUT Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and, for elec-

tronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or ap-

pearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. No.134,WuKungRoad,NewTaipeiIndustrialPark,WukuDistrict,NewTaipeiCity,Taiwan24803/ 134 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 SGS Taiwan Ltd. Page: 2 of 3 Side View of EUT 1 Side View of EUT 2 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and, for elec-

tronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or ap-

pearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. No.134,WuKungRoad,NewTaipeiIndustrialPark,WukuDistrict,NewTaipeiCity,Taiwan24803/ 134 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 SGS Taiwan Ltd. Page: 3 of 3 Side View of EUT 3 Side View of EUT 4 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and, for elec-

tronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or ap-

pearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. No.134,WuKungRoad,NewTaipeiIndustrialPark,WukuDistrict,NewTaipeiCity,Taiwan24803/ 134 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 SGS Taiwan Ltd.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Procedure to show the e-label 1st Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to show menu. push up/down key to scroll the menu list 2nd Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to select "USER SETTING"

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 3rd Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to select "RGULATORY"

FF200003 FF200003 1 /4 2 /4

 

 

Procedure to show the e-label 1st Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to show menu. push up/down key to scroll the menu 2nd Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to select "USER SETTING"

push up/down key to scroll the menu 3rd Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to select "RGULATORY"

1 /4 2 /4

 

 

OT fel T Seeley) lay%

PCA MO Wael aay) errr AGS ED rete ee ek EME MADE IN JAPAN FF180004 15V==65W 62)

& FE CO FABRIQUE AU JAPON eT ER Sno nen teed Pee Raima Oy Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBNBM26A PEELE AU Ree REO]

 

 

USI Model: WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF3 FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A IC: 10293A-WMBNBM26A

 

 

Procedure to show the e-label 1st Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to show menu. push up/down key to scroll the menu list 2nd Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to select "USER SETTING"

push up/down key to scroll the menu list 3rd Step: push "MENU/OK Key" on the below screen to select "RGULATORY"

FF200003 FF200003 1 /4 2 /4

 

 

1. Images of the e-label screen are provided below:

E-Label information Information On Elabel In User Manual FCC ID/IC number DoC logo V V Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements V V V 1. Users are able to access the information in no more than 3 steps in a devices menu. 2. The actual Steps are: select MENU button > USER SETTING in the SET UP >

REGULATORY. The E-Label can be accessed without any special accessories, access codes, or SIM card having to be in place. 3. Electronic labeling information is programmed into the device by the manufacturer at the time of manufacture. 4. Electronic labeling information is not modifiable by any third party. 5. A temporary removable adhesive label will be used on the product.

 

 

SGS North America Inc. i i 620 Old Peachtree Road Applicant Declaration SUITE 100 Suwanee, Georgia 30024 United States Applicant Legal Business Name Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Address 141, Lane 351, Sec.1, Taiping Road, Tsaotuen, Nantou, 54261, Taiwan Grantee Code COF FCC ID COF-WMBNBM26A |

[ uthorized Contact Name Martin Shih Contact Email martin_shih@usiglobal.com Contact Phone ~_| +886-492350876 #26129

|, the undersigned, certify that | am an authorized signatory for the Applicant and therefore declare;

a) in accordance with 47CFR2.911(d), all of the statements herein and the exhibits attached hereto are true and correct to the best of my knowledge and belief. b) in accepting a Grant of Equipment Authorization issued by a TCB, under the authority of the FCC, as a result of the representations made in this application, the Applicant is responsible for:

(1) labeling the equipment with the exact FCC ID as specified in this application,

(2) compliance statement labeling pursuant to the applicable rules,

(3) compliance of the equipment with the applicable technical rules, c) _ if the Applicant is not the actual manufacturer of the equipment, appropriate arrangements have been made with the manufacturer to ensure that production units of this equipment will continue to comply with the FCCs technical requirements. d) in accordance with 47 CFR 2.909 and KDB394321, the Applicant has read, understood and agrees to accept that they are the responsible party and agree to abide by their responsibilities as specified under 47 CFR 2.909 and KDB394321. e) in accordance with 1ISO17065, FCC KDB641163, FCC KDB610077, KDB394321 and RSP-100, the Applicant has read, understood, accepts and agrees to abide by the post market surveillance requirements.

(1) the Applicant understands, accepts and agrees that a sample may be requested for surveillance testing.

(2) the Applicant shall make provisions to always have a production sample available upon request by SGS, FCC and/or ISED.

(3) the Applicant shall, upon request by SGS, at the Applicant's expense, provide a production sample of the requested product to SGS, FCC and/or ISED as instructed. The sample shall include all support devices, cables, software, accessories or other hardware or software required for evaluation, review, certification and audit surveillance of products certified by SGS. f) neither the Applicant nor any party to the application is subject to a denial of Federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862 because of a conviction for possession or distribution of a controlled substance. See 47CFR 1.2002(b) for the definition of a party for these purposes. g) the Applicant has read, understood, accepts and agrees to abide by the SGS North America, Inc.(TCB) terms and conditions. Link to CFRs: https://www.fec. ov/wireless/bureau-divisionstechnologies-systems-and-innovation-division/rules-requlations-title-47 Link to KDBs: httos://apps.fcc.gov/oetcf/kdb/index.cim Link to RSP-100: https:/Avww.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-ast.nsffeng/sf01130.html AUN shi, Chi, i Shy x Martin Shih Manager NOTE: This declaration cannot be signed by an Agent, it shall be signed by an authorized person listed in the FCC database Applicant Signature:

Print Name:

Applicant Declaration Rev:0.0

 

 

TEL +886-49-221-2700 FAX +886-49-232-9561 Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, Nantou County 542007, Taiwan Wad Date: September 22, 2021 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Requesting Class II permissive change To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A, Original grant date: October 27, 2016 The major change filed under this application is :

1. The subject approved module is being used in different host. 2. SAR test report is provided to demonstrate portable RF exposure conditions. 3. The hardware design of this transmitter that may affect compliance is remained unchanged in this permissive change application. 4. Bluetooth FHSS is disabled by software. 5. New antenna with the same type and lower gain than the original grant condition is used. 6. Power settings are decreased from the original grant conditions, this platform is evaluated to ensure compliance of applicable FCC rules intent. Sincerely,

(Signature) Mouth, shi;

Name: Martin Shih Title: EMC Manager On behalf of: Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Telephone: +886-492350876#26129 Email: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

To:

SGS North America Inc. 620 Old Peachtree Road SUITE 100 Suwanee, Georgia United States Regarding:

Confidentiality Request regarding application for FCC ID COF-WMBNBM26A LONG TERM CONFIDENTIALITY Pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.459 and 0.457 of the commissions rules, the applicant hereby request confidential treatment of the documents listed below, associated with the certification application referenced above. Operational Descriptions The documents above contain proprietary information not released to the public. Public disclosure of this information may prove harmful to the business of the applicant. Sincerely, Printed Name : Jim Chang Title : Manager Company Name: SGS Taiwan Ltd.

 

 

Universal Scientific Industrial (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. No.1558, Zhang Dong Rd., Zhang Jiang High-Tech Park,

| Pudong New Area, Shanghai 201203, China TEL +86-21-5896-69965 WE ee FAM +86-21-5896-8415 Date: August 24, 2021 TO: Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 Regarding: FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize SGS Taiwan Ltd. to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization with respect to the FCC ID above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by the agent on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Where our agent signs the application for certification on our behalf, | acknowledge that all responsibility for complying with the terms and conditions for Certification, as specified by SGS North America, Inc., still resides with Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Name (Printed): Martin Shih Title: Manager Signature: Ge A Pay On behalf of Company: Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Telephone: +886-492350876#26129

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.

| age No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping fload, See. 1, Teaotuen, AN : Mantou County 54261, Taiwan

: TEL +886-99-221-2700 he FAM +886-49-232-9561 Date: May 3, 2021 FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A AUTHORIZATION LETTER To Whom It May Concern:

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. hereby authorizes Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist of Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch (BV CPS Taoyuan), to act on its behalf in all matters relating to the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) application for equipment authorization in connection with the FCC ID listed above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Amanda Wu /

Senior Specialist of BV CPS Taoyuan on Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.s behalf, within the scope of the powers granted herein, shall have the same effect as acts of its own. If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Sincerely yours, Mol Shi) Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 391, Taiping Road, Sec, 1, Tsaotuen, AA Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL #886-49-221-2700 FAX +886-49-232-9561 Date: May 3, 2021 SUBJECT: FCC Class Il Permissive Change We, | | td. |. hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Pannissive Change is is to natid a s host: Digital Camera (Model: FF210001/ Brand: FUJIFILM) to the certified module which was originally granted on 06/13/2018 under FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A. The module mentioned above has been approved and is eeetrorileatly and mechanically identical

, take the responsibility to ensure each module ehiquligd with a: requirements after integration in the host. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Sincerely Yours, Mat brn Slih Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.

: No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsantuen, Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL #886-49-221-2700 es FAX +886-49-232-9961 Date: May 3, 2021 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road - Gate A Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC 1D: COF-WMBNBM26A To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459) and Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 08/27/2021.

@ External Photos 5 Internal Photos 5 Test Setup Photos Sd Users Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, n Shi Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: February 24, 2021 Subject: FCC Class II Permissive Change We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Permissive Change is to add a host which is including additional Antenna (Inventek W2.4-5P-U) to the pre-certified module, which was originally granted on 10/27/2016 under FCC ID:

COF-WMBNBM26A. integration in the host. The module mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically identical to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd., takes the responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after Regards. _________________________ Martin Shih / EMC Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: +886 49 2350876#26129 E-Mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Date: March 2, 2021 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. Regards. _________________________ Martin Shih / EMC Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: +886 49 2350876#26129 E-Mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Unit 2058291 92 ST Delta, BC V4G0A4, Canada Phone: 604-247-0444 Fax: 604-247-0442 www.labtestcert.com Tuesday, March 02, 2021 TIMCO Engineering Inc. 849 NW State Road 45 Newberry, FL 32669 USA SUBJECT:

REFERENCE:

Re:

Dear Sir, In response to your e-mail dated 01 Mar. 2021. Please see below our reply:

UGSI Co. Ltd.- FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A Project 0707-21 Reply to TIMCO Findings noted: 03/01/2021 If you have any questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Jeremy Lee 1. Confidentiality Request Letter: Please remove the Block Diagram and Schematics from the letter. We did not receive these exhibits, and they are not required for this C2PC. Attached revised file, WMBNBM26A_FCC PermConfletter_v2. ONE STOP GLOBAL CERTIFICATION SOLUTIONS

 

 

 

 

 

 

AUTHORIZATION LETTER Date: 2021/02/09 SUBJECT: FCC Application for COF-WMBNBM26A To Whom It May Concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize _Jeremy Lee_ at _Labtest Certification Inc. (3128-20800 Westminster HWY, Richmond, BC, V6V 2W3, Canada)_ on our behalf, to apply to the Federal Communications Commission on our equipment. Any and all acts carried out by _Jeremy Lee_ on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. Regards.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

awk 775 Montague Expressway Milpitas, CA 95035 Tel: 408-526-1188 Fax: 408-526-1088 Email: sales.eaw@us.bureauveritas.com Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) From To Approved Date

= Initial Release (obsolete) aF 1.0 _ 1.0 ____ Nov-14-2006 Revised wording (obsolete) 1.0 2.0 Sept-25-2007 Updated company template (obsolete) 2.0 3.0 Jan-31-2012 Updated letter information (obsolete) 3.0 4.0 May-23-2014 Added FCC ID field (obsolete) 4.0 5.0 Sep-16-2014 Updated company name & logo (current) 5.0 6.0 Jun-27-2018 SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 1 of 2 Rev 6.0 Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 391, Taiping Read, See. 1, Tsaotuen, a Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL +836-49-221-2700

"guy FAM +886-49-232-9561 Date: December 8, 2020 To: BVCPS, INC. 775 Montague Expressway, Milpitas, CA 95035 USA Dear Sir/Madam, Re: Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter We, _ Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.__ hereby authorize Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Services, Inc. to act as a Certification Body for certifying for the following project(s):

FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A Product Description: 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module Model: WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF3 Sincerely, Mary Shy Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com SCS-F 18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 2 of 2 Rev 6.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

775 Montague Expressway Milpitas, CA 95035 128 Tel: 408-526-1188 Eas Fax: 408-526-1088 Email: sales.eaw@us. bureauveritas.com Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter

[Fon

| Initial Release (obsolete) = | 1.0 | | Nov-4-2006 Foner tae nontina obsolete) | 0 __|__20__Sent-26.2007__

~ pia company template (obsolete) _|_2_|

| 40 | May-23-2014

| Added FCC IDfield (obsolete) = | 0 | | Sep-16-2014

| ____Updated company name &logo(current) = [| 5.0 | 6.0 Jun-27-2018 SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 1 of 2 Rev 6.0 Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, See. 1, Tsaotuen, Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL #886-49-221-2700 FAX +886-49-232-9561 February 6, 2020 To: BVCPS, INC. 775 Montague Expressway, Milpitas, CA 95035 USA Dear Sir/Madam, Re: Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter We, _ Universal Global Scientific industrial Co., Ltd. hereby authorize Bureau Veritas Consumer Product Services, Inc. to act as a Certification Body for certifying for the following project(s):

FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A Product Description: 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module Model: WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF5 Sincerely, SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 2 of 2 Rev 6.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Universal Global Scientific industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Read, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 ere FAX +886-49-232-9561 DEC. 20, 2019 To:

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD Subject: Permanent Confidentiality Request for FCC ID : COF-WMBNBM26A Pursuant to sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47, we respectfully request permanent confidential treatment of the following Exhibits accompanying this application as:

- e.g. Schematics The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, LM (Lun Lhile Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 #26129 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com SCS-F19: Confidentiality Request Letter Page 2 of 4 Rev 6.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Date: October 3, 2018 SUBJECT: FCC Class II Permissive Change We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Permissive Change is to add a host: Digital Camera (Model: FF180004/ Brand: FUJIFILM) to the certified module which was originally granted on 08/17/2017 under FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A. The antenna information is listed as below:

FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A Antenna Type Maximum Gain (dBi) Certified module Chip Antenna 3.68 dBi Host Chip Antenna 3.68 dBi The module mentioned above has been approved and is electronically and mechanically identical to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd., take the responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Sincerely Yours, Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martin_shih@usiglobal.com

 

 

Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 1 of 51 SAR TEST REPORT The following samples were submitted and identified on behalf of the client as:

Product Name Brand Name Model No. Company Name Company Address Standards FCC ID Date of Receipt Date of Test(s) Digital Camera FUJIFILM FF180003 UNIVERSAL GLOBAL SCIENTIFIC INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD. 141, Lane 351, Sec. 1, Taiping Road., Tsaotuen, Nantou 54261, Taiwan IEEE/ANSI C95.1-1992, IEEE 1528-2013, KDB248227D01v02r02,KDB865664D01v01r04, KDB865664D02v01r02,KDB447498D01v06, COF-WMBNBM26A Mar. 28, 2018 Apr. 03, 2018 Jul. 13, 2018 Date of Issue In the configuration tested, the EUT complied with the standards specified above. Remarks:

This report details the results of the testing carried out on one sample, the results contained in this test report do not relate to other samples of the same product. The manufacturer should ensure that all products in series production are in conformity with the product sample detailed in this report. This report may only be reproduced and distributed in full. If the product in this report is used in any configuration other than that detailed in the report, the manufacturer must ensure the new system complies with all relevant standards. Any mention of SGS Taiwan Electronic & Communication Laboratory or testing done by SGS Taiwan Electronic & Communication Laboratory in connection with distribution or use of the product described in this report must be approved by SGS Taiwan Electronic & Communication Laboratory in writing. Signed on behalf of SGS Clerk / Ruby Ou Asst. Supervisor / Afu Chen Asst. Manager / John Yeh Date: Jul. 13, 2018 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Revision History Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 2 of 51 Report Number EN/2018/30013 EN/2018/30013 Revision Rev.00 Rev.01 Description Initial creation of document 1st modification Issue Date May. 23, 2018 Jul. 13, 2018 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 3 of 51 Contents 1. General Information ....................................................................................................... 4 1.1 Testing Laboratory ............................................................................................................. 4 1.2 Details of Applicant ............................................................................................................ 4 1.3 Details of Manufacturer ..................................................................................................... 4 1.4 Description of EUT ............................................................................................................ 5 1.5 Test Environment ............................................................................................................... 7 1.6 Operation Description ........................................................................................................ 7 1.7 The SAR Measurement System ...................................................................................... 10 1.8 System Components ....................................................................................................... 12 1.9 SAR System Verification .................................................................................................. 14 1.10 Tissue Simulant Fluid for the Frequency Band .............................................................. 15 1.11 Evaluation Procedures ................................................................................................... 16 1.12 Probe Calibration Procedures ........................................................................................ 17 1.13 Test Standards and Limits ............................................................................................. 20 2. Summary of Results .................................................................................................... 22 3. Instruments List ........................................................................................................... 23 4. Measurements .............................................................................................................. 24 5. SAR System Performance Verification ...................................................................... 25 6. DAE & Probe Calibration Certificate .......................................................................... 26 7. Uncertainty Budget ...................................................................................................... 42 8. Phantom Description ................................................................................................... 43 9. System Validation from Original Equipment Supplier .............................................. 44 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1. General Information 1.1 Testing Laboratory Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 4 of 51 SGS Taiwan Ltd. Electronics & Communication Laboratory 1F, No. 8, Alley 15, Lane 120, Sec. 1, NeiHu Rd., NeiHu Dist., Taipei City, Taiwan, 11493. Tel Fax Internet

+886-2-2299-3279

+886-2-2298-0488 http://www.tw.sgs.com/

1.2 Details of Applicant Company Name Company Address 141, Lane 351, Sec. 1, Taiping Road., Tsaotuen, Nantou UNIVERSAL GLOBAL SCIENTIFIC INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD. 54261, Taiwan 1.3 Details of Manufacturer Company Name Company Address 7-3, Akasaka 9-Chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-0052 Japan FUJIFILM Corporation Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1.4 Description of EUT Equipment Under Test Digital Camera Brand Name Model No. FCC ID Mode of Operation FUJIFILM FF180003 COF-WMBNBM26A WLAN802.11 b/g/n(20M) Duty Cycle TX Frequency Range

(MHz) Channel Number

(ARFCN) WLAN802.11 b/g/n(20M/) Bluetooth WLAN802.11 b/g/n(20M) Bluetooth WLAN802.11 b/g/n(20M) Bluetooth Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 5 of 51 Bluetooth 1 1 2412 2462 2400 2483.5 1 0 11 39 WLAN Max. SAR (1-g) (Unit: W/Kg) Band Measured Reported Channel WLAN802.11b 0.036 0.052 1 Position Front side WLAN antenna information:

Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group AntennaChipFrequency2.4GGain (dBi)3.68 WLAN802.11 b/g/n(20M) conducted power table:

Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 6 of 51 Bluetooth conducted power table:

Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group BandModeChannelFrequency(MHz)Data RateMax. RatedAvg. Power +Max. Tolerance(dBm)Averagepower(dBm)1241211.509.896243711.509.9311246211.5010.331241211.5010.336243711.5010.5311246211.5011.201241211.5010.086243711.5010.3711246211.5010.87802.11n20-HT0MCS0Main Antenna2450 MHz802.11b1Mbps802.11g6MbpsCH 372402CH 182442CH 392480ChannelFrequency(MHz)Average Output Power (dBm)Max. Rated Avg.Power + Max.Tolerance (dBm)GFSKLE1.8721.81.76Mode Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 7 of 51 1.5 Test Environment Ambient Temperature: 222 C Tissue Simulating Liquid: 222 C 1.6 Operation Description Use chipset specific software to control the EUT, and makes it transmit in maximum power. Measurements are performed respectively on the lowest, middle and highest channels of the operating band(s). The EUT is set to maximum power level during all tests, and at the beginning of each test the battery is fully charged. Based on KDB inquiry, EUT was tested as below, Testing1-g SAR on all surfaces and side edges with a transmitting antenna located at 25mm from that surface or edge, at 5mm separation from a flat phantom. Antenna location (front view) Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Note:

802.11b DSSS SAR Test Requirements:

Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 8 of 51 1. SAR is measured for 2.4 GHz 802.11b DSSS mode using the highest measured maximum output power channel, when the reported SAR of the highest measured maximum output power channel for the exposure configuration is 0.8 W/kg, no further SAR testing is required for 802.11b DSSS in that exposure configuration. 2. When the reported SAR is > 0.8 W/kg, SAR is required for that exposure configuration using the next highest measured output power channel. When any reported SAR is > 1.2 W/kg, SAR is required for the third channel; i.e., all channels require testing. 802.11g/n OFDM SAR Test Exclusion Requirements:

3. SAR is not required for 802.11g/n since the highest reported SAR for DSSS is adjusted by the ratio of OFDM to DSSS specified maximum output power and the adjusted SAR is 1.2 W/kg. 4. WLAN and BT share the same antenna path and they will not transmit simultaneously. 5. According to KDB447498 D01, testing of other required channels is not required when the reported 1-g SAR for the highest output channel is 0.8 W/kg, when the transmission band is 100 MHz. 6. According to KDB865664 D01, SAR measurement variability must be assessed for each frequency band. When the original highest measured SAR is 0.8 W/kg, repeated that measurement once. Perform a second repeated measurement only if the ratio of largest to smallest SAR for the original and first repeated measurements is > 1.20 or when the original or repeated measurement is 1.45 W/kg (~10% from the 1-g SAR limit) 7. Based on KDB447498D01, BT SAR measurement is not required. a) SAR test exclusion thresholds for 100 MHz to 6 GHz at test separation distances 50 mm are determined by:

Max. tune up power(mW) Min. test separation distance(mm) f(GHz) 3 When the minimum test separation distance is < 5mm, 5mm is applied to Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group determine SAR test exclusion. Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 9 of 51 b) For test separation distances > 50 mm, and the frequency at 100 MHz to 1500MHz, the SAR test exclusion threshold is determined according to the following, and as illustrated in Appendix B of KDB447498 D01.

[(Threshold at 50mm in step1) + (test separation distance - 50mm) x (f(MHz)

(mW), 150 )]

c) For test separation distances > 50 mm, and the frequency at >1500MHz to 6GHz, the SAR test exclusion threshold is determined according to the following, and as illustrated in Appendix B of KDB447498 D01.

[(Threshold at 50mm in step1) + (test separation distance-50mm) x 10](mW), Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group test separationdistance (mm)calculated testexclusionRequire SARTesting?50.499No2Maximum power(dBm)Back / front / top / right / bottom / left sides Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 10 of 51 1.7 The SAR Measurement System A block diagram of the SAR measurement System is given in Fig. a. This SAR Measurement System uses a Computer-controlled 3-D stepper motor system

(SPEAG DASY 5 professional system). The model EX3DV4 field probe is used to determine the internal electric fields. The SAR can be obtained from the equation SAR= (|Ei|2)/ where and are the conductivity and mass density of the tissue-simulant. The DASY 5 system for performing compliance tests consists of the following items:

1. A standard high precision 6-axis robot (Staubli RX family) with controller, teach pendant and software. An arm extension is for accommodating the data acquisition electronics (DAE). 2. A dosimetric probe, i.e., an isotropic E-field probe optimized and calibrated for usage intissue simulating liquid. The probe is equipped with an optical surface detector system. 3. A data acquisition electronics (DAE) which performs the signal amplification, signal multiplexing, AD-conversion, offset measurements, mechanical surface detection, collision detection, etc. The unit is battery powered with standard or rechargeable batteries. The signal is optically transmitted to the EOC. Fig. a The block diagram of SAR system Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 11 of 51 4. The Electro-optical converter (EOC) performs the conversion between optical and electrical of the signals for the digital communication to the DAE and for the analog signal from the optical surface detection. The EOC is connected to the measurement server. 5. The function of the measurement server is to perform the time critical tasks such as signal filtering, control of the robot operation and fast movement interrupts. 6. A probe alignment unit which improves the (absolute) accuracy of the probe positioning. 7. A computer operating Windows 7. 8. DASY 5 software. 9. Remote control with teach pendant and additional circuitry for robot safety such as warning lamps, etc. 10. The SAM twin phantom enabling testing left-hand and right-hand usage. 11. The device holder for handheld mobile phones. 12. Tissue simulating liquid mixed according to the given recipes. 13. Validation dipole kits allowing to validate the proper functioning of the system. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 12 of 51 1.8 System Components EX3DV4 E-Field Probe Construction Symmetrical design with triangular core Built-in shielding against static charges PEEK enclosure material (resistant to organic solvents, e.g., DGBE) Basic Broad Band Calibration in air Conversion Factors (CF) for HSL 2450 MHz Additional CF for other liquids and frequencies upon request Calibration Frequency Directivity 10 MHz to > 6 GHz 0.3 dB in HSL (rotation around probe axis) 0.5 dB in tissue material (rotation normal to probe axis) 10 W/g to > 100 mW/g Linearity: 0.2 dB (noise: typically < 1 W/g) Dynamic Range Dimensions Tip diameter: 2.5 mm Application High precision dosimetric measurements in any exposure scenario

(e.g., very strong gradient fields). Only probe which enables compliance testing for frequencies up to 6 GHz with precision of better 30%. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 13 of 51 ELI PHANTOM Model Construction The ELI phantom is used for compliance testing of handheld and body-mounted wireless devices in the frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz. ELI is fully compatible with the IEC 62209-2 standard and all known tissue simulating liquids. ELI has been optimized regarding its performance and can be integrated into our standard phantom tables. A cover prevents evaporation of the liquid. Reference markings on the phantom allow installation of the complete setup, including all predefined phantom positions and measurement grids, by teaching three points. The phantom is compatible with all SPEAG dosimetric probes and dipoles. 2 0.2 mm Shell Thickness Filling Volume Approx. 30 liters Dimensions Major axis: 600 mm Minor axis: 400 mm DEVICE HOLDER Construction The device holder (Supporter) for Notebook is made by POM

(polyoxymethylene resin ) , which is non-metal and non-conductive. The height can be adjusted to fit varies kind of notebooks. Device Holder Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 14 of 51 1.9 SAR System Verification The microwave circuit arrangement for system verification is sketched in Fig. b. The daily system accuracy verification occurs within the flat section of the SAM phantom. A SAR measurement was performed to see if the measured SAR was within +/- 10% from the target SAR values. These tests were done at 2450MHz. The tests were conducted on the same days as the measurement of the DUT. The obtained results from the system accuracy verification are displayed in the table 1

(SAR values are normalized to 1W forward power delivered to the dipole). During the tests, the liquid depth above the ear reference points was 15 cm 5 mm

(frequency 3 GHz) or 10 cm 5 mm (frequency > 3 G Hz) in all the cases. It is seen that the system is operating within its specification, as the results are within acceptable tolerance of the reference values. Fig. b The block diagram of system verification Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 15 of 51 Table 1. Results of system validation 1.10 Tissue Simulant Fluid for the Frequency Band The dielectric properties for this body-simulant fluid were measured by using the Agilent Model 85070E Dielectric Probe (rates frequency band 200 MHz to 20 GHz) in conjunction with Network Analyzer (30 KHz-6000 MHz). All dielectric parameters of tissue simulates were measured within 24 hours of SAR measurements. The depth of the tissue simulant in the flat section of the phantom was 15 cm 5 mm (Frequency 3G) or 10 cm 5 mm (Frequency >3G) during all tests. (Fig. 2) Table 2. Dielectric Parameters of Tissue Simulant Fluid The composition of the tissue simulating liquid:

Frequency

(MHz) Mode 2450M Body Ingredient DGMBE Water Salt 301.7ml 698.3ml Preventol D-7 Cellulose Sugar Total amount 1.0L(Kg) Table 3. Recipes for Tissue Simulating Liquid Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group ValidationKitS/N1W TargetSAR-1g(mW/g)MeasuredSAR-1g(mW/g)MeasuredSAR-1gnormalized to1W (mW/g)Deviation(%)MeasuredDateD2450V27272450Body50.612.349.2-2.77%Apr. 03, 2018Frequency(MHz)TissueTypeMeasuredFrequency(MHz)TargetDielectricConstant,rTargetConductivity, (S/m)MeasuredDielectricConstant,rMeasuredConductivity, (S/m)% dev r% dev MeasurementDate2412.0052.7511.91453.8871.846-2.15%3.54%2437.0052.7171.93853.7621.881-1.98%2.92%2450.0052.7001.95053.7311.897-1.96%2.72%2462.0052.6851.96753.6641.918-1.86%2.49%Apr. 03, 2108Body 1.11 Evaluation Procedures Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 16 of 51 The entire evaluation of the spatial peak values is performed within the Post-processing engine (SEMCAD). The system always gives the maximum values for the 1 g and 10 g cubes. The algorithm to find the cube with highest averaged SAR is divided into the following stages:

1. The extraction of the measured data (grid and values) from the Zoom Scan. 2. The calculation of the SAR value at every measurement point based on all stored data (A/D values and measurement parameters) 3. The generation of a high-resolution mesh within the measured volume 4. The interpolation of all measured values from the measurement grid to the high-resolution grid 5. The extrapolation of the entire 3-D field distribution to the phantom surface over the distance from sensor to surface 6. The calculation of the averaged SAR within masses of 1g and 10g. The probe is calibrated at the center of the dipole sensors that is located 1 to 2.7mm away from the probe tip. During measurements, the probe stops shortly above the phantom surface, depending on the probe and the surface detecting system. Both distances are included as parameters in the probe configuration file. The software always knows exactly how far away the measured point is from the surface. As the probe cannot directly measure at the surface, the values between the deepest measured point and the surface must be extrapolated. The angle between the probe axis and the surface normal line is less than 30 degree. In the Area Scan, the gradient of the interpolation function is evaluated to find all the extreme of the SAR distribution. The uncertainty on the locations of the extreme is less than 1/20 of the grid size. Only local maximum within 2 dB of the global maximum are searched and passed for the Cube Scan measurement. In the Cube Scan, the interpolation function is used to extrapolate the Peak SAR from the lowest measurement points to the inner phantom surface (the extrapolation distance). The uncertainty increases with the extrapolation distance. To keep the uncertainty within 1% for the 1 g and 10 g cubes, the extrapolation distance should not be larger than 5mm. The maximum search is automatically performed after each area scan measurement. It is based on splines in two or three dimensions. The procedure can find the maximum for most SAR distributions even with relatively large grid spacing. After the area scanning measurement, the probe is automatically moved to a position at the interpolated maximum. The following scan can directly use this position for reference, e.g., for a finer resolution grid or the cube evaluations. The 1g and 10g peak evaluations are only available for the predefined cube 7x7x7 scans. The routines are verified and optimized for the grid dimensions used in these cube measurements. The measured volume of 30x30x30mm contains about 30g of tissue. The first procedure is an extrapolation (incl. Boundary correction) to get the points between the lowest measured plane and the surface. The next step uses 3D Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 17 of 51 interpolation to get all points within the measured volume. In the last step, a 1g cube is placed numerically into the volume and its averaged SAR is calculated. This cube is the moved around until the highest averaged SAR is found. If the highest SAR is found at the edge of the measured volume, the system will issue a warning: higher SAR values might be found outside of the measured volume. In that case the cube measurement can be repeated, using the new interpolated maximum as the center. 1.12 Probe Calibration Procedures For the calibration of E-field probes in lossy liquids, an electric field with an accurately known field strength must be produced within the measured liquid. For standardization purposes it would be desirable if all measurements which are necessary to assess the correct field strength would be traceable to standardized measurement procedures. In the following two different calibration techniques are summarized:

1.12.1 Transfer Calibration with Temperature Probes In lossy liquids the specific absorption rate (SAR) is related both to the electric field (

) and the temperature gradient (

) in the liquid.

/

whereby is the conductivity, the density and c the heat capacity of the liquid. in the the temperature gradient Hence, the electric field in lossy liquid can be measured indirectly by measuring liquid. Non-disturbing temperature probes (optical probes or thermistor probes with resistive lines) with high spatial resolution (<1-2 mm) and fast reaction time (<1 s) are available and can be easily calibrated with high precision [1]. The setup and the exciting source have no influence on the calibration; only the relative positioning uncertainties of the standard temperature probe and the E-field probe to be calibrated must be considered. However, several problems the available accuracy of probe calibrations with temperature probes:

limit Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Tt ,tTC = SAR Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 18 of 51 The temperature gradient is not directly measurable but must be evaluated from temperature measurements at different time steps. Special precaution is necessary to avoid measurement errors caused by temperature gradients due to energy equalizing effects or convection currents in the liquid. Such effects cannot be completely avoided, as the measured field itself destroys the thermal equilibrium in the liquid. With a careful setup these errors can be kept small. The measured volume around the temperature probe is not well defined. It is difficult to calculate the energy transfer from a surrounding gradient temperature field into the probe. These effects must be considered, since temperature probes are calibrated in liquid with homogeneous temperatures. There is no traceable standard for temperature rise measurements. The calibration depends on the assessment of the specific density, the heat capacity and the conductivity of the medium. While the specific density and heat capacity can be measured accurately with standardized procedures (~ 2% for c; much better for ) , there is no standard for the measurement of the conductivity. Depending on the method and liquid, the error can well exceed 5%. Temperature rise measurements are not very sensitive and therefore the E-field

(e.g., power are often performed at a higher power measurements. The nonlinearities measurements, different components, etc.) must be considered. the system Considering these problems, the possible accuracy of the calibration of E-field probes with temperature gradient measurements in a carefully designed setup is about 10% (RSS) [2]. Recently, a setup which is a combination of the waveguide techniques and the thermal measurements was presented in [3]. The estimated uncertainty of the setup is 5% (RSS) when the same liquid is used for the calibration and for actual measurements and 7-9% (RSS) when not, which is in good agreement with the estimates given in [2]. level than in 1.12.2 Calibration with Analytical Fields In this method a technical setup is used in which the field can be calculated analytically from measurements of other physical magnitudes (e.g., input power). This corresponds to the standard field method for probe calibration in air; however, there is no standard defined for fields in lossy liquids. When using calculated fields in lossy liquids for probe calibration, several points must be considered in the assessment of the uncertainty:

The setup must enable accurate determination of the incident power. The accuracy of the calculated field strength will depend on the assessment of the dielectric parameters of the liquid. Due to the small wavelength in liquids with high permittivity, even small Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 19 of 51 setups might be above the resonant cutoff frequencies. The field distribution in the setup must be carefully checked for conformity with the theoretical field distribution. References 1. 2. 3. N. Kuster, Q. Balzano, and J.C. Lin, Eds., Mobile Communications Safety, Chapman & Hall, London, 1997. K. Meier, M. Burkhardt, T. Schmid, and N. Kuster, \Broadband calibration of E-field probes in lossy media", IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques, vol. 44, no. 10, pp. 1954{1962, Oct. 1996. K. Jokela, P. Hyysalo, and L. Puranen, \Calibration of specific absorption rate (SAR) probes in waveguide at 900 MHz", IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurements, vol. 47, no. 2, pp. 432{438, Apr. 1998. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 1.13 Test Standards and Limits Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 20 of 51 According to FCC 47CFR 2.1093(d) The limits to be used for evaluation are based generally on criteria published by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) in Section 4.2 of IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz, ANSI/IEEE C95.1, By the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., New York, New York 10017. These criteria for SAR evaluation are similar to those recommended by the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) in Biological Effects and Exposure Criteria for Radio frequency Electromagnetic Fields, NCRP Report No. 86, Section 17.4.5. Copyright NCRP, 1986, Bethesda, Maryland 20814. SAR is a measure of the rate of energy absorption due to exposure to an RF transmitting source. SAR values have been related to threshold levels for potential biological hazards. The criteria to be used are specified in paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section and shall apply for portable devices transmitting in the frequency range from 100 kHz to 6 GHz. Portable devices that transmit at frequencies above 6 GHz are to be evaluated in terms of the MPE limits specified in 1.1310 of this chapter. Measurements and calculations to demonstrate compliance with MPE field strength or power density limits for devices operating above 6 GHz should be made at a minimum distance of 5 cm from the radiating source.

(1) Limits for Occupational/Controlled exposure: 0.4 W/kg as averaged over the whole-body and spatial peak SAR not exceeding 8 W/kg as averaged over any 1 gram of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube). Exceptions are the hands, wrists, feet and ankles where the spatial peak SAR shall not exceed 20 W/kg, as averaged over an 10 grams of tissue

(defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube).

(2) Occupational/Controlled limits apply when persons are exposed as a consequence of their employment provided these persons are fully aware of and exercise control over their exposure. Awareness of exposure can be accomplished by use of warning labels or by specific training or education through appropriate means, such as an RF safety program in a work environment.

(3) Limits for General Population/Uncontrolled exposure: 0.08 W/kg as averaged over the whole-body and spatial peak SAR not exceeding 1.6 W/kg as averaged over any 1 gram of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube). Exceptions are the hands, wrists, feet and ankles where the spatial peak SAR shall not exceed 4 W/kg, as averaged over any 10 grams of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube). General Population/Uncontrolled limits apply when the general public may be exposed, or when persons that are exposed as a consequence of their employment may not be fully aware of the potential for exposure or do not Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 21 of 51 exercise control over their exposure. Warning labels placed on consumer devices such as cellular telephones will not be sufficient reason to allow these devices to be evaluated subject to limits for occupational/controlled exposure in paragraph (d)(1) of this section. (Table 4.) Human Exposure Spatial Peak SAR

(Brain) Spatial Average SAR

(Whole Body) Spatial Peak SAR

(Hands/Feet/Ankle/Wrist) Uncontrolled Environment General Population Controlled Environment Occupational 1.60 W/kg 0.08 W/kg 4.00 W/kg 8.00 W/kg 0.40 W/kg 20.00 W/kg Table 4. RF exposure limits Notes:

1. Uncontrolled environments are defined as locations where there is potential exposure of individuals who have no knowledge or control of their potential exposure. 2. Controlled environments are defined as locations where there is potential exposure of individuals who have knowledge of their potential exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 2. Summary of Results Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 22 of 51 Note:

Scaling = reported SAR Reported SAR = measured SAR * (scaling) Where P2 is maximum specified power, P1 is measured conducted power

)(dBm) measured SAR

= 10(

P2(mW) P1(mW) P2P1

=

10 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group MeasuredReportedFront sdie51241211.59.89144.88%0.0360.05224Front sdie56243711.59.93143.55%0.0180.026-Front sdie511246211.510.33130.92%0.0200.026-Back sdie511246211.510.33130.92%0.0020.003-Top side511246211.510.33130.92%0.0000.000-Bottom side511246211.510.33130.92%0.0000.000-Right side511246211.510.33130.92%0.0020.003-Left side511246211.510.33130.92%0.0000.000-Averaged SAR over 1g(W/kg)PlotpagePositionDistance(mm)CHFreq.(MHz)ScalingMax. Rated Avg.Power + Max.Tolerance (dBm)MeasuredAvg. Power(dBm)ModeWLAN802.11 b Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 23 of 51 3. Instruments List Manufacturer Device Type Serial number 3770 Date of last Date of next calibration calibration Apr.27,2017 Apr.26,2018 Dosimetric E-Field EX3DV4 System Validation Probe Dipole D2450V2 727 Apr.21,2017 Apr.20,2018 Data acquisition N/A 856 DAE3 Phantom DASY 52 V52.8.8 Electronics Software Aug.10,2017 Aug.09,2018 Calibration Calibration not required not required Calibration Calibration not required not required Network Analyzer E5071C MY46315263 Sep.08,2017 Sep.07,2018 Calibration not required 772D MY52180142 Apr.13,2017 Apr.12,2018 85070E MY44300677 Calibration not required Dielectric Probe Kit Dual-directional N/A ELI coupler RF Signal Generator Power Meter N5181A MY50144143 Mar.14,2018 Mar.13,2019 E4417A MY52240003 Dec.21,2017 Dec.20,2018 Power Sensor E9301H MY52200003 Dec.21,2017 Dec.20,2018 MY52200004 Dec.21,2017 Dec.20,2018 thermometer DTM-303A TP130077 Mar.09,2018 Mar.08,2019 Digital SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent TECPEL Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 4. Measurements Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 24 of 51 Date: 2018/4/3 WLAN 802.11b_Body_Front side_CH 1_5mm Communication System: WLAN 2.45G; Frequency: 2412 MHz Medium parameters used: f = 2412 MHz; = 1.846 S/m; r = 53.887; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.1C; Liquid temperature: 21.8C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN3770; ConvF(7.47, 7.47, 7.47); Calibrated: 2017/4/27;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn856; Calibrated: 2017/4/28 Phantom: Body DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Configuration/Body/Area Scan (101x141x1): Interpolated grid: dx=12 mm, dy=12 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 0.0603 W/kg Configuration/Body/Zoom Scan (7x7x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=5mm, dy=5mm, dz=5mm Reference Value = 1.316 V/m; Power Drift = -0.12 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 0.0880 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 0.036 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 0.014 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 0.0568 W/kg 0 dB = 0.0568 W/kg = -12.46 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 25 of 51 5. SAR System Performance Verification Date: 2018/4/3 Dipole 2450 MHz_SN:727 Communication System: CW; Frequency: 2450 MHz Medium parameters used: f = 2450 MHz; = 1.897 S/m; r = 53.731; = 1000 kg/m3 Phantom section: Flat Section Ambient temperature: 22.1C; Liquid temperature: 21.8C DASY5 Configuration:

Probe: EX3DV4 - SN3770; ConvF(7.47, 7.47, 7.47); Calibrated: 2017/4/27;

Sensor-Surface: 2mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn856; Calibrated: 2017/4/28 Phantom: Body DASY52 52.8.8(1258); SEMCAD X 14.6.10(7373) Configuration/Pin=250mW/Area Scan (51x51x1): Interpolated grid: dx=12 mm, dy=12 mm Maximum value of SAR (interpolated) = 20.2 W/kg Configuration/Pin=250mW/Zoom Scan (7x7x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid:

dx=5mm, dy=5mm, dz=5mm Reference Value = 100.4 V/m; Power Drift = 0.01 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 26.4 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 12.3 W/kg; SAR(10 g) = 5.52 W/kg Maximum value of SAR (measured) = 19.1 W/kg 0 dB = 19.1 W/kg = 12.81 dBW/kg Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 26 of 51 6. DAE & Probe Calibration Certificate Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 27 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 28 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 29 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 30 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 31 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 32 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 33 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 34 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 35 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 36 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 37 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 38 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 39 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 40 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 41 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group 7. Uncertainty Budget Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 42 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group AcDefgh=c * f / ei=c * g / ekSource of UncertaintyTolerance/UncertaintyProbabilityDistributioDivDiv Valueci (1g)ci (10g)StandarduncertaintyStandarduncertaintyvi, or VeffMeasurement systemProbe calibration6.00%N11116.00%6.00%Isotropy , Axial3.50%R31.732112.02%2.02%Isotropy, Hemispherical9.60%R31.732115.54%5.54%Modulation Response2.40%R31.732111.40%1.40%Boundary Effect1.00%R31.732110.58%0.58%Linearity4.70%R31.732112.71%2.71%Detection Limits1.00%R31.732110.58%0.58%Readout Electronics0.30%N11110.30%0.30%Response time0.80%R31.732110.46%0.46%Integration Time2.60%R31.732111.50%1.50%Measurement drift(class A evaluation)1.75%R31.732111.01%1.01%RF ambient condition -noise3.00%R31.732111.73%1.73%RF ambient conditions -reflections3.00%R31.732111.73%1.73%Probe positionerMechanical restrictions0.40%R31.732110.23%0.23%Probe Positioning withrespect to phantom shell2.90%R31.732111.67%1.67%Post-processing1.00%R31.732110.58%0.58%Max SAR Eval1.00%R31.732110.58%0.58%Test Sample relatedTest sample positioning2.90%N11112.90%2.90%M-1Device Holder Uncertainty3.60%N11113.60%3.60%M-1Drift of output power5.00%R31.732112.89%2.89%Phantom and SetupPhantom Uncertainty4.00%R31.732112.31%2.31%Liquid permittivity (mea.)-2.15%N110.640.43-1.38%-0.92%MLiquid Conductivity (mea.)3.54%N110.60.492.12%1.73%MCombined standarduncertaintyRSS11.69%11.58%Expant uncertainty (95%confidence interval), K=223.39%23.15%Measurement Uncertainty evaluation template for DUT SAR test (0.3-3G) 8. Phantom Description Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 43 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 44 of 51 9. System Validation from Original Equipment Supplier Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 45 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 46 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 47 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 48 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 49 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 50 of 51 Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group Report No. : EN/2018/30013 Page : 51 of 51

- End of report -

Unless otherwise stated the results shown in this test report refer only to the sample(s) tested and such sample(s) are retained for 90 days only. 90 This document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service printed overleaf, available on request or accessible at www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm and for electronic format documents, subject to Terms and Conditions for Electronic Documents at www.sgs.com/terms_e-document.htm. Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and jurisdiction issues defined therein. Any holder of this document is advised that information contained hereon reflects the Companys findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of Clients instructions, if any. The Companys sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. This document cannot be reproduced except in full, without prior written approval of the Company. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. SGS Taiwan Ltd. No.134,Wu Kung Road, New Taipei Industrial Park, Wuku District, New Taipei City, Taiwan 24803/134 t (886-2) 2299-3279 f (886-2) 2298-0488 www.tw.sgs.com Member of SGS Group

 

 

Description of Permissive Change Date: 2018-06-07 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A

(Original approval date: 11/20/2017) Applicant: Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A This Equipment is prepared for FCC Reassessment, The difference compared with original as below, If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours,

-----------------------------------

Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 #26129 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martins@ms.usi.com.tw

 

 

PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE TEST CONFIGURATION RADIATED EMISSION TEST (Below 1GHz) Report No.:160819E01D Reference No.: 180430E10 Page 1 RADIATED EMISSION TEST (Above 1GHz) Report No.:160819E01D Reference No.: 180430E10 Page 2 Report No.:160819E01D Reference No.: 180430E10 Page 3

 

 

smo, ATO1O9UTS nod Yury] UoTUaye soq Aw oAvy asevoyd syuouUOS Aue aAvy NOX pjnoys

\soy OY} UL UONVIBOUT JOYE sJUoWOIMboes [Je YUM pordutos ajnpour yowo ainsud 0} AyTIqisuodsa. ot} 9ye} *P}

am oroJoroY,], syuotuarmmbas pur SUONONASUT [PUIBLIO ay) 01 eonuapt Ajjeatueypaut pue Ayjeoruonoeye st pue poroidde useq sey oAoge peuousUr synpow! sy], VOTINENEINM-AOD CI OOd PUN LTOZ/LI/80 UO payed AT[BUITIIO sear YO!yM o[NpoU porynso oy O} CATAL AA PUerg /Z000LTAA

{[OpoOy]) BADWUABD [BIISIG SOY B Ppe O} SI oBuLYD dAISSIUIO [J SSe[D ST) Jo UONUDUT seers out yey arejoap Aqaray 4 asueyD ratsstutsod TI Ss[ QOA LOarans LIOZ LT OQUIOAON :21eq]

ueMIe] 197s NOJURN UaMoRsy, peoy Buidiey [oag IS eueT TFT pYT OD [eLsMpUy syHUAIVS [eqoTD [ess9atUy,

 

 

spreSay isog pansst st UoHeZLoYINeE yUsUIdInbs Jo wuss ay) dou MoTAaL oI[qnd soy a[quiIeAe 9q [JIM WoHeUOJUI asoy} pue s}UaWUNDOp [eUapIJUOS se poyURIS oq JoUUD ssad0id MOTASI UOOIFIIIO Sump juapuodsazoo pue yeurioy [oqe] CI OO suodas ysaj yuowo.nsvawt |[v yey) Surpueyssopun sno st I]

Jenueyy siasp) sojoyd dnjag 3sa,, rs sooy [eUIaquy ry sojoyd [euJoXg suonezoyny juatudinbg Jo ajeq IWeIH ap Joye skep OST

[gun sjusuyoeye SuIMOTTOJ 94} UO sonber AqyENUapTyUOS ULIA}-VOYs JI 0} UOISSIWWUOS oY} SuNsonbor or 9A\ SOdIAAp pazioyNeE APMOU JO SuYsyeU TeNjoe oy} [UN [eNUEpIyUoOo sureUaI UONBUIOJUT SAT}ISUaS ssaursng yep SurNsud opIYM POTT'Z$ AAO Lp Ul sera uoNepoduu ayy pur og'Z LAD Lp UE suoNE|Ner Supoyreur oy} YM Aduroo 0} Jopso ut Aotjod s UOISSTUMO) 24} JO SOL 1-b0 VC SNON S1qGng pue

(6S'0 LSbOSSUADLP) SAINI S UOISsTUTIOD JO Sh'0 PUR LSp'O SUONAg Jo suOIstAord oY 0} JUENSINg uladU0Z Avy 1] WOYA OL V9UIN 409 cI 994 Ayyeuapyuo; z0y ysonbay :390fqng OPOIZ purfareyy erqumjoD V AWD - pwoy SIA PURTLO SEPL UOISSIUWIOD SUOTBOTUNUILIOD [e19po,f LIOZ LT 49quiaaon :o1eq UBMIRL [OZPS NOWRA Uanjorsy, peoy Suidiey }-0ag I oueT IPI PYT 0D [eLasnpuy syHUAIIg [eqo[y [ess2AlUy,

 

 

Page Issued date FCC ID

: 1 of 4

: November 15, 2017

: COF-WMBNBM26A Photograph of platform and antenna position Right Appearance of the platform

(digital camera) Photographs of test setup 1-1:

(WM-BN-BM-26_A)

(Unit: mm) Antenna location Top Left Front Rear Bottom 47 Antenna Antenna UL Japan, Inc. Shonan EMC Lab. 1-22-3 Megumigaoka, Hiratsuka-shi, Kanagawa-ken, 259-1220 JAPAN Telephone: +81 463 50 6400 / Facsimile: +81 463 50 6401 Page Issued date FCC ID

: 2 of 4

: November 15, 2017

: COF-WMBNBM26A EUT and support equipment E 1-2:

Description of EUT and Support Equipment No. A 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module B Digital Camera C1 Lithium Ion Battery C2 D Battery Charger Model number WM-BN-BM-26_A FF170002

(DC 7.2V, typ.1260 mAh, 8.7 Wh) NP-W126S BC-W126 E1Q57PA#ABJ M/N: PPP009L-E Notebook PC (#SRE-111) AC Adaptor A: EUT (Wireless LAN/BLE module) Item C1 C2 E Antenna terminal port conducted power measurement SAR test E D B: Platform

(Digital camera) A: EUT (Wireless LAN /BLE module) Serial number E04F43433059 15000073 01 02 01 L3-NHT3R_05/07 3453442403 Manufacturer Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Fujifilm Corporation Fujifilm Corporation Fujifilm Corporation Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard Remark EUT Platform

*. Accessory of EUT. Battery ID: #1.

*. Accessory of EUT. Battery ID: #2. Support equipment. Support equipment. DC cable: 1.7m, Unshielded. AC cable: 1.7m, Unshielded. List of cables used No. USB cable (*. Accessary of digital camera) USB extension cable Name Close SAR test: applied Length(m) 0.55 1.4 Shield Shielded Shielded Name No. AC cable (For item #D) Length(m) 0.8 Shield Unshielded The movable position of LCD Open (1) SAR test: reduced (*1) Open (2) SAR test: reduced (*1) Open (3) SAR test: reduced (*1)

*1. An antenna is located in a point of a right hand grip. Therefore SAR inspection by the location of the LCD was reduced because an antenna was away from the LCD enough. UL Japan, Inc. Shonan EMC Lab. 1-22-3 Megumigaoka, Hiratsuka-shi, Kanagawa-ken, 259-1220 JAPAN Telephone: +81 463 50 6400 / Facsimile: +81 463 50 6401 Page Issued date FCC ID

: 3 of 4

: November 15, 2017

: COF-WMBNBM26A 1-3:

Photograph of test setup Position Setup photographs Right-front

(Touch) Right

(Touch) Front-right

(Touch) UL Japan, Inc. Shonan EMC Lab. 1-22-3 Megumigaoka, Hiratsuka-shi, Kanagawa-ken, 259-1220 JAPAN Telephone: +81 463 50 6400 / Facsimile: +81 463 50 6401 Page Issued date FCC ID

: 4 of 4

: November 15, 2017

: COF-WMBNBM26A 1-3: Photograph of test setup (cont'd) Position Setup photographs Front

(Touch) Front-lens

(Touch) Bottom

(Touch)

(No photograph)

(No photograph) UL Japan, Inc. Shonan EMC Lab. 1-22-3 Megumigaoka, Hiratsuka-shi, Kanagawa-ken, 259-1220 JAPAN Telephone: +81 463 50 6400 / Facsimile: +81 463 50 6401

 

 

Description of Permissive Change Date: 2017/11/20 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: Class II permissive change Applicant: Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A This Equipment is prepared for IC Reassessment, The difference compared with original as below, the product hardware is identical.

(1) R30 capacitor 1.8pF change to 2.7pF.

(2) C46 inductor remove.

(3) Added one model name. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours,

-----------------------------------

Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 #26129 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martins@ms.usi.com.tw

 

 

FCC Test Report (WLAN) Report No.: RF160819E01C FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A Test Model: WM-BN-BM-26_A Series Model: WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF2 Received Date: Oct. 26, 2017 Test Date: Nov. 06 to 08, 2017 Issued Date: Nov. 14, 2017 Applicant: UNIVERSAL GLOBAL SCIENTIFIC INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD. Address: 141, Lane 351, Sec. 1, Taiping Road., Tsaotuen, Nantou 54261, Taiwan Issued By: Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch Hsin Chu Laboratory Lab Address: E-2, No.1, Li Hsin 1st Road, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu City 300, Taiwan R.O.C. Test Location: E-2, No.1, Li Hsin 1st Road, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu City 300, FCC Registration /

Designation Number:

Taiwan R.O.C. 723255 / TW2022 This report is for your exclusive use. Any copying or replication of this report to or for any other person or entity, or use of our name or trademark, is permitted only with our prior written permission. This report sets forth our findings solely with respect to the test samples identified herein. The results set forth in this report are not indicative or representative of the quality or characteristics of the lot from which a test sample was taken or any similar or identical product unless specifically and expressly noted. Our report includes all of the tests requested by you and the results thereof based upon the information that you provided to us. You have 60 days from date of issuance of this report to notify us of any material error or omission caused by our negligence, provided, however, that such notice shall be in writing and shall specifically address the issue you wish to raise. A failure to raise such issue within the prescribed time shall constitute your unqualified acceptance of the completeness of this report, the tests conducted and the correctness of the report contents. Unless specific mention, the uncertainty of measurement has been explicitly taken into account to declare the compliance or non-compliance to the specification. The report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by TAF or any government agencies. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 1 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 Table of Contents Release Control Record .................................................................................................................................. 3 1 2 3 4 Certificate of Conformity ...................................................................................................................... 4 Summary of Test Results ..................................................................................................................... 5 2.1 Measurement Uncertainty ................................................................................................................... 5 2.2 Modification Record ............................................................................................................................ 5 General Information .............................................................................................................................. 6 3.1 General Description of EUT (WLAN) .................................................................................................. 6 3.2 Description of Test Modes ................................................................................................................... 8 3.2.1 Test Mode Applicability and Tested Channel Detail ............................................................................. 9 3.3 Duty Cycle of Test Signal ................................................................................................................... 11 3.4 Description of Support Units ............................................................................................................. 12 3.4.1 Configuration of System under Test .................................................................................................. 13 3.5 General Description of Applied Standards ........................................................................................ 14 Test Types and Results ...................................................................................................................... 15 4.1 Radiated Emission and Bandedge Measurement ............................................................................. 15 4.1.1 Limits of Radiated Emission and Bandedge Measurement .............................................................. 15 4.1.2 Test Instruments ................................................................................................................................ 16 4.1.3 Test Procedures ................................................................................................................................. 17 4.1.4 Deviation from Test Standard ............................................................................................................ 17 4.1.5 Test Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 18 4.1.6 EUT Operating Conditions ................................................................................................................. 19 4.1.7 Test Results ....................................................................................................................................... 20 4.2 Conducted Output Power Measurement ........................................................................................... 30 4.2.1 Limits of Conducted Output Power Measurement ............................................................................ 30 4.2.2 Test Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 30 4.2.3 Test Instruments ................................................................................................................................ 30 4.2.4 Test Procedures ................................................................................................................................. 30 4.2.5 Deviation from Test Standard ............................................................................................................ 30 4.2.6 EUT Operating Conditions ................................................................................................................. 30 4.2.7 Test Results ....................................................................................................................................... 31 Pictures of Test Arrangements .......................................................................................................... 33 4.3 Appendix Information on the Testing Laboratories ................................................................................ 34 Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 2 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 Issue No. Description RF160819E01C Original release. Release Control Record Date Issued Nov. 14, 2017 Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 3 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 1 Certificate of Conformity Product: 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module Brand: USI Test Model: WM-BN-BM-26_A Series Model: WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF2 Sample Status: ENGINEERING SAMPLE Applicant: UNIVERSAL GLOBAL SCIENTIFIC INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD. Test Date: Nov. 06 to 08, 2017 Standards: 47 CFR FCC Part 15, Subpart C (Section 15.247) ANSI C63.10: 2013 The above equipment has been tested by Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch, and found compliance with the requirement of the above standards. The test record, data evaluation & Equipment Under Test (EUT) configurations represented herein are true and accurate accounts of the measurements of the samples EMC characteristics under the conditions specified in this report. Prepared by :

, Date:

Nov. 14, 2017 Mary Ko / Specialist Approved by

:

, Date:

Nov. 14, 2017 May Chen / Manager Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 4 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 2 Summary of Test Results 47 CFR FCC Part 15, Subpart C (SECTION 15.247) Test Item Result Remarks Radiated Emissions and Band Edge Measurement PASS Meet the requirement of limit. Minimum passing margin is -0.1dB at 2385.00MHz. FCC Clause 15.205 /

15.209 /

15.247(d) 15.247(b) Conducted Power PASS Meet the requirement of limit. 2.1 Measurement Uncertainty Where relevant, the following measurement uncertainty levels have been estimated for tests performed on the EUT as specified in CISPR 16-4-2:

Measurement Radiated Emissions up to 1 GHz Radiated Emissions above 1 GHz Frequency 30MHz ~ 1GHz 1GHz ~ 6GHz 6GHz ~ 18GHz 18GHz ~ 40GHz Expanded Uncertainty

(k=2) () 5.32 dB 5.14 dB 5.04 dB 5.25 dB 2.2 Modification Record There were no modifications required for compliance. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 5 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 3 General Information 3.1 General Description of EUT (WLAN) Product Brand Test Model Series Model Status of EUT 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module USI WM-BN-BM-26_A WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF2 ENGINEERING SAMPLE Power Supply Rating Modulation Type 3.6Vdc from host equipment CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK for DSSS 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, BPSK for OFDM Modulation Technology DSSS,OFDM Transfer Rate 802.11b: up to 11Mbps 802.11g: up to 54Mbps 802.11n: up to 72Mbps Operating Frequency 2412 ~ 2462MHz Number of Channel 11 for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n (HT20) Output Power Antenna Type Antenna Connector Accessory Device Data Cable Supplied Note:

271.644mW Refer to Note Refer to Note NA NA 1. This report is prepared for FCC Class II change. The difference compared with the Report No.:

RF160819E01A design is as the following:

Added the one new model name to changed the component for improve radio throughput as following table:

Original Brand Model Diffenence USI WM-BN-BM-26_A

-

Newly Brand Model Diffenence USI WM-BN-BM-26_A_FF2 1. R30 capacitor 1.8pF change to 2.2pF belongs to part of antenna matching circuit. 2. C46 inductor remove 2. According to above conditions only Output Power and Radiated Emissions test items need to be performed. And all data was verified to meet the requirements. 3. There are WLAN, BT technology used for the EUT. 4. The antenna provided to the EUT, please refer to the following table:

Brand Model Antenna Net Gain(dBi)

(GHz to GHz) Frequency range Antenna Connecter Type Chip Type NA YAGEO ANT3216LL11R2400A 3.68 2.4~2.4835 5. WLAN and BT technology cannot transmit at same time. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 6 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 6. The EUT incorporates a SISO function. MODULATION MODE DATA RATE (MCS) TX & RX CONFIGURATION 802.11b 802.11g 1 ~ 11Mbps 6 ~ 54Mbps 802.11n (HT20) MCS 0~7 1TX 1TX 1TX 1RX 1RX 1RX 7. The above EUT information is declared by manufacturer and for more detailed features description, please refer to the manufacturer's specifications or User's Manual. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 7 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 3.2 Description of Test Modes 11 channels are provided for 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n (HT20):

Channel Frequency Channel Frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 2412MHz 2417MHz 2422MHz 2427MHz 2432MHz 2437MHz 7 8 9 10 11 2442MHz 2447MHz 2452MHz 2457MHz 2462MHz Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 8 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 3.2.1 Test Mode Applicability and Tested Channel Detail EUT CONFIGURE MODE APPLICABLE TO RE1G RE<1G APCM

-

DESCRIPTION

-

Where RE1G: Radiated Emission above 1GHz &

Bandedge Measurement APCM: Antenna Port Conducted Measurement RE<1G: Radiated Emission below 1GHz In the original report, the EUT had been pre-tested on the positioned of each 3 axis. The worst case was found when positioned on X-plane. NOTE:

1. Radiated Emission Test (Above 1GHz):

Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. MODE 802.11b 802.11g AVAILABLE TESTED MODULATION MODULATION DATA RATE CHANNEL CHANNEL TECHNOLOGY TYPE

(Mbps) 1 to 11 1 to 11 1, 6, 11 1, 6, 11 1, 6, 11 DSSS OFDM OFDM DBPSK BPSK BPSK 1 6 6.5 802.11n (HT20) 1 to 11 Radiated Emission Test (Below 1GHz):

Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. MODE CHANNEL CHANNEL TECHNOLOGY AVAILABLE TESTED MODULATION MODULATION DATA RATE TYPE BPSK

(Mbps) 6.5 802.11n (HT20) 1 to 11 6, OFDM Antenna Port Conducted Measurement:

Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. AVAILABLE TESTED MODULATION MODULATION DATA RATE CHANNEL CHANNEL TECHNOLOGY TYPE

(Mbps) MODE 802.11b 802.11g 1 to 11 1 to 11 802.11n (HT20) 1 to 11 Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 1, 6, 11 1, 6, 11 1, 6, 11 DSSS OFDM OFDM DBPSK BPSK BPSK 1 6 6.5 Page No. 9 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 Test Condition:

APPLICABLE TO ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS RE1G RE<1G APCM 22deg. C, 64%RH 25deg. C, 67%RH 25deg. C, 60%RH INPUT POWER

(SYSTEM) 120Vac, 60Hz 120Vac, 60Hz 120Vac, 60Hz TESTED BY Jyunchun Lin Weiwei Lo Robert Cheng Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 10 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 3.3 Duty Cycle of Test Signal If duty cycle of test signal is 98 %, duty factor is not required. 802.11b: Duty cycle = 12.475/12.5 = 0.998 802.11g: Duty cycle = 2.062/2.102 = 0.981 802.11n (HT20): Duty cycle = 2.063/2.103 = 0.981 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n (HT20) Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 11 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 3.4 Description of Support Units The EUT has been tested as an independent unit together with other necessary accessories or support units. The following support units or accessories were used to form a representative test configuration during the tests. ID Product Brand Model No. Serial No. FCC ID Remarks A. Test Tool B. DC Power Supply WM-BN-BM-26_A_EVB TDK V1.1 GOOD WILL INSTRUMENT CO., LTD. NA NA NA Supplied by client GPC-3030D 7700087 NA Provided by Lab Note:

1. All power cords of the above support units are non-shielded (1.8m). 2. Items E~F acted as communication partners to transfer data. ID Descriptions Qty. Length (m) Shielding

(Yes/No) Cores (Qty.) Remarks 1. DC Cable 1 3 No 0 Provided by Lab Note: The core(s) is(are) originally attached to the cable(s). Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 12 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 3.4.1 Configuration of System under Test Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 13 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 3.5 General Description of Applied Standards The EUT is a RF Product. According to the specifications of the manufacturer, it must comply with the requirements of the following standards:

FCC Part 15, Subpart C (15.247) KDB 558074 D01 DTS Meas Guidance v04 ANSI C63.10-2013 All test items have been performed and recorded as per the above standards. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 14 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4 Test Types and Results 4.1 Radiated Emission and Bandedge Measurement 4.1.1 Limits of Radiated Emission and Bandedge Measurement Radiated emissions which fall in the restricted bands must comply with the radiated emission limits specified as below table. Other emissions shall be at least 20dB below the highest level of the desired power:

Frequencies

(MHz) 0.009 ~ 0.490 0.490 ~ 1.705 1.705 ~ 30.0 30 ~ 88 88 ~ 216 216 ~ 960 Above 960 NOTE:

Field Strength

(microvolts/meter) Measurement Distance

(meters) 2400/F(kHz) 24000/F(kHz) 30 100 150 200 500 300 30 30 3 3 3 3 1. 2. 3. The lower limit shall apply at the transition frequencies. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). For frequencies above 1000MHz, the field strength limits are based on average detector, however, the peak field strength of any emission shall not exceed the maximum permitted average limits, specified above by more than 20dB under any condition of modulation. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 15 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4.1.2 Test Instruments DESCRIPTION &

MANUFACTURER Test Receiver Agilent Pre-Amplifier(*) EMCI Loop Antenna(*) Electro-Metrics MODEL NO. SERIAL NO. CALIBRATED CALIBRATED DATE UNTIL N9038A MY50010156 July 12, 2017 July 11, 2018 EMC001340 980142 Jan. 20, 2016 Jan. 19, 2018 EM-6879 264 Dec. 16, 2016 Dec. 15, 2018 RF Cable NA LOOPCAB-001 LOOPCAB-002 Jan. 17, 2017 Jan. 16, 2018 Pre-Amplifier Mini-Circuits Trilog Broadband Antenna SCHWARZBECK ZFL-1000VH2B AMP-ZFL-05 May 06, 2017 May 05, 2018 VULB 9168 9168-361 Dec. 29, 2016 Dec. 28, 2017 RF Cable 8D 966-3-1 966-3-2 966-3-3 Apr. 01, 2017 Mar. 31, 2018 Fixed attenuator Mini-Circuits Horn_Antenna SCHWARZBECK UNAT-5+

PAD-3m-3-01 Oct. 03, 2017 Oct. 02, 2018 BBHA9120-D 9120D-406 Dec. 28, 2016 Dec. 27, 2017 Pre-Amplifier EMCI EMC12630SE 980384 Feb. 02, 2017 Feb. 01, 2018 RF Cable Spectrum Analyzer Keysight EMC104-SM-SM-1200 EMC104-SM-SM-2000 EMC104-SM-SM-5000 160922 150317 150322 Feb. 02, 2017 Mar. 29, 2017 Mar. 29, 2017 Feb. 01, 2018 Mar. 28, 2018 Mar. 28, 2018 N9030A MY54490679 July 25, 2017 July 24, 2018 Pre-Amplifier EMCI EMC184045SE 980386 Feb. 02, 2017 Feb. 01, 2018 Horn_Antenna SCHWARZBECK RF Cable Software Antenna Tower & Turn Table Max-Full Boresight Antenna Fixture BBHA 9170 BBHA9170608 Dec. 15, 2016 Dec. 14, 2017 SUCOFLEX 102 36432/2 36433/2 Jan. 15, 2017 Jan. 14, 2018 ADT_Radiated_V8.7.08 NA NA MF-7802 MF780208406 NA FBA-01 FBA-SIP01 NA NA NA NA Spectrum Analyzer R&S FSV40 100964 July 1, 2017 June 30, 2018 Power meter Anritsu ML2495A Power sensor Anritsu MA2411B 1014008 0917122 May 11, 2017 May 10, 2018 May 11, 2017 May 10, 2018 NOTE:

1. The calibration interval of the above test instruments is 12 months and the calibrations are traceable to NML/ROC and NIST/USA. 2. *The calibration interval of the above test instruments is 24 months and the calibrations are traceable to NML/ROC and NIST/USA. 3. The test was performed in 966 Chamber No. 3. 4. The CANADA Site Registration No. is 20331-1. 5. Loop antenna was used for all emissions below 30 MHz. 6. Tested Date: Nov. 06 to 08, 2017. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 16 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4.1.3 Test Procedures For Radiated emission below 30MHz a. The EUT was placed on the top of a rotating table 0.8 meters above the ground at a 3 meter chamber room. The table was rotated 360 degrees to determine the position of the highest radiation. b. The EUT was set 3 meters away from the interference-receiving antenna, which was mounted on the top of a variable-height antenna tower. c. Both X and Y axes of the antenna are set to make the measurement. d. For each suspected emission, the EUT was arranged to its worst case and the rotatable table was turned from 0 degrees to 360 degrees to find the maximum reading. e. The test-receiver system was set to Quasi-Peak Detect Function and Specified Bandwidth with Maximum Hold Mode. NOTE:

1. The resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 9kHz at frequency below 30MHz. For Radiated emission above 30MHz a. The EUT was placed on the top of a rotating table 0.8 meters (for 30MHz ~ 1GHz) / 1.5 meters (for above 1GHz) above the ground at 3 meter chamber room for test. The table was rotated 360 degrees to determine the position of the highest radiation. b. The EUT was set 3 meters away from the interference-receiving antenna, which was mounted on the top of a variable-height antenna tower. c. The height of antenna is varied from one meter to four meters above the ground to determine the maximum value of the field strength. Both horizontal and vertical polarizations of the antenna are set to make the measurement. d. For each suspected emission, the EUT was arranged to its worst case and then the antenna was tuned to heights from 1 meter to 4 meters and the rotatable table was turned from 0 degrees to 360 degrees to find the maximum reading. e. The test-receiver system was set to quasi-peak detect function and specified bandwidth with maximum hold mode when the test frequency is below 1 GHz. f. The test-receiver system was set to peak and average detect function and specified bandwidth with maximum hold mode when the test frequency is above 1 GHz. If the peak reading value also meets average limit, measurement with the average detector is unnecessary. Note:

1. The resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 120kHz for Quasi-peak detection (QP) at frequency below 1GHz. 2. The resolution bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 1 MHz and the video bandwidth is 3 MHz for Peak detection (PK) at frequency above 1GHz. 3. The resolution bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 1MHz and the video bandwidth is 1/T

(Duty cycle < 98%) or 10Hz (Duty cycle 98%) for Average detection (AV) at frequency above 1GHz. 4. All modes of operation were investigated and the worst-case emissions are reported. 4.1.4 Deviation from Test Standard No deviation. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 17 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4.1.5 Test Setup For Radiated emission below 30MHz 1 m EUT&

Support Units 3m Turn Table 80cm Ground Plane Test Receiver For Radiated emission 30MHz to 1GHz 3m Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 18 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 10mAnt. Tower1-4m VariableTurn TableEUT& Support UnitsGround PlaneTest Receiver80cm For Radiated emission above 1GHz EUT&

Support Units 3m Ant. Tower 1-4m Variable Turn Table Absorber 150cm Ground Plane Test Receiver For the actual test configuration, please refer to the attached file (Test Setup Photo). 4.1.6 EUT Operating Conditions a. Placed the EUT on the testing table. b. Contorlling software (USI Broadcom Wireless Labtool 2.0) has been activated to set the EUT on specific status. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 19 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4.1.7 Test Results Above 1GHz Data 802.11b CHANNEL TX Channel 1 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 2385.00 2385.00

(dBuV/m) 62.8 PK 53.9 AV

*2412.00 109.0 PK

*2412.00 106.7 AV 4824.00 4824.00 37.4 PK 25.4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-11.2

-0.1

-36.6

-28.6 1.46 H 1.46 H 1.46 H 1.46 H 1.00 H 1.00 H TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 180 180 180 180 188 188 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 64.4 55.5 110.5 108.2 34.4 22.4

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5 3.0 3.0 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 56.2 PK 47.9 AV 100.0 PK 97.4 AV 37.1 PK 25.7 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 2385.00 2385.00

*2412.00

*2412.00 4824.00 4824.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-17.8

-6.1

-36.9

-28.3 4.00 V 4.00 V 4.00 V 4.00 V 1.06 V 1.06 V TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 285 285 285 285 234 234 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 57.8 49.5 101.5 98.9 34.1 22.7

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5 3.0 3.0 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 20 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 CHANNEL TX Channel 6 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6

*2437.00

*2437.00 4874.00 4874.00 7311.00 7311.00

(dBuV/m) 110.5 PK 108.0 AV 36.9 PK 25.0 AV 44.9 PK 33.7 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-37.1

-29.0

-29.1

-20.3 1.19 H 1.19 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 186 186 200 200 147 147 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 112.0 109.5 33.7 21.8 36.0 24.8

-1.5

-1.5 3.2 3.2 8.9 8.9 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 101.0 PK 98.5 AV 37.3 PK 25.6 AV 45.6 PK 34.4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6

*2437.00

*2437.00 4874.00 4874.00 7311.00 7311.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-36.7

-28.4

-28.4

-19.6 4.00 V 4.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 294 294 249 249 335 335 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 102.5 100.0 34.1 22.4 36.7 25.5

-1.5

-1.5 3.2 3.2 8.9 8.9 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 21 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 CHANNEL TX Channel 11 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*2462.00

*2462.00 2484.00 2484.00 4924.00 4924.00 7386.00 7386.00

(dBuV/m) 107.1 PK 104.7 AV 60.3 PK 52.5 AV 37.2 PK 25.7 AV 45.1 PK 33.9 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-13.7

-1.5

-36.8

-28.3

-28.9

-20.1 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 190 190 190 190 192 192 144 144 108.5 106.1 61.7 53.9 33.9 22.4 36.0 24.8

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4 3.3 3.3 9.1 9.1 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 98.1 PK 95.4 AV 54.2 PK 46.6 AV 37.6 PK 25.9 AV 45.3 PK 34.3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*2462.00

*2462.00 2484.00 2484.00 4924.00 4924.00 7386.00 7386.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-19.8

-7.4

-36.4

-28.1

-28.7

-19.7 3.98 V 3.98 V 3.98 V 3.98 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.04 V 1.04 V 291 291 291 291 248 248 337 337 99.5 96.8 55.6 48.0 34.3 22.6 36.2 25.2

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4 3.3 3.3 9.1 9.1 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 22 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 802.11g CHANNEL TX Channel 1 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 2390.00 2390.00

*2412.00

*2412.00 4824.00 4824.00

(dBuV/m) 69.3 PK 53.6 AV 109.6 PK 99.4 AV 36.4 PK 24.5 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-4.7

-0.4

-37.6

-29.5 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.00 H 1.00 H TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 181 181 181 181 186 186 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 70.9 55.2 111.1 100.9 33.4 21.5

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5 3.0 3.0 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 62.5 PK 47.4 AV 102.1 PK 92.2 AV 37.7 PK 26.2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 2390.00 2390.00

*2412.00

*2412.00 4824.00 4824.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-11.5

-6.6

-36.3

-27.8 3.99 V 3.99 V 3.99 V 3.99 V 1.00 V 1.00 V TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 270 270 270 270 233 233 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 64.1 49.0 103.6 93.7 34.7 23.2

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5 3.0 3.0 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 23 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 CHANNEL TX Channel 6 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2390.00 2390.00

*2437.00

*2437.00 2483.50 2483.50 4874.00 4874.00 7311.00 7311.00

(dBuV/m) 61.9 PK 45.1 AV 112.0 PK 102.0 AV 66.5 PK 45.9 AV 36.6 PK 24.8 AV 45.0 PK 33.5 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-12.1

-8.9

-7.5

-8.1

-37.4

-29.2

-29.0

-20.5 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.02 H 1.02 H 184 184 184 184 184 184 177 177 152 152 63.5 46.7 113.5 103.5 67.9 47.3 33.4 21.6 36.1 24.6

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5

-1.4

-1.4 3.2 3.2 8.9 8.9 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 56.8 PK 43.8 AV 104.6 PK 94.8 AV 57.5 PK 44.1 AV 37.6 PK 25.9 AV 44.7 PK 33.9 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2390.00 2390.00

*2437.00

*2437.00 2483.50 2483.50 4874.00 4874.00 7311.00 7311.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-17.2

-10.2

-16.5

-9.9

-36.4

-28.1

-29.3

-20.1 3.95 V 3.95 V 3.95 V 3.95 V 3.95 V 3.95 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 277 277 277 277 277 277 234 234 344 344 58.4 45.4 106.1 96.3 58.9 45.5 34.4 22.7 35.8 25.0

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5

-1.4

-1.4 3.2 3.2 8.9 8.9 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 24 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 CHANNEL TX Channel 11 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*2462.00

*2462.00 2483.50 2483.50 4924.00 4924.00 7386.00 7386.00

(dBuV/m) 108.3 PK 98.3 AV 72.1 PK 53.6 AV 37.1 PK 25.2 AV 45.5 PK 34.3 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-1.9

-0.4

-36.9

-28.8

-28.5

-19.7 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.03 H 1.03 H 186 186 186 186 186 186 152 152 109.7 99.7 73.5 55.0 33.8 21.9 36.4 25.2

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4 3.3 3.3 9.1 9.1 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 101.0 PK 91.1 AV 63.8 PK 47.6 AV 37.7 PK 26.0 AV 45.6 PK 34.6 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*2462.00

*2462.00 2483.50 2483.50 4924.00 4924.00 7386.00 7386.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-10.2

-6.4

-36.3

-28.0

-28.4

-19.4 4.00 V 4.00 V 4.00 V 4.00 V 1.04 V 1.04 V 1.02 V 1.02 V 284 284 284 284 248 248 348 348 102.4 92.5 65.2 49.0 34.4 22.7 36.5 25.5

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4 3.3 3.3 9.1 9.1 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 25 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 802.11n (HT20) CHANNEL TX Channel 1 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 2390.00 2390.00

*2412.00

*2412.00 4824.00 4824.00

(dBuV/m) 68.9 PK 53.2 AV 109.0 PK 98.4 AV 37.1 PK 25.1 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-5.1

-0.8

-36.9

-28.9 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.01 H 1.01 H TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 179 179 179 179 182 182 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 70.5 54.8 110.5 99.9 34.1 22.1

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5 3.0 3.0 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 62.8 PK 47.5 AV 101.6 PK 91.2 AV 37.9 PK 26.3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 2390.00 2390.00

*2412.00

*2412.00 4824.00 4824.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-11.2

-6.5

-36.1

-27.7 4.00 V 4.00 V 4.00 V 4.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 271 271 271 271 261 261 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 64.4 49.1 103.1 92.7 34.9 23.3

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5 3.0 3.0 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 26 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 CHANNEL TX Channel 6 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2390.00 2390.00

*2437.00

*2437.00 2483.50 2483.50 4874.00 4874.00 7311.00 7311.00

(dBuV/m) 62.4 PK 45.4 AV 112.4 PK 102.1 AV 66.4 PK 45.6 AV 36.9 PK 25.0 AV 44.9 PK 33.4 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-11.6

-8.6

-7.6

-8.4

-37.1

-29.0

-29.1

-20.6 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 173 173 173 173 173 173 182 182 135 135 64.0 47.0 113.9 103.6 67.8 47.0 33.7 21.8 36.0 24.5

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5

-1.4

-1.4 3.2 3.2 8.9 8.9 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 56.5 PK 43.3 AV 104.4 PK 94.5 AV 57.8 PK 44.5 AV 37.1 PK 25.4 AV 45.2 PK 34.0 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2390.00 2390.00

*2437.00

*2437.00 2483.50 2483.50 4874.00 4874.00 7311.00 7311.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-17.5

-10.7

-16.2

-9.5

-36.9

-28.6

-28.8

-20.0 3.90 V 3.90 V 3.90 V 3.90 V 3.90 V 3.90 V 1.03 V 1.03 V 1.10 V 1.10 V 289 289 289 289 289 289 262 262 327 327 58.1 44.9 105.9 96.0 59.2 45.9 33.9 22.2 36.3 25.1

-1.6

-1.6

-1.5

-1.5

-1.4

-1.4 3.2 3.2 8.9 8.9 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 27 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 CHANNEL TX Channel 11 FREQUENCY RANGE 1GHz ~ 25GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Peak (PK) Average (AV) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*2462.00

*2462.00 2483.50 2483.50 4924.00 4924.00 7386.00 7386.00

(dBuV/m) 107.5 PK 97.2 AV 68.1 PK 52.5 AV 37.7 PK 25.8 AV 44.7 PK 33.8 AV LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-5.9

-1.5

-36.3

-28.2

-29.3

-20.2 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.18 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 188 188 188 188 203 203 141 141 108.9 98.6 69.5 53.9 34.4 22.5 35.6 24.7

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4 3.3 3.3 9.1 9.1 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 100.0 PK 90.1 AV 63.4 PK 47.4 AV 38.2 PK 26.3 AV 45.3 PK 34.0 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*2462.00

*2462.00 2483.50 2483.50 4924.00 4924.00 7386.00 7386.00 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0

-10.6

-6.6

-35.8

-27.7

-28.7

-20.0 3.99 V 3.99 V 3.96 V 3.96 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.03 V 1.03 V 277 277 269 269 260 260 342 342 101.4 91.5 64.8 48.8 34.9 23.0 36.2 24.9

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4

-1.4 3.3 3.3 9.1 9.1 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. " * ": Fundamental frequency. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 28 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 Below 1GHz Data:

802.11n (HT20) CHANNEL TX Channel 6 FREQUENCY RANGE 9kHz~1GHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Quasi-Peak (QP) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 89.96 308.76 442.32 527.38 595.88 723.62

(dBuV/m) 35.5 QP 38.3 QP 39.9 QP 38.4 QP 35.5 QP 34.1 QP LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 43.5 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0

-8.0

-7.7

-6.1

-7.6

-10.5

-11.9 1.20 H 2.96 H 1.93 H 1.00 H 1.20 H 1.80 H TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 181 181 21 115 93 60 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 49.4 45.5 43.7 40.8 36.5 33.5

-13.9

-7.2

-3.8

-2.4

-1.0 0.6 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M NO. FREQ. (MHz) LEVEL EMISSION

(dBuV/m) 35.3 QP 38.1 QP 39.9 QP 38.2 QP 35.5 QP 34.1 QP 1 2 3 4 5 6 85.96 288.76 412.32 497.38 625.88 813.62 REMARKS:

LIMIT

(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) 40.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0

-4.7

-7.9

-6.1

-7.8

-10.5

-11.9 1.00 V 1.76 V 1.63 V 2.80 V 1.40 V 2.10 V TABLE ANGLE

(Degree) 151 69 0 185 133 90 RAW VALUE CORRECTION

(dBuV) FACTOR (dB/m) 49.2 46.0 44.9 41.3 36.1 32.0

-13.9

-7.9

-5.0

-3.1

-0.6 2.1 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 29 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4.2 Conducted Output Power Measurement 4.2.1 Limits of Conducted Output Power Measurement For systems using digital modulation in the 24002483.5 MHz bands: 1 Watt (30dBm) 4.2.2 Test Setup EUT Attenuator Power Sensor Power Meter 4.2.3 Test Instruments Refer to section 4.1.2 to get information of above instrument. 4.2.4 Test Procedures A peak / average power sensor was used on the output port of the EUT. A power meter was used to read the response of the peak / average power sensor. Record the power level. 4.2.5 Deviation from Test Standard No deviation. 4.2.6 EUT Operating Conditions Same as Item 4.1.6. Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 30 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4.2.7 Test Results FOR PEAK POWER 802.11b Channel Frequency (MHz) Peak Power (mW) Peak Power (dBm) Limit (dBm) Pass/Fail 2412 2437 2462 109.901 154.17 120.781 20.41 21.88 20.82 30.00 30.00 30.00 Pass Pass Pass 1 6 11 802.11g Channel Frequency (MHz) Peak Power (mW) Peak Power (dBm) Limit (dBm) Pass/Fail 1 6 11 2412 2437 2462 179.061 264.85 167.88 22.53 24.23 22.25 30.00 30.00 30.00 Pass Pass Pass 802.11n (HT20) Channel Frequency (MHz) Peak Power (mW) Peak Power (dBm) Limit (dBm) Pass/Fail 1 6 11 2412 2437 2462 158.489 271.644 156.315 22.00 24.34 21.94 30.00 30.00 30.00 Pass Pass Pass Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 31 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 FOR AVERAGE POWER 802.11b Channel Frequency (MHz) 1 6 11 802.11g 2412 2437 2462 Channel Frequency (MHz) 1 6 11 802.11n (HT20) 2412 2437 2462 Channel Frequency (MHz) 1 6 11 2412 2437 2462 Average Power Average Power

(mW) 67.764 95.499 72.946

(dBm) 18.31 19.80 18.63 Average Power Average Power

(mW) 44.157 79.799 37.068

(dBm) 16.45 19.02 15.69 Average Power Average Power

(mW) 33.343 79.433 29.785

(dBm) 15.23 19.00 14.74 Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 32 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 4.3 Pictures of Test Arrangements Please refer to the attached file (Test Setup Photo). Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 33 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1 Appendix Information on the Testing Laboratories We, Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch, were founded in 1988 to provide our best service in EMC, Radio, Telecom and Safety consultation. Our laboratories are FCC recognized accredited test firms and accredited according to ISO/IEC 17025. If you have any comments, please feel free to contact us at the following:

Linko EMC/RF Lab Tel: 886-2-26052180 Fax: 886-2-26051924 Hwa Ya EMC/RF/Safety Lab Tel: 886-3-3183232 Fax: 886-3-3270892 Email: service.adt@tw.bureauveritas.com Web Site: www.bureauveritas-adt.com Hsin Chu EMC/RF/Telecom Lab Tel: 886-3-6668565 Fax: 886-3-6668323 The address and road map of all our labs can be found in our web site also.

--- END ---

Report No.: RF160819E01C Reference No.:171026E01 Page No. 34 / 34 Report Format Version: 6.1.1

 

 

Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 Bae Ne FAX +886-49-232-9561 Date: October 18, 2016 We, Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. declare that the device does not support channel 12 ~ 13 in 2.4GHz band and any non-US channels in all the operational mode(s) for the following product. FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A If you should have any question(s) regarding this declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!

Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 #26129 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martins@ms.usi.com.tw

 

 

FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A Modular Approval Request Letter Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch September 14, 2016 Dear Application Examiner, UNIVERSAL GLOBAL SCIENTIFIC INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD., 802.11b/g/n + BT Wireless LAN Module, FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A, would like to have your authorization as a modular approval specific to the mobile RF exposure condition. The requirements of Public Notice DA00-1407 have been met and shown on the following statements. The requirements of Section 15.212 have been met and shown on the following statements. 1. The modular transmitter must have its own RF shielding. The radio portion of this module has been shielded, please see exhibition External Photo. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs. The EUT has buffered data inputs, it is integrated in chip BCM43438. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation. The part number of this regulator is BCM43438. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna requirements of section 15.203 and 15.204(C). The EUT meets the FCC antenna requirements. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration The EUT was tested in a stand-alone configuration via a test tool. Please see section Photographs of Test Configuration in the test report, the EUT was plugged in test tool. The modular transmitter must be labeled with its own FCC ID number. Please see exhibition Label Sample for the FCC ID of this module. And also in the exhibition Users Manual, there are instructions give to the OEM on how to label the end product. The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rule or operating requirements applicable to the transmitter and the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to explain any such requirements. The EUT is compliant with all applicable FCC rules. Detail instructions for maintaining compliance are given in the Users Manual. The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements. The EUT is compliant with all applicable RF exposure requirements. RF Exposure is addressed in the RF exposure exhibition. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Please contact me if you have any further questions. Thanks for your attention. Best Regards, Amanda Wu / Senior Specialist Bueau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch

 

 

>) SIEMIC GLOBAL TESTING & CERTIFICATIONS, 775 Montague Expressway Milpitas, CA 95035 Tel: 408-526-1188 Fax: 408-526-1088 Email: TCB@siemic.com Confidentiality Request Letter

| Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) x ee Approved Date ____Initial Release (obsolete) 1.0 1.0 | Nov-14-2006 Adding CFR 2.459 (obsolete) 40 | 2.0 August - 11 - 2008 Updated company template & Added text box 2.0 3.0 | Jan-31-2012 ___(obsolete) a _ | _ 7 Added IC confidentiality letter form (obsolete) _ 300 4.0 March-26-2015 Corrections to STC form. Added reference to KDB 4.0 | 5.0 Nov 19 2015

| (current) |

__ ss = a sauii SCS-F19: Confidentiality Request Letter Page | of 3 Rev 5.0 Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No, 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 SREY FAX +B86-49-232-9561 2016/10/15 To:

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD Subject: Permanent Confidentiality Request for FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A Pursuant to sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47, we respectfully request permanent confidential treatment of the following Exhibits accompanying this application as:

- Block Diagram

- Schematics

- Operational Description The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 #26129 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martins@ms.usi.com.tw SCS-F19: Confidentiality Request Letter Page 2 of 3 Rev 5.0 Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. No. 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsaotuen, AA Nantou County 54261, Taiwan TEL +886-49-221-2700 a FAX +886-49-232-9561 2016/10/15 To: Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Equipment Authorization Division 7345 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Short Term Confidentiality Request for FCC ID: COF-WMBNBM26A To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47, and to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public, the applicant requests the following documents contained in certification application be temporarily withheld from public disclosure for an initial period of 45 |_| or 180 |] days;

or for a specified date of 2017/01/31 not to exceed 180 days from the Grant Date. See KDB 726920..

- User Manual

- Internal Photos

- Test Setup photos The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public, The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. Sincerely, Martin Shih / Manager Universal Global Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Tel: 886-49-235-0876 #26129 Fax: 886-49-233-2061 E-mail: martins@ms.usi.com.tw SCS-F19: Confidentiality Request Letter Page 3 of 3 Rev 5.0 User Manual Internal Photos External Photos Test Setup photos